Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout494583 MORTENSON CONSTRUCTION - CONTRACT - RFP - 8031 CM/GC FOR OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATIONSCity of Fort Collins Purchasing SPECIFICATIONS Financial Services Purchasing Division 215 N. Mason St. 2"" Floor PO Box 580 Fort Collins, CO 80522 970.221.6775 970.221.6707 fcgov. com/purchasing CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION CM/GC BID NO. 8031 PURCHASING DIVISION 215 NORTH MASON STREET, 2ND FLOOR, FORT COLLINS MA-M Mortenson construction Old Town Square Renovation - Final GMP Construction Fort Collins, CO March 09, 2015 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT ESTIMATE Project Qty:o GSF Estimate Report 30 - STAGE 7440.005 PREFINISHED METAL GUTTER AND INCL DOWNSPOUTS TO STAGE ROOF - HALF ROUND (INCL IN SHEETMETAL ROOFING) TOTAL 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM 08 60 00 - SKYLIGHTS 8660.015 KALWALL PANELS TO SKYLIGHTS 120.0 SF 80.00 9,600 TOTAL 08 60 00 -SKYLIGHTS 9,600 TOTAL ROOFING 46,421 STAIRS 03 00 00 - CONCRETE 3000.050 BASEMENT STAIR ON GRADE (BY LF OF NOSE) 63.0 LF 33.31 2,099 3000.115 CONCRETE STAGE STEPS - GRAY CONCRETE 224.0 SF 27.12 6,075 3000.300 CONCRETE GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.0 LS 1,313.94 1,314 TOTAL 03 00 00 - CONCRETE 9,487 TOTAL STAIRS 9,487 PLUMBING 22 00 00 - PLUMBING 22000.000 ***SUB CONTRACTOR PLUMBING BUDGET TO 1.0 LS 19,001.00 19,001 STAGE*** - MORTENSON COST BREAKOUT 22000,105 BACK FLOW PREVENTER 2.0 EA 22000.110 HOSE BIBB 1.0 EA TOTAL 22 00 00 - PLUMBING 19,001 TOTAL PLUMBING 19,001 HVAC 23 00 00 - HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 22000.000 —SUBCONTRACTOR HVAC BUDGET TO 1.0 LS 4,621.00 4,621 STAGE*** 22000,105 20X 12 DUCT 24.0 LF 22000.110 20 X 20 DUCT TURN DOWN TERMINATION 1.0 EA 22000.115 24 X 12 AIR INTAKE LOUVER 1.0 EA 22000,120 24 X 12 EXHAUST LOUVER 1.0 EA 22000.125 ECH2 - 3KW ELECTRIC HEATER ON CEILING 1.0 EA 22000.130 EF2 - INLINE EXHAUST FAN 1.0 EA 22000A35 THERMOSTAT 1.0 EA TOTAL 230000- HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 4,621 TOTAL HVAC 4,621 ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL 26000.000 —SUBCONTRACTOR ELECTRICAL AND 1.0 LS 136,348 136,348 LIGHTING SYSTEMS BUDGET - STAGE*** 26000.005 DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 1.0 EA 26000.010 DUPLEX RECEPTACLE -ISOLATED GROUND 8.0 EA 26000.015 ETHERNET DISTRIBUTION BOX 1.0 EA 1506EO23 Old Town Square Renovation 90 CD.est Page 15 EXHIBIT GC -A to General Conditions of the Construction Contract Between OWNER and CONTRACTOR DISPUTE RESOLDD I'ION AGREEMENT OW14ER and CONTRACTOR hereby agree that Article 16 of the General Conditions of the Construction Contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR is amended to include the following agreement of the parties: 16.1. All claims, disputes and other matters in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof (except for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided by paragraph 14.15) will be decided by arbitration in aoaxdance with the Construction industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association then obtaining, subject to the limitations of the Article 16. This agreement so to arbitrate and any other agreement or consent to arbitrate entered into in accordance herewith as provided in this Article 16 will he spocifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction 16.2. No demand for arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter that is required to be referred to INGIIdEER initially for deitsion in accordance with paragraph 9.11 will be made until the earlier of (a) the date on which ENGINEER bar rendered a written decision or (b) the thirty-first day after the parties have presented their evidence to ENGINEER if a written decision has not been rendered by ENGINEER before that date- No demand for arbitration of any such claim, dispute or other matter will be made later than thirty days after the date on which ENGINEER has rendered a written decision in respect thereof in accordance with paragraph 9.11; and the failure to demand arbitration within said thirty days' period will result in ENGINEER's decision being final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR If ENGiNEERR renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence but will not supersede the arbitration proceedings, except where the decision is acceptable to the parties contented. No demand for arbitration of any written decision of ENGINEER rendered in accordance with paragraph 9.10 will be made later than ten days after the party making such demand has delivered written notice of intention to appeal as provided in paragraph 9.10. 16.3. Notice of the demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy will be sent to ENGWF.ER for information The demand for arbitration will be made within the thirty -day or ten-day period specified in paragraph 16.2 as applicable, and in all other cases within a reasonable time after the claim. dispute m other matter in question has arisen, and in no event shall any such remand be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such claim, dispute or other matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitation. EXTC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910.8 (1 "0 Edition) wl CITY OF FORT COLI3NS MOM ICATIONS (RF.V 9199) 16A. Except as provided in paragraph 16.5 below, no arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include by consolidation, joinder or in any Other manner any other person or entity (including ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultant and the officers, directors, agents, employees or consultants of any of them) who is not a party to this contract unless: 16.4.1. the inclusion of such other person or entity is necessary if complete relief is to be afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration, and 164.2 such other person or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which is txxmnon to those who are already parties to the arbitration and which will arise in such proceedings, and 16A 3. the written consent of the other person or entity sought to be included and of OWNER and CONI'RACfOR has been obtained for such inclusion, which consent shall make specific reference to this paragraph; but no such consent shall constitute consent to arbitration of any dispute not specifically described in such consent or to arbitration with any party not specifically identified in such consent. 16.5. Notwithstanding paragraph 16.4, if a claim, dispute or other matte in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involves the Work of a Subcontractor, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such Subcontractor as a party to the arbitration between OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall include in all subcontracts required by paragraph 6.11 a specific provision whereby the Subcontractor consents to being joined in an arbitration between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involving the Work of such Subcontractor, Nothing in this paragraph 16.5 nor in the provision of such subcontract consenting to joinder shall create any claim, right or cause of action in favor of Subcontractor and against OWNER, ENGINEER or ENGINEE-R's Consultants that does not otherwise exist. 16.6. The award rendered by the arbitrators will be final, judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof and it will not be subject to modification or appeal. 16.7. OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that they shall first submit any and all unsettled claims, counterclaims, disputes and other matters in question between them arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof ("disputes"), to mediation by the American Arbitration Association under the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association prior to either of them initiating against the other a demand for arbitration pursuant to paragraphs 16.1 through 16.6, unless delay in initiating arbitration would irrevocably prejudice one of the parties The respective thirty and ten day time limits within which to file a demand for arbitration as provided in paragraphs 16.2 and 16.3 above shall be suspended with respect to a dispute submitted to mediation within those same applicable time limits and shall remain suspended until ten days after the termination of the mediation. The mediator of any dispute submitted to mediation under this Agreement shall not serve as arbitrator of such dispute unless otherwise agreed. GC -AI SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 5.4.6 The Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). 5.4.9 This policy will include completed operations coverage/product liability coverage with limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). C. Add the following language after paragraph 5.4.13 SC-5.4.14 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain "Builder's Risk" insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary enclosures, buildings, falsework or materials in transit and shall insure against the following: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism, and malicious mischief; earthquake, demolition, collapse, debris removal, occasioned by the enforcement of the Rules and Regulations, water damage, and other such perils as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions. SC-5.4.15 Contractor's Builder's Risk policy shall cover materials and equipment stored at the site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by the Owner prior to being incorporated into the Work; provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an application for payment and recommended for approval by the Engineer. SC-8.10 OWNER's Project Manager A. Add the following language to ARTICLE 8: 8.10. The OWNER will provide a Project Manager. The CONTRACTOR shall direct all questions concerning Contract interpretation, Change Orders, and other requests for clarification or instruction to the Project Manager. 8.10.1 Authority: The Project Manager will be the OWNER's representative during the construction of the project. The Project Manager shall have the authority of the ENGINEER as defined in the General Conditions of the Contract. The Project Manager shall have the authority to reject work and materials whenever such rejection may be necessary to ensure the proper performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents 8.10.2 Duties and Responsibilities: The Project Manager will make periodic visits to the project site to observe the progress and quality of the Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall not be required to make comprehensive or SECTION 00900 ADDENDA, MODIFICATIONS AND PAYMENT 00950 Contract Change Order 00960 Application for Payment SECTION 00960 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROJECT: PAY ESTIMATE NO: DATE: CONTRACTOR:_ ADDRESS: CONTRACT FOR: PARTIAL TO The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of his knowledge; information and belief the work covered by this application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all accounts have been paid by him for Work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received, in this current payment shown herein is now due. CONTRACTOR: MM Hate: PO# FINAL TO In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on site observations and the data comprising the above application, the Architects Certifies to the Owner that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that the best of his knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED. ENGINEER: EM Date: Application is made for Payment, as shown below, in connection with the Contract. Schedule of Values is attached. The present status of the account for this Contract is as follows: ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT APPROVED CHANGE ORDERS TO DATE ADJUSTED CONTRACT AMOUNT TOTAL WORK COMPLETED AND MATERIALS USED RETAINAGE (10% OF TOTAL) TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAINAGE LIQUIDATED DAMAGES WITHHELD TOTAL EARNED LESS LIQUIDATED DAMAGES LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS CURRENT PAYMENT DUE APPROVED BY (Title) cc Accounting City Clerk Contractor Engineer Project File DATE: WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE No. DATE OF ISSUANCE EFFECTIVE DATE OWNER CONTRACTOR Contract: Project: OWNER's Contract No. ENGiNEER's Project No. You are directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s): Description: Purpose of Work Change Directive: Attachments: (List documents supporting change) If OWNER or CONTRACTOR believe that the above change has affected Contract Price any Claim for a Change Order based thereon will involve one or more of the following methods as defined in the Contract Documents. Method of determining change in Contract Price: Unit Prices ElLump Sum EJ Cost of the Work Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Price: Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract E Times: If the change involves an increase, the estimated Substantial Completion: days; amount is not to be exceeded without further Ready for final payment: days. authorization. RECOMMENDED: AUTHORIZED: ENGINEER OWNER By By: EJCDC No. 1910-8-F (1996 Edition) Prep" by the Engineen lei nt Contract Doa nt. Cmnmittee and endomed by The Aumiated General Contr tm or America and the Constructioe Specification IAllituta. Cement of co W Car»'truction recnnorogy CLARIFICATION NOTICE Project: Clarification Notice Number: From: To: Date: A/F Project Number: Re: ConnaclFor. This Clarification Notice is issued for the purpose of clarifying the. Contract Documents based on an interpretation reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents, and therefore has no effect on the Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with Work in accordance with this Clarification Notice indicates acceptance with no change in the Contract Stan or Contract Time. Specification Section: Paragraph; Drawing Reference: Detail Description: ❑ Attachments Signed by: Date: Copies: Cl owner ❑ Consultants ❑ Cl Cl ❑ File Copyright 1994, Construction Specifications Imlitute, Page of July 19A 99 Canal Canter Plaza, Suite 300 Alexandria, VA CS1 Form 13.3A 22314 90% Construction Documents Old Town Square Renovation Fort Collins, CO studioINSITE February 6th, 2015 SPECS February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 05 01 FOUNTAIN GENERAL CONDITIONS.....................................................................................................10 13 05 02 FOUNTAIN BONDING AND GROUNDING...............................................................................................4 13 05 03 FOUNTAIN EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING...........................................................................................3 13 05 04 FOUNTAIN CONCRETE WORK...............................................................................................................8 130510 FOUNTAIN RECIRCULATION EQUIPMENT............................................................................................7 130515 FOUNTAIN WATER TREATMENT............................................................................................................9 13 05 20 FOUNTAIN VALVES AND PIPING............................................................................................................5 13 05 25 FOUNTAIN RECIRCULATION FITTINGS AND COMPONENTS.............................................................3 13 05 35 FOUNTAIN FINISHES...............................................................................................................................5 13 05 40 FOUNTAIN WATERPROOFING...............................................................................................................4 13 05 45 FOUNTAIN MAINTENANCE.....................................................................................................................3 DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED) DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 15 010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS ................................................... _............................................. 9 15100 BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD............................................................................................................5 15 250 INSULATION.............................................................................................................................................2 15400 PLUMBING................................................................................................................................................4 15 800 AIR DISTRIBUTION...................................................................................................................................6 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16 010 GENERAL PROVISIONS........................................................................................................................13 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.......................................................................................................8 16 400 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION................................................................................................................3 16 500 LIGHTING..................................................................................................................................................2 16 700 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS...............................................................................................................2 26 56 01 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS FOR PUBLIC SPACES....................................................................11 31 00 00 EARTHWORK..........................................................................................................................................14 32 02 90 TREE PROTECTION.................................................................................................................................3 321200 FLEXIBLE PAVING..................................................................................................................................10 321300 RIGID PAVING..........................................................................................................................................9 321316 DECORATIVE CONCRETE..............................................................................................._.....................9 321413 RECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING.......................................................................................................8 321440 STONE PAVING........................................................................................................................................7 32 84 00 IRRIGATION SYSTEM...................................................................._......................................................13 32 90 00 PLANTINGS.............................................................................................................................................10 331000 WATER UTILITIES..................................................................................................................................10 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES.......................................................................................................10 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES..............................................................................................................10 Copyright 2015 TABLE OF CONTENTS - 2 February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. 1. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 117. 2.2 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Low -Alloy -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C. Epoxy -Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars„ epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch bar length. D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded -wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Materials: Cast -in -place Concrete 03 30 00-2 Copyright 2015 RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED: M.A. CA400+J� CONTRACTOR] BY: �/ / VA i f q, R 51-ei< 20/,' Printed Date wc� p�Es/o6N7' o�rXA�O�✓.� Title (Seal - if Bid is by corporation z s zA -N License Number (If Applicable) Address) �c a) ) 3""' �4 • . 3� LA L 0 Telephone �'I) Email INS i)1r C1 1(�,. ClV1� r? fuv tM(�r'�f U1SO Vl •e0m MARCIA E ANKELE NOTARY PUBLIC STATE OF COLORADO NOTARY ID 20054040257 MY COMMISSION EXPIRES OCTOBER 17, 2017 February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. b. Concrete Sealants Inc. C. JP Specialties, Inc. d. Sika Greenstreak. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Clear, Solvent -Borne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Corporation -Construction Systems. b. ChemMasters, Inc. C. Dayton Superior. d. Euclid Chemical Company (The): an RPM company. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Corporation -Construction Systems. b. ChemMasters, Inc. C. Dayton Superior. d. Euclid Chemical Company (The): an RPM company. A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. Cast -in -place Concrete 03 30 00-4 Copyright 2015 February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 6. Synthetic Micro -Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than a rate of 1.5 lb/cu. yd.. 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Do not chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 3.4 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Cast -in -place Concrete 03 30 00-6 Copyright 2015 February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with AC1302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power -driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view. 2. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.-long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch. 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period. D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. Cast -in -place Concrete 03 30 00-8 Copyright 2015 February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO Alternate Fabricator Qualification: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a minimum 5 years of submitted documented experience with a record of successful in-service performance on projects with similar material, design, complexity and scope to this Project. If a non-AISC certified fabricator is chosen for this Project, no portion of Section 23.9, "SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL", shall be waived. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. 1. Alternate Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a minimum 5 years of submitted documented experience with a record of successful in-service performance on projects with similar material, design, complexity and scope to this Project. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. B. Channels, Angles -Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M . D. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. Zinc -Coated High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers. Finish: Hot -dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating. B. Tension -Control, High -Strength Bolt -Nut -Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts, and hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating. Structural Steel Framing 051200-2 Copyright 2015 February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins. CO B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high -strength bolted, slip -critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning. C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural -steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop -bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop -welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. Structural Steel Framing 051200-4 Copyright 2015 February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1. Verify structural -steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high -strength bolted connections. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. C. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. END OF SECTION 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 051200-6 Copyright 2015 2.2 February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins. CO 1. Galvanized and Shop -Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40, G60 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard baked -on, rust -inhibitive primer. a. Color: Manufacturer's standard White. 2. Deck Profile: ER2A. 3. Profile Depth: 2 inches. 4. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 0.0358 inch. ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, low -velocity, power -actuated or pneumatically driven carbon -steel fasteners, or self -drilling, self -threading screws. C. Side -Lap Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, hexagonal washer head; self -drilling, carbon -steel screws. No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Flat Sump Plates: Single -piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M. H. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive primer of same color as primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. C. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. D. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. E. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. Steel Decking 053100-2 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus February 06, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold applied asphalt dampproofing for concrete surfaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D1187 - Standard Specification for Asphalt -Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. 2. D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. 3. D4261 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete Unit Masonry for Coating. 4. E96/E96M - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: Include product description and performance characteristics. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials in enclosed space, protected from weather and direct sun. B. Maintain temperature range in storage area of 40 to 90 degrees F. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply at ambient or surface temperatures below 40 degrees F, nor during inclement weather. B. Substrate: Cured minimum 7 days. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. BASF Building Systems. (www.buildincisystems.basf.com) 2. Euclid Chemical Company. (www.tamms.com) 3. W.R. Meadows, Inc. (www.wrmeadows.com) B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. 2.2 MATERIALS BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13 - 1 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 07 4113 PREFORMED METAL STANDING SEAM ROOFING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section covers the pre -finished, pre -fabricated Architectural standing seam roof system. All metal trim, accessories, fasteners, insulation and sealants indicated on the drawings as part of this section. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including general and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to this section. C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Roof Deck structural steel, flat roof systems, perimeter edge systems. Roof hatches, firestopping not included in this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Factory formed Standing Seam metal roof panels B. Related work specified elsewhere. (Note: select from the below or add appropriate sections) 1. Section 05100 - Structural Steel 2. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight roofing system. B. References: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 653: Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot Dip Process b. ASTM A 792: Steel Sheet, Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip Process c. ASTM B 209: Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate d. ASTM B370 Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction 2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) a. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 1993 edition 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) a. AISI Cold Formed Steel Design Manual 4. Aluminum Association a. Aluminum Design Manual 5. Metal Construction Association a. Preformed metal Wall Guidelines 6. Code References a. ASCE, Minimum Loads for Buildings and Other Structures b. BOCA National Building Codes c. UBC Uniform Building Code d. SBC Standard Building Code 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PREFORMED METAL STANDING SEAM ROOFING 0741 13 - 1 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO A. Furnish detailed drawings showing profile and gauge of exterior sheets, location and type of fasteners, location, gauges, shape and method of attachment of all trim locations and types of sealants, and any other details as may be required for a weather -tight installation. B. Provide finish samples of all colors specified. C. Shop drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels, metal wall panels or metal soffit panels, details of edge conditions, side -seam joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures and accessories, and special details. Distinguish between factory and field - assembled work D. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, on which the following are shown and coordinated with each other, base don input from installer of the items involved: 1. Roof panels and attachments 2. Metal trusses, bracings and supports 3. Roof -mounted items including snow guards and items mounted on roof curbs. E. LEED Submittals 1. Product Test reports for Credit SS 7.2. For roof panels, indicating that the panels comply with Solar Reflective Index requirement 2. Product data for Credit MR 4.1 and credit MR 4.2: Indicating the percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instruction and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling. C. Unload, store and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting and surface damage. D. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage. E. Protect strippable protective coating on any metal coated product from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for material installation. 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof panels by field measurements before fabrication. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. B. Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim and construction of decks, parapet walls and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure and noncorrosive installation. PREFORMED METAL STANDING SEAM ROOFING 0741 13 - 3 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus n c �..,ye.... • :4. � fff 11 { it i t 1 S A4�Jl� go r � '• +� .�'w �w x r Fort Collins Mortenson f p '1 S 'V f • �, z. v ' 73#qwr �.rerr I. g n I 1� .e' �4s'�-crs¢•n u�•� ,a'aa Esn .g's s-afa. S.,d esi.r ate'.• t IN Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO manufacturer. Membrane to be a minimum of 40 mil thickness, smooth, non -granular, by one of the following manufacturers: a. W.R Grace "Ice & water Shield" b. Cetco Strongseal c. Carlisle CCW WIP 300HT d. Interwrap Titanium PSU e. MFM Corp "Wind & Water Shield" f. Polyguard Deck Guard HT of Polyglas HT g. Tamko TW Tile and Metal Underlayment 2. Underlayment shall be laid in horizontal layers with joints lapped toward the eaves a minimum of 6", and well secured along laps and at ends as necessary to properly hold the felt in place. All underlayment shall be preserved unbroken and whole. 3. Ice and Water Shield shall lap all hips and ridges at least 12" to form double thickness and shall be lapped 6" over the metal of any valley or built-in gutters and shall be installed as required by the Standing Seam Panel Manufacturer to attain the desired 20 Year Weathertightness Warranty. J. Sealants 1. Provide two-part polysulfide class B non -sag type for vertical and horizontal joints or 2. one part polysulfide not containing pitch or phenolic extenders or 3. Exterior grade silicone sealant recommended by roofing manufacturer or 4. One part non -sag, gun grade exterior type polyurethane recommended by the roofing manufacturer. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Comply with dimensions, profile limitations, gauges and fabrication details shown and if not shown, provide manufacturer's standard product fabrication. B. Fabricate components of the system in factory, ready for field assembly. C. Fabricate components and assemble units to comply with fire performance requirements specified. D. Apply specified finishes in conformance with manufacturer's standard, and according to manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine alignment of structural steel and related supports, primary and secondary roof framing, solid roof sheathing, prior to installation. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FASTENERS A. Secure units to supports B. Place fasteners as indicated in manufacturer's standards. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Panels shall be installed plumb and true in a proper alignment and in relation to the structural framing. The erector must have at least five years successful experience with similar applications. PREFORMED METAL STANDING SEAM ROOFING 0741 13 - 5 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal flashings and trim. 2. Copings. 3. Gutters and downspouts. 4. Counterf lashings over membrane roof base (lashings. 5. Counterf lashings at penetrations. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 2. 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc -Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. 3. 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. 4. 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. B. American National Standards Institute/Single Ply Roofing Institute (ANSI/SPRI) ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 2. A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 3. A755/A755M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot -Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil -Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy - Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. B506 - Specification for Copper -Clad Stainless Steel Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 1 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 4. Finish: High-performance enamel coating, AAMA 621, color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. C. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A792/A792M, Commercial Quality, [AZ50] [AZ55] L_] aluminum -zinc alloy coating, [24] [26] [_j gage core steel unless noted otherwise. D. Precoated Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A792/A792M, Commercial Quality, [AZ50] [AZ55] L] aluminum -zinc alloy coating, [24] [26] [ I gage core steel unless noted otherwise. 2. Finish: AAMA 621, fluoropolymer coating, containing minimum 70 percent PVDF resins, color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. E. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, 2D conventional annealed finish, [0.015] [&018] [_] inch thick. F. Aluminum Sheet: 1. ASTM B209, alloy 3003, temper H14, [0.026] [0.032] [l inch thick. 2. Finish: Natural. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Solder: ASTM B32. B. Fasteners: Same material and finish as sheet metal, with neoprene gasketed washers where exposed. C. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07 9200. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components in accordance with SMACNA Manual. B. Profiles: 1. Gutters: SMACNA Plate U, Style [ 1. 2. Downspouts: SMACNA Plate [ 1, Style jam. 3. Fabricate end caps, downspout outlets and headers, straps, brackets, and downspout strainers in profile to suit gutters and downspouts. C. Pre tin edges of [copper] sheet. D. Solder shop formed joints [except pop rivet and seal joints at prefinished metal]. After soldering, remove flux and wash clean. E. Fabricate corners in single units with minimum 18 inch long legs. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. G. Form sections accurate to size and shape, square and free from distortion and defects. H. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction in sheet metal: 1. Gutters: a. Place expansion joints at maximum 50 feet on center. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 3 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1. Secure with straps spaced maximum 8 feet on center and within 2 feet of ends and elbows. 2. Flash downspouts into [gutters] [conductor heads] and fasten. 3. Flash upper sections into lower sections minimum 2 inches at joints; fasten sections together. L. Apply joint sealers as specified in Section 07 9200. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean sheet metal, remove slag, flux, stains, spots, and minor abrasions without etching surfaces. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 5 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1. Certification: Installer's certification that snow guard system was installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Contract Documents are based on ColorGard by Peterson Aluminum Corporation (PAC - Clad). B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Clamps: 1. Manufactured from 6061-T6 aluminum extrusions conforming to ASTM B221 or aluminum castings conforming to ASTM B85 and to AA Aluminum Standards and Data. 2. Clamp model: No. [S-5-U.] [S-5-T.] [S-5-Z.] [S-5-E.] [S-5-K.] 3. Clamp type: [Standard (two screw.] [Mini (one screw).] 4. Setscrews: 300 Series stainless steel, 18-8 alloy, 3/8 inch diameter, with round nose point. 5. Attachment bolts: 300 Series stainless steel, 18-8 alloy, 10 mm diameter, with flat washers. B. Cross Members: 1. Manufactured from 6061-T6 alloy and temper aluminum extrusions conforming to ASTM B221 and AA Aluminum Standards and Data. 2. Receptacle in face to receive color -matched metal strips. 3. Provide splice connectors ensuring alignment and structural continuity at end joints. C. Color Strips: Same material and finish as roof panels; obtained from roof panel manufacturer. D. Snow and Ice Clips: 1. Aluminum, with rubber foot, 3 inches wide, snap -locking to cross members. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to beginning installation, verify that: 1. Panel seaming is complete. 2. Panel attachment is sufficient to withstand loads applied by snow guard system. 3. Installation will not impeded roof drainage. A. Clean areas to receive attachments; remove loose and foreign matter that could interfere with installation or performance. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. SNOW GUARDS 07 72 53.01 - 2 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hollow steel doors and frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. 3. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Steel Door Institute (SDI): 1. A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finished Painted Steel for Steel Doors and Frames. 2. A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware Reinforcings. 3. A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 5. A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 2. A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic - Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. 3. A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy and High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability. 4. C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 5. E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows. D. Steel Door Institute (SDI) 117 - Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 90% Construction Documents A. Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM Al008/1008M. cold rolled. " OR **** Old Town Square Renovation Fort Collins, CO B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A653/A653M, hot dipped, Structural Quality, Class G40 galvanized. C. Gavvannealed Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A924, Class A40 galvannealed. D. Door Core: 1. Exterior doors: [Foamed -in -place polyurethane insulation] [Rigid polystyrene insulation] 2. Interior temperature -rise rated doors: Rigid mineral fiberboard. 3. Interior [fire -rated] [and] [non -fire rated] doors: [Resin impregnated fibrous honeycomb.] [Vertical steel stiffeners.] E. Batt Insulation: Mineral wool type. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Glass, Glazing Sealers, and Accessories: Specified in Section 08 8000. B. Primer: Zinc rich type. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors and frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.8. B. Fabricate exterior doors and frames from [galvanized] [galvannealed] steel sheet. C. Fabricate exterior frames with 3/8 inch vinyl thermal break separating interior and exterior surfaces. D. Doors: 1. Fabricate from minimum [14] [16] [18] [20] gage sheets. 2. Close top and bottom edges of doors with steel channel, minimum 16 gage, extending full width of door, and spot welded to both faces, with top channel flush and bottom channel recessed. 3. Fill voids between vertical steel stiffeners with batt insulation. 4. Fabricate vertical door edges as vertical seam edge filled, dressed smooth, intermittently welded seams, edge filled, dressed smooth, or continuously welded seam, dressed smooth. E. Frames: 1. Fabricate from minimum [12] [14] [16] [18] gage sheets. 2. Provide self aligning tabs and slots to hold corners in alignment. "OR`* HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 3 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO C. Touch up damaged metallic coatings. D. Apply manufacturer's standard rust inhibiting primer paint, air-dried or baked on, meeting requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.10. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.11. B. Set plumb and level. C. Secure to adjacent construction using fastener type best suited to application. D. Install glass as specified in Section 08 8000. E. Install hardware in accordance with Section 08 7100. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions in primer paint to match factory finish. END OF SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13 - 5 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO a. International Building Code Evaluation Report b. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed (UL 723) — Submit UL Card c. Burn Extent (ASTM D 635) d. Color Difference (ASTM D 2244) e. Impact Strength (UL 972) f. Bond Tensile Strength (ASTM C 297 after aging by ASTM D 1037) g. Bond Shear Strength (ASTM D 1002) h. Beam Bending Strength (ASTM E 72) i. Fall Through Resistance (ASTM E 661) j. Insulation U-Factor (NFRC 100) k. NFRC System U-Factor Certification (NFRC 700) I. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (NFRC or Calculations) m. Condensation Resistance Factor (AAMA 1503) n. Air Leakage (ASTM E 283) o. Structural Performance (ASTM E 330) p. Water Penetration (ASTM E 331) q. Class A Roof Covering Burning Brand (ASTM E 108) r. UL Listed Class A Roof System (UL 790) (Optional) — Submit UL Card 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications 1. Material and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least ten consecutive years and which can show evidence of those materials being satisfactorily used on at least six projects of similar size, scope and location. At least three of the projects shall have been in successful use for ten years or longer. 2. Panel system must be listed by an ANSI accredited Evaluation Service, which requires quality control inspections and fire, structural and water infiltration testing of sandwich panel systems by an accredited agency. 3. Quality control inspections shall be conducted at least once each year and shall include manufacturing facilities, sandwich panel components and production sandwich panels for conformance with AC177 "Translucent Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Faced Panel Wall, Roof and Skylight Systems" as issued by the ICC-ES. B. Installer's Qualifications: Installation shall be by an experienced installer, which has been in the business of installing specified skylight systems for at least two consecutive years and can show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope and type. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The manufacturer shall be responsible for the configuration and fabrication of the complete skylight panel system. 1. When requested, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Standard skylight system shall have less than 0.01 cfm/ft2 air leakage by ASTM E 283 at 6.24 PSF (50 mph) and no water penetration by ASTM E 331 at 15 PSF; and structural testing by ASTM E 330. SKYLIGHT SYSTEM 08 45 23 - 2 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins. CO 3. Exterior face sheets: a. Color stability: Full thickness of the exterior face sheet shall not change color more than 3 CIE Units DELTA E byASTM D 2244 after years outdoor South Florida weathering at 50 facing south, determined by the average of at least three white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure long-term color stability. Color stability shall be unaffected by abrasion or scratching. b. Strength: Exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength, impenetrable by hand held pencil and repel an impact minimum of ft. lbs. without fracture or tear when impacted by a 3-1/4" diameter, 5 lb. free -falling ball per UL 972. 4. Appearance: a. Exterior face sheets: Smooth, thick and in color. b. Interior face sheets: Smooth, thick and in color. c. Face sheets shall not vary more than ± 10% in thickness and be uniform in color. B. Grid Core 1. I-beam grid core shall be of 6063-T6 or 6005-T5 alloy and temper with provisions for mechanical interlocking of muntin-mullion and perimeter. Width of I-beam shall be no less than 7/16". 2. I-beam Thermal break: Minimum 1", thermoset fiberglass composite. C. Laminate Adhesive 1. Heat and pressure resin type adhesive engineered for structural sandwich panel use, with minimum 25-years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by the International Code Council "Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesives". 2. Minimum tensile strength of 750 PSI when the panel assembly is tested by ASTM C 297 after two exposures to six cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D 1037. 3. Minimum shear strength of the panel adhesive by ASTM D 1002 after exposure to four separate conditions: a. 50% Relative Humidity at 68' F: 540 PSI b. 182' F: 100 PSI c. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D 1037 at room temperature: 800 PSI d. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D 1037 at 182' F: 250 PSI 2.3 PANEL CONSTRUCTION A. Provide sandwich panels of flat fiberglass reinforced translucent face sheets laminated to a grid core of mechanically interlocking I -beams. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam and have a neat, sharp edge. 1. Thickness:2-3/4" 2. Light transmission: % 3. Solar heat gain coefficient 4. Panel U-factor by NFRC certified laboratory: 2-3/4" thermally broken grid OR 2- 3/4" aluminum grid 5. Complete insulated panel system shall have NFRC certified U-factor of SKYLIGHT SYSTEM 08 45 23 - 4 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. GENERAL COMPANY INFORMATION 2. SUSTAINABILITY 3. PROJECT PROFILE 4. COMPANY RESOURCES 5. KEY PROJECT STAFFING 6. PROJECT BUDGET & COST CONTROL 7. CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING & SCHEDULING 8. QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL Gam' � :iPli�l�[e1�31i:�1�►[�� 10. SAFETY RECORD 11.TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS 12. FINANCIAL STATEMENT 13. BONDING COMPANY REFERENCE 14.INSURANCE 15. CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT 16. CM/GC FEES CM/GC SERVICES FOR OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATIONS • DECEMBER 2, 2014 Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete, masonry or pressure treated wood, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or method recommended by manufacturer. A. Install the skylight system in accordance with the manufacturer's installation recommendations and approved shop drawings. 1. Anchor component parts securely in place by permanent mechanical attachment system. 2. Accommodate thermal and mechanical movements. 3. Set perimeter framing in a full bed of sealant compound, or with joint fillers or gaskets to provide weather -tight construction. B. Install joint sealants at perimeterjoints and within the panel system in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Water Test: Installer to test skylights according to procedures in AAMA 501.2. B. Repair or replace work that does not pass testing or that is damaged by testing and retest work. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean the skylight system inside and outside, immediately after installation. B. Refer to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 08 45 23 SKYLIGHT SYSTEM 08 45 23 - 6 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire -rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated. C. Smoke- and Draft -Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft -control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg of water. D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements: a. Interior, Non -Fire -Rated Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door. b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 112 inch high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail, overnight package service or hand delivery with signed receipt.. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00 - 2 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO C. IVES Hardware, an Allegion Company. (5BB) d. McKinney Products Company, an ASSA ABLOY Group company (TB) e. Stanley Commercial Hardware, Div. of Stanley Security Solutions. (FBB) 2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with the following: B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2, Grade 1; Series 4000, including Anti -Vandal product design. 2.4 AUXILIARY LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1; subject to compliance with design and function. 2.5 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf (22 N). C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more than 15 Ibf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. F. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder, material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated. G. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on all types of doors. H. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Precision Hardware; a Div. of Stanley Security Solutions. (2000 Series) 2. Sargent Manufacturing; An Assa Abloy Group Company. (19-GL-88 Series) 3. Von Duprin; an Allegion Company. (98 Series) DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00 - 4 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 2.9 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Size: 2 inches (51 mm) less than door width on push side and 1 inch (25 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard self -tapping countersunk screws. C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6, beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from the following material: Material: 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel. 2. Available Manufacturers: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. b. Don -Jo Manufacturing C. Hiawatha, Inc. d. IVES Hardware; an Allegion Company. e. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. f. Trimco. 2.10 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16 Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. B. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled -in application to frame. Available Manufacturers: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. b. Don -Jo Manufacturing C. Hiawatha, Inc. d. IVES Hardware; an Allegion Company. e. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. f. Trimco. 2.11 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00 - 6 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. E. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. F. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. G. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. No not cut, notch or otherwise destroy the integrity of aluminum housing mounted seals. Install before other surface mounted hardware and template accordingly. H. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.2 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Manufacturer List: Code Name NA National Guard PR Precision SH Stanley Commercial Hardware ST Stanley TB To Be Determined TR Trimco Option List: Code Description BF BARRIER FREE LC LESS CYLINDER - SGL. RC ROUNDED CORNERS S4 2 3/4" DEADLATCH - SQUARE SN SEX NUTS 478S 4 7/8" ANSI STRIKE S988 STANDARD. STRIKE - NARROW STILE RIM CSK COUNTER SUNK SCREWS ODW OVER DOOR WIDTH RCE RETURN CLOSED ENDS S/TAP SELF TAPPING SCREWS (8) SNB (2) SEX BOLTS (2) SSMS STAINLESS STEEL SHEET METAL SCREWS SSMS/LA STAINLESS MACHINE SCREWS/LEAD ANCHOR DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 8 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO Hardware Sets: SET #P1 -Pumps 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Anti -Vandal Lock 1098RGL RC x ASA STRIKE 630 TR 1 Cylinder Core AS REQ'D 626 TB 1 Door Closer QDC115 BF S/TAP SN 689 SH 1 Wall Stop & Holder 1254 626 TR 1 Set Seal 700 EV SSMS (HEAD & JAMBS) NA 1 Drip Cap 16 A x 4" ODW NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA 1 Saddle Threshold 425 E x SSMS/LA x U NOTCH AL NA 3 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR SET #R1 - Restroom 3 Hinges FBB199 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Deadlock QML186 LC 619 SH 1 Mortise Cylinder AS REQ'D 619 TB 1 Pull Plate 1017-36 710CU TR 1 Door Closer QDC115 BF S/TAP SN 689 SH 1 Push Plate 1001-9 710CU TR 1 Kick Plate K0050 12" x 2" LDW CSK 630 TR 1 Door Stop 1214 626 TR 1 Set Seal 700 EV SSMS (HEAD & JAMBS) NA 1 Drip Cap 16 A x 4" ODW NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA 1 Saddle Threshold 425 E x 4" ODW RCE x SSMS/LA AL NA 3 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR SET #R2 - Existing Lobby 3 Hinges FBB199 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Exit Device 2108 X V4908D S988 SNB (2) 630AM PR 1 Rim Cylinder AS REQ'D 626 TB 1 Kick Plate K0050 12" x 2" LDW CSK 630 TR 1 Door Stop 1214 626 TR 1 Set Seal 700 EV SSMS (HEAD & JAMBS) NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA 1 Drip Cap 16 A x 4" ODW NA 1 Saddle Threshold 425 E x 4" ODW RCE x SSMS/LA AL NA 3 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR SET #R3 - Janitor 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Storeroom Lockset QCL170 M 478S S4 626 SH 1 Cylinder AS REQ'D 626 TB 1 Kick Plate K0050 12" x 2" LDW CSK 630 TR 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 3 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00 - 10 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 2 years experience in work of this Section. C. Fire Resistance Ratings: 1. Construct assemblies to achieve fire resistance ratings indicated on Drawings, in accordance with applicable UL design number. 2. If requirements of assembly numbers referenced conflict with Contract Document requirements, conform to assembly requirements. D. Acoustic Ratings: Construct assemblies to achieve acoustic ratings indicated on Drawings, tested to ASTM E90 and classified in accordance with ASTM E413. E. Deflection Limits: 1. Limit deflection of partitions to following limits, based on 5 PSF uniform design load. a. Partitions to receive tile: L/240. b. Other partitions: L/120. c. If partition height exceeds stud manufacturer's limiting height for applicable loading and deflection, install bracing above ceiling, decrease stud spacing, or increase stud gage. 2. Limit deflection of ceilings to L/360. PART2 PRODUCTS Wt8i/_ i!to] y_Tilr111iV=.01 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Allsteel and Gypsum Products, Inc. (www.allsteelproducts.com) 2. Consolidated Fabricators Corp. (www.confabbpd.com) 3. Craco Manufacturing., Inc. (www.cracometals.com) 4. Custom Stud, Inc. (www.customstud.com) 5. Design Shapes in Steel. 6. Frametek Steel Products. (www.frameteksteel.com) 7. Olmar Supply Inc. (www.olmarsupply.com) 8. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. (www.qrbm.com) 9. SCAFCO Corporation. (www.scafco.com) 10. Steel Construction Systems. (www.steeIconsystems.com) 11. United Metal Products, Inc. (www.unitedmetalproducts.info) B. Substitutions: [Under provisions of Division 01.] [Not permitted.] 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel: A653/A653M or ASTM Al003/1003M, Class G90 hot dip galvanized. E!�c�K�L�ilI�7►1�►�y A. Provide components in accordance with ASTM C645. B. Studs: Non -load bearing roll -formed steel, SSMA stud profile, C-shaped, punched for utility access. C. Top and Bottom Tracks: 1. Same material and finish as studs, C-shaped. 2. Standard track: SSMA stud track profile, 1-1/2 inch legs. METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 09 22 00 - 2 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO H. Brace furred partitions with adjustable bracket located at mid height. Provide wood or metal bracing in partitions to receive and support fixtures, trim, accessories and other applied items. J. Brace ceiling height partitions to structure at 24 inches on center maximum. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CEILING FRAMING A. Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Space hanger wires 36 inches on center maximum along runner channels and within 6 inches of ends of channels, secure to structure above. C. Space runner channels 48 inches on center maximum and within 6 inches of abutting construction. 1. Position channels for ceiling height; level and saddle tie along channels. 2. Provide 1 inch clearance between channels and abutting construction. 3. Overlap channel ends 12 inches at splices; secure each end with double loop tie wire. D. Space furring channels 16 inches on center maximum, perpendicular to runners and within 6 inches of abutting construction. 1. Provide 1 inch clearance between channels and abutting construction. 2. Secure to runners with clips on alternate sides of runners; saddle tie if clips cannot be alternated. 3. Overlap channel ends [8] inches at splices; secure each end with double loop tie wire. E. Where openings interrupt furring or runner channels, install reinforcing to restore stability. F. Provide double runner or furring channels side by side where [expansion and] control joints occur; do not continue channels over joints. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CEILING FRAMING A. Install in accordance with ASTM C636 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Space hanger wires maximum 32 inches on center. Install additional hangers where required to support light fixtures and ceiling supported equipment. C. Do not suspend hangers directly from metal deck. Attach steel channel horizontally to adjacent framing members; place hanger at regular spacing. D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes, and conduit. E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers: 1. Reinforce nearest related hangers to span extra distance, or: 2. Suspend steel channel horizontally beneath duct or equipment; place hanger at regular spacing. F. Install main tees at maximum 32 inches on center. Fully engage end locks. G. Install cross tees perpendicular to main tees to form 16 x 48 inch modules. Lock cross tees to main tees. METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 09 22 00 -4 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical insulation. 2. Gypsum board. 3. Cementitious panels. 4. Taping and bedding of gypsum board. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A108.11 - Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units. 2. A118.9 - Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C475 - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. 2. C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard. 3. C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Wood Frame and Light Construction Buildings. 4. C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board. 5. C1047 - Standard Specifications for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. 6. C1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. 7. C1629 - Standard Classification for Abuse -Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber -Reinforced Cement Panels. 8. E90 - Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. 9. E413 - Standard Test Method for Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. C. Gypsum Association (GA): 1. GA-214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. 2. GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 3. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual. D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO A. Cementitious Panels: ANSI A 118.9, high density, cementitious with glass fiber reinforcing, 5/8 inch thick x 48 inches wide, maximum practical length, ends and edges square cut, apply to walls. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: ASTM C514, drywall nails, minimum 5/8 inch penetration into framing. B. Acoustical Insulation: 1. ASTM C665, Type I, glass fiber composition, unlaced. 2. Free from urea -formaldehyde resins, phenol, acrylics, and artificial colors. C. Adhesive: 1. Type recommended by gypsum panel manufacturer. D. Trim Accessories: ASTM C1047. 1. Material: Formed steel, minimum 26 gage core steel, hot dip galvanized finish, expanded flanges. E. Joint Treatment Materials: 1. Reinforcing tape and joint compound; ASTM C475. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM PANELS A. Install panels and accessories in accordance with ASTM C754, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. B. Accurately cut panels to fit around openings and projections. Do not tear face paper or break gypsum core. C. Apply panels at non fire -rated assemblies in most economical manner, with ends and edges occurring over supports. D. Apply panels at fire -rated assemblies as required by design assembly. E. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. F. Do not locate joints to align with edges of openings unless a control joint is installed. G. Mechanically fasten single layer panels to framing. Place fasteners minimum 3/8 inch from edges of panels; drive heads slightly below surface. Stagger fasteners at abutting edges. H. Apply face layer of double layer applications with joints offset from those in base layer; secure with mechanical fasteners to framing or with adhesive to base layer. I. At deflection compensating head tracks, cut panels 1/2 inch short of structure at head; do not secure panels to top runner channel. J. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with joint sealer. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus 1. GENERAL COMPANY INFORMATION City of FortCottins ```. L'u..ue _1LL A-105 ✓`7tie ceta ej mat MA Morte f Matthew 301111t011 is eiwmed 4 t& e&l a/ gart ea&am, eaeanada ae a.• CtASSA G¢M6 CONTRACTOR—OMIDRRO 3 m 14, 2W pa q 10, 1015 Mortennsson Name of Firrr ~ Mortenson Construction Contact Person: Maja Rosenquist VP & General Manager P: 303.295.2511 F. 303.29Z8055 1621 18th Street, Suite 400 Denver, CO 80202 Previous Naines, N/A Date Established: 1954 (Corporate Office) 1981 (Denver Office) Company Overview Incorporated in 1954, Mortenson Construction is a privately -held corporation owned by the Mortenson family. Mortenson has distinguished itself in the construction industry by providing services based on our core values of trust, service, safety, responsibility, stewardship, and teamwork. Our team members truly believe in serving our customers'interests and have a strong partnership with each project's owner, designer, engineer, and trade partners. For the past 33 years, Mortenson's Colorado office has been building facilities and open spaces that define the State's beauty."Our purpose is to build structures and facilities for the advancement of modern society. That purpose is fulfilled through our mission, to create an exceptional customer experience." By remaining diversified and building a variety of project types, Mortenson has become one of Colorado's most progressive development and construction firms. The Colorado office was established in 1981, and has grown into the largest commercial general contractor in Colorado. The office is one of seven autonomous regional offices, with its own resources for estimating, accounting, equipment facility, pre -construction services, scheduling, and of course construction operations. Building what's next. Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 90% Construction Documents 2. At maximum 30 feet on center. 3. Above one jamb of openings in partitions. 3.6 JOINT TREATMENT A. Treat joints and fasteners in gypsum board in accordance with GA-214. B. Levels of Finish: 1. Surfaces in janitor closets: Level 1 finish. 2. Surfaces to receive tile: Level 2 finish. 3. Surfaces to receive eggshell paints: Level 4 finish. 4. Surfaces to receive gloss paints: Level 5 finish. END OF SECTION 092900 Old Town Square Renovation Fort Collins, CO GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's installation, cleaning, and maintenance instructions. 2. Samples: a. Tile: Full size samples in each color. b. Grout: 1/2 x 1/2 x 3 inch long samples showing available colors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 10 years documented experience in work of this Section. B. Tile and Trim Units: Meet ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade. C. Static Coefficient of Friction for Floor Tile: Minimum 0.60, tested to ASTM C1028 in dry condition. D. Mockup: 1. Size: 4 x 8 feet. 2. Show: Tile colors and patterns, joint profile, and control joint. 3. Locate where directed. 4. Approved mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver mortar, adhesive, and grout containers bearing hallmark certifying compliance with reference standards. B. Protect adhesive containers from freezing and overheating according to manufacturer's instructions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain minimum ambient temperature and humidity conditions at levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials 1. Furnish extra materials that match and are from the same production runs as products installed. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels. 2. 5 percent of each tile and grout type, color, pattern, composition and size. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE PRODUCT A. Basis of Design Product: "Basalt" by Crossville, Inc. (crossvilleinc.com) 1. Size: 2 x 24 inches x 3/8 inch thick. 2. Edge: [Square.] [Cushioned.] 3. Color: To be selected by architect from manufacturer's full color range. Unpolished "cross -sheen" 4. Surface finish: [Unglazed.] [Bright glazed.] [Matte glazed.] [Mottle glazed.] [Non slip.] 1 1 5. Trim units: [Beads,] [coves,] [and] [bullnoses,] color to match tile. TILING 09 30 00 - 2 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO O. Joint Tape: Waterproof, perforated bedding tape. P. Cleavage Membrane: ASTM D4397, 6 mil thick black polyethylene film; ASTM D226, No. 15 non -perforated asphalt saturated felt; or ASTM D227, No. 15 non -perforated coal tar saturated felt. Q. Reinforcing: ASTM A82/A82M or ASTM Al85/A185M, 2 x 2 inches, 16 gage, welded wire mesh, hot dip galvanized. R. Metal Lath: ASTM C847, expanded diamond mesh, hot dip galvanized. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to remove loose and foreign matter that could impair adhesion. B. Remove ridges and projections. Fill voids and depressions with patching compound compatible with setting materials. C. Allowable Substrate Tolerances: 1. Thin set method: a. Maximum variation in substrate surface: 1/8 inch in 8 feet. b. Maximum height of abrupt irregularities: 1/32 inch. 2. Thick set method: Maximum 1/4 inch in 10 feet variation in substrate surface. D. Test concrete substrate to ASTM D4263, do not install tile until surfaces are sufficiently dry. 3.2 INSTALLATION — TCNA 2014, W244C-14 A. Install crack suppression membrane, waterproof membrane, sound control underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Methods: 1. General: Comply with TCNA 2014, W244C-14. 2. Walls: ANSI [A108.1A, thick set with [reinforced] Portland cement mortar bed.] [A108.1 B, thick set with [reinforced] mortar bed and [latex -Portland cement] [dry -set Portland cement] mortar.] [A108.4, thin set with organic adhesive.] [A108.5, thin set with latex -Portland cement mortar.] [A108.6, thin set with epoxy adhesive.] 3. Floors: ANSI [A108.1 B, thick set with [reinforced] mortar bed and latex -Portland cement mortar [over cleavage membrane].] [Al08.5, thin set with latex -Portland cement mortar.] [A108.6, thin set with epoxy adhesive.] 4. Shower walls [and ceilings]: a. Fill joints between cementitious backer board with mortar. Apply tape centered over joint; skim coat with mortar. b. Install tile in accordance with ANSI [A108.1 B, thick set with [reinforced] mortar bed and [latex -Portland cement] [dry -set Portland cement] mortar] [over cleavage membrane].] [Al08.4, thin set with organic adhesive.] [Al08.5, thin set with latex - Portland cement mortar.] 5. Shower floors: a. Surround floor drain with broken tile or crushed stone. b. Install tile in accordance with ANSI [Al 08.1A, thick set with reinforced Portland cement mortar] [A108.1 B, thick set with reinforced Portland cement mortar and TILING 09 30 00 - 4 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Suspended metal ceiling grid system. 2. Acoustical panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A641 - Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 2. C635 - Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel Ceilings. 3. C636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels. 4. E1264 - Standard Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products. B. Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA) - Ceiling Systems Handbook. C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates of Compliance: Certification from an independent testing laboratory that acoustical panels meet fire hazard classification requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 2 years documented experience in work of this Section. B. Installed System: Conform to UL Floor/Ceiling. C. Fire Hazard Classification: Class A rated, tested to ASTM E1264. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Install in approximately same conditions of temperature and humidity as will prevail after installation. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 2 percent 40 square feet of each acoustical panel. PART PRODUCTS ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus 0951 00 - 1 Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO C. Install molding around perimeters and abutting surfaces. Miter molding at exterior corners; cut flanges and bend web to form interior corners. D. Space hanger wires maximum 48 inches on center. Install additional hangers where required to support light fixtures and ceiling supported equipment. E. Do not suspend hangers directly from metal deck. Attach steel channel horizontally to adjacent framing members, place hanger at regular spacing. F. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes, and conduit. G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers: 1. Reinforce nearest related hangers to span extra distance, or: 2. Suspend steel channel horizontally beneath duct or equipment; place hanger at regular spacing. H. Install main tees at maximum 48 inches on center. Install cross tees to form 24 x 24 inch modules. Lock cross tees to main tees. J. Support ends of tees on flange of perimeter molding. K. Place acoustical panels with edges resting flat on suspension grid. L. Cutting Acoustic Units: 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim and around penetrations. 2. Locate cuts to be concealed. 3. Cut and field paint exposed edges of reveal edge units to match factory edge. M. Place hold down clips over cross tees at mid point of each module. N. Place impact clips over cross tees at mid point of each module. O. Lighting Fixture Protection: Form trapezoidal, five sided box of acoustical panels cut to size over each light fixture, conform to UL requirements. P. Installation Tolerances: Ceilings level to 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured in any direction. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions to match factory finish. END OF SECTION 095100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00 - 3 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates of Compliance: Certification from an independent testing laboratory that flooring meets fire hazard classification requirements. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, procedures for stain removal, repairing surface, and suggested schedule for cleaning. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Minimum 2 years documented experience in work of this Section. 2. Approved by flooring manufacturer. B. Fire Hazard Classification: Self extinguishing, tested to ASTM D635 with maximum 0.25 inch extent of burning. C. Static Coefficient of Friction: Minimum 0.60, tested to ASTM C1028 in dry condition. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F in storage area unless otherwise instructed by manufacturer. B. Store materials in installation area for 3 days prior to installation to achieve temperature stability. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature required by manufacturer 3 days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation of materials. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Furnish applicator's 2 year warranty providing coverage against flooring delamination from substrate and degradation of surface finish. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dura-Flex, Inc. (www.dur-a-flex.com) 2. RBC Industries, Inc. (www.rbcepoxy.com) 3. Stonhard, Inc. (www.stonhard.com) 4. Florock 5. Silikal B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. 2.2 MATERIALS RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 2 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO B. Prepare concrete substrates to receive flooring system by vacuum cleaning method to requirements of ASTM D4258. 3.3 INSTALLATION — TCNA 2014, F121-14 A. Install divider strips at locations indicated. Locate additional joints to align with joints in substrate. B. Set strips straight and level; attach securely to substrate. C. Install cove strip at floor to wall junction. D. Apply flooring in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimum thickness of 3/16 inch. E. Apply first coat of binder resin and allow to dry. F. While binder is still wet, uniformly broadcast aggregate over wet binder. G. After first coat has cured, apply second coat using same techniques as first coat. H. Finish to smooth level surface. I. After second coat has cured, apply top coat. J. Cove flooring at vertical surfaces to a height of 6 inches. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. B. Barricade area to protect flooring until cured. END OF SECTION 096723 RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 4 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO A. Container Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage rates, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. B. Paint Materials: Store at ambient temperature from 45 to 90 degrees F in ventilated area, or as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures or relative humidity are outside ranges required by paint manufacturer. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperatures above manufacturer's minimum requirements for 24 hours before, during. and after paint application. C. Do not apply materials when relative humidity is above 85 percent or when dew point is less than 5 degrees F different than ambient or surface temperature. D. Provide lighting level of 30 footcandles at substrate surface 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1 gallon of each color and sheen. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore and Co. (www.beniaminmoore.com) 2. Devoe Paint Co. (www.devoepaint.com) 3. Glidden. (www.gliddenprofessional.com) 4. Kelly -Moore Paints. (www.kellymoore.com) 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. (www.pittsburghpaints.com) 6. Pratt and Lambert Paints. (www.prattandlambert.com) 7. Sherwin Williams. (www.sherwin-williams.com) B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Paints: 1. As scheduled at end of Section, or approved substitute. 2. Free from all forms of lead and mercury. B. Gloss Ratings: Gloss Designation Units at 60 Degrees Flat 0 to 5 Units at 85 Degrees Maximum 10 PAINTING 0991 00 - 2 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO B. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow to dry. C. Gypsum Board: 1. Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. 2. Apply smooth finish texture in accordance manufacturer's instructions. D. Concrete and Masonry: 1. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt and alkali powder, and other foreign matter. 2. Remove oil and grease with solution of trisodium phosphate; rinse and allow to dry. 3. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. E. Concrete Floors: 1. Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Allow to dry. 2. Verify that required acid -alkali balance has been achieved. F. Galvanized Steel: SSPC Method SP1 - Solvent Cleaning. G. Aluminum: SSPC Method SP1 - Solvent Cleaning. H. Uncoated Ferrous Metals: SSPC Method SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning or Method SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning. I. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: 1. SSPC Method SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning or Method SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 2. Feather edges to make patches inconspicuous. 3. Prime bare steel surfaces. J. Interior Wood: 1. Wipe off dust and grit. 2. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. 3. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried, sand between coats. K. Existing Surfaces: 1. Remove loose, flaking, powdery, and peeling paints. 2. Lightly sand glossy painted surfaces. 3. Fill holes, cracks, depressions and other imperfections with patching compound; sand flush with surface. 4. Remove oil, grease, and wax by scraping, solvent wash and thoroughly rinse. 5. Remove rust by wire brushing to expose base metal. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints in accordance with [manufacturer's instructions] [and] [MPI Painting Manual, [Premium] [Custom] Grade finish requirements]. B. Apply primer or first coat closely following surface preparation to prevent recontamination. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. D. Apply coatings to minimum dry film thickness recommended by manufacturer. PAINTING 0991 00 - 4 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 2. Paint other exposed surfaces not specifically listed with not less than two coats of appropriate type of coating. B. Prime coat consists of touch up on shop primed [and existing] surfaces with intact coatings. SUBSTRATE MANUFACTURER PRIMER TOP COATS Exterior Surfaces: Ferrous and Galvanized Metals Wood, Opaque Finish Wood, Transparent Finish Concrete Unit Masonry Concrete Plaster Pavement Markings Interior Surfaces: [Plaster] [Gypsum Board], Latex Flat Finish [Plaster] [Gypsum Board], Latex Enamel Finish [Plaster] [Gypsum Board], Alkyd Enamel Finish [Plaster] [Gypsum Board], Epoxy Finish Exposed Roof Structure Ferrous and Galvanized Metals [Concrete] [Masonry], Latex Flat Finish [Concrete] [Masonry], Latex Enamel Finish [Concrete] [Masonry], Alkyd Enamel Finish PAINTING 0991 00 - 6 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus 2. SUSTAINABILITY Commitment To Sustainability Mortenson has been an industry pioneer in its commitment to environmental sustainability. From building Colorado's first Platinum LEED Certified building to launching the Centerfor Sustainable Energyto help our clients reduce or eliminate Recycling Management Not only does Mortenson seek out recycled materials, we encourage the reduction of all waste and the recovery of materials that are reusable or recyclable in all phases of demolition, construction, and life of the building and their facility's energy consumption, Mortenson has committed surrounding areas. its self to making a positive contribution to the preservation of our environment. Please see our highlighted sustainability efforts below: Planning & Management Important to any project is the collaboration between team members. Working together, the team must define the environmental goals and expectations for the project. Work as a partner with the Owner and Architect Understand the initial project goals; Verify the goals throughout the project Provide a cost and benefit evaluation to aid in the decision -making process Select and educate subcontractors and suppliers Utilize Mortenson's nationwide network of LEED Accredited Professionals to share knowledge Document project experiences and take photos Material Procurement By using recycled and/or renewable materials, we are cutting down on the strain on the Earth's shrinking base of finite resources. We will work with the design team to carefully select materials that are durable and contain recycled content in order to reduce negative environmental impacts and support the growing market of recycled products. • Use rapidly renewable materials • Use materials with a high recycled content • Locate local and/or regional sources Analyze project waste Select recycling options to divert waste from landfills 1800 Lorimer- Certified LEED Platinum Morten�so�n Building what's next. Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 10 2813 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Washroom accessories. 2. Shower accessories. 3. Framed mirrors. 4. Hand dryers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Section 06 1100 - Framing and Sheathing: Blocking required for toilet accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review. 1. Product Data: a. Schedule accessories by room; show plans and elevations, and identify room name and number, type and quantity of accessories, and mounting heights. b. Include manufacturer's technical data sheets showing sizes, details of function, finishes, and attachment methods. 2. Samples: One of each accessory, if requested. 3. Warranty: Sample warranty form. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certification: Certify country of origin for each type of accessory. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning and maintenance instructions and replacement parts list. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section. B. Obtain all products from single manufacturer whenever possible. C. Conform to applicable accessibility code for operating forces and for locating accessories. 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Furnish manufacturer's warranties providing following coverage: 1. Changing stations: 5 year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. 2. Mirrors: 15 year warranty against silver spoilage. 3. Hand dryers: a. Model EXT: 5 year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship and 1 year eye sensor warranty. TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 - 1 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus Architecture Plus February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO MARK DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. COMMENTS I Sanitary Napkin Disposal U5814 Recessed push door J Soap Dispenser U1304 Recessed horizontal orientation, 56 ounce capacity K Mop and Broom Strip with Shelf UJ13B 24 inches long, three hooks, surface mounted K Hand Dryer EXT Surface mounted, 120-230 VAC, low profile, low -temp O Robe Hook UX110-SF Satin finish END OF SECTION 102813 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 - 3 Copyright 2015 Architecture Plus K2 Audio February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO G. Dimmer Module: A type of Plug -In Module containing one or more dimmers. H. Data Communications: Signals that provide control and feedback communications between devices in the system. I. DMX: A data communications protocol compliant to the USITT DMX-512-A (ANSI E1.11-2004) specification. J. RDM: A data communications protocol compliant to the ANSUESTA Remote Device Management specification. This is a standard in development. It is anticipated that at the time of installation this will be an approved standard. K. ACN: A data communications protocol compliant to the ANSUESTA Advanced Control Network specification. This is a standard in development. It is anticipated that at the time of installation this will be an approved standard. L. POE: Power Over Ethernet - an 802.3AF compliant scheme of powering devices on an Ethernet 1.3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The General and Special Conditions are hereby made a part of this Section. Where requirements of this Section are at odds with requirements stated in any Special or Supplementary Conditions, the more stringent requirements shall apply. B. The Contract Documents are complementary and are intended to include or imply all items required for the proper execution and completion of the work. Any item or work required by the Specification or other portion of the Contract Documents, but not shown on the drawings, or shown on the drawings but not described in the Specification, shall be provided and installed by the Contractor as if shown or mentioned in both. C. The Consultant may furnish additional instruction or clarification necessary for the proper execution of the work. Instructions or clarifications shall be consistent with the Contract Documents, or agreed upon modifications thereof, and inferable therefrom. In giving instruction or clarification, only the Contracting Officer shall have the authority to make minor changes in the work that will not entail an increase in the Contract price or time. D. Copies of drawings and specifications regardless of how furnished are the property of the Owner, and are not to be used on any other work or project. No contract documents may be released for publication or to any other party without the written consent of the Owner and Consultant. E. All references to "the Owner" in this document refer to the City of Fort Collins, CO. F. All references to "the project' in this document refer to the Old Town Square Renovation Project. 1.4 GOVERNING CLAUSE A. For the sake of brevity these specifications omit phrases such as "Theatrical Lighting Systems Integrator' or "Electrical Contractor' shall furnish and install," "unless otherwise noted or specified," etc., nevertheless, the requirements of the specifications are mandatory, and these phrases shall be inferred. The mention of materials and operations implies the Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install such materials and perform such operations to the overall THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 11 61 00 - 2 ©2015 K2 Audio K2 Audio February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO Contractor's on -site secured storage area, or installed on site by others, as appropriate, for incorporation into the system. B. Inspect the OFE, and notify the Owner promptly in writing of damage or defect and the extent of repair and/or adjustment required to bring the OFE to original specification. Service OFE only as directed by the Owner, under the arrangements of a separate contract. C. Incorporate into the system as if provided new, excepting Warranty coverage. 1.7 RESPONSIBILITY AND RELATED WORK A. Coordinate work with the City of Fort Collins, CO personnel involved in this project, Consultant, representatives and employees/subcontractors employed of/by the City of Fort Collins, CO, including the general contractor and the scheduled work of other trades. B. Notify the Consultant of any discrepancies in part numbers, sizes, or quantities before bid. Failing to provide such notification, supply items, sizes, and quantities according to the intent of the design as described in the Specifications and Drawings, without claim for additional payment. C. Supply accessories and minor equipment items needed for a complete and properly functioning system, or where required to meet the specified performance, even if not specifically mentioned herein without claim for additional payment. D. Cooperate with all trades present on the project, so lost time, work stoppages, interference, and work inefficiencies do not occur. Assure labor "harmony" among personnel and subcontractors, and with other trades associated with construction, delivery, installation, and testing of the facility. Coordinate and schedule all on -site activities with the Owner. 1.8 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW A. The theatrical lighting systems will be for the use of the City of Fort Collins, CO and any other approved internal and/or outside organization. The system will be used during various live events. B. The theatrical lighting systems shall consist of infrastructure only to support the control of a basic portable (by others) dimming systems. No actual 120VAC dimmed circuits shall be provided for theatrical lighting. C. The theatrical lighting system shall consist of DMX distribution from two front of house mix locations in the main plaza to the underside of the stage canopy roof —adjacent to the stage lighting rigging locations. D. The general stage architectural lighting systems shall be separate, but shall communicate with the theatrical DMX control infrastructure. E. DMX control wiring for the theatrical lighting system shall be routed via standard EMT conduit to the various stage locations. F. The system shall consist of two (2) wall mounted DIN rail system with four (4) DMX opto- splitters. This shall permit the distribution of eight (8) DMX outputs to all of the stage electric locations and to any other locations for temporary DMX control over the lighting systems. THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 11 61 00 - 4 ©2015 K2 Audio K2 Audio February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO a. Cover Sheet - Provide a cover sheet clearly showing and dimensioning cable preparation details for each cable and connector utilized in the system, and generally used symbology or detail. b. Wiring diagrams - Furnish complete, detailed wiring diagrams for all systems, based on the contract drawings, but with the addition of: C. Cable types, and identification and color codes d. Details of connections, both at equipment and between equipment racks and furniture and wiring in the building e. Application of connector models and types f. Comply with NEC, ANSI, IEC, and ISO recommendations and standards. g. Conduit riser diagrams showing connection of all devices, required conduit sizes along with types and quantities of cables to be used and cable identification tags. h. Detailed set of circuit and control schedules, including a complete list of all deviations from specifications. i. Patch Panels and Custom Plates and Panels - As plates and panels are to be fabricated exactly as shown on the submittal drawings, shop drawings shall consist of actual machine shop drawings. If discrepancies are discovered by the Contractor due to errors or modification of a manufactured product, these must be called to the attention of the Consultant and propose their resolution on the Submittal Drawings. j. Engraving details and requirements for patch panel and rack labels. k. Consoles, enclosures, tables, and supports. Requirements shall be similar to subparagraph c above. Include detailed construction drawings of any cabinetwork and metalwork, including materials, finishes, adhesives, and fasteners. I. Equipment - Show the location of all equipment in racks, consoles, and millwork, with dimensions; wire routing, cabling, and support details; AC power outlet and ground buss locations, location of transformers, relays, accessories, etc. M. Provide samples required in various specification paragraphs, or by the Consultant or Owner throughout the course of the project; prepay shipping. Samples of minor items such as hardware, connectors, etc. will not be returned. n. Schematic drawings of any custom circuitry or equipment modifications, including connector pinouts and component part lists. F. References may be made in specification paragraphs to a requirement for submittal drawings for that particular item. Such references do not define the only items requiring submittal drawings. G. Do not consider the Consultant's review of submittals to be exhaustive or complete in every detail. Approval of shop drawings and submittals indicates only the acceptance of the manufacturer, model, materials, general design or method of construction, and quality. H. Requirements, arrangements, quantities, and installation must comply with the contract documents unless specifically approved to the contrary. Submittal approval does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors in dimensions, details, sizes, fit, etc., or for coordinating items with actual building conditions and dimensions. Submittals which, in the Consultant's opinion, are incomplete, deviate significantly from the requirements of the Contract Documents, or contain numerous errors, will be returned without review for rework and resubmittal. Manufacturer shall provide any additional information, including equipment demonstrations, as required by the engineer or specifier to verify compliance with specifications. K. Contractor shall provide certificate of completion to the factory -trained technician who will be performing the system commissioning as system submittal phase. THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 11 61 00 - 6 ©2015 K2 Audio K2 Audio February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO modifications, provide a thorough description of the purpose, function, specifications, and operation. f. A properly licensed working copy of the latest version of any and all contractor - provided software required to operate or configure the systems specified herein shall be a part of the system supplied. This includes, but is not limited to, all software, firmware and hardware required for configuration, adjustment, diagnosis and repair. Software shall be fully documented, and that documentation included. g. Software shall be included in its "installable" state on industry standard CD-ROM, or other appropriate format. Back-up of the working software may be provided as an additional inclusion. Disk images are unacceptable. h. Other Data. Furnish any other pertinent data generated during the project or required for future service. i. Maintenance Instructions. Include a clear statement of the terms and period of the Contractor's warranty; Contractor's service department phone and facsimile number(s) and hours; maintenance schedule; description of products recommended or provided for maintenance purposes; and instructions for the proper use of maintenance products. j. Equipment List. Provide a comprehensive list of all equipment by subsystem, tabulating the manufacturer, model, serial number, physical location, and wiring diagram drawing number and code. k. Product manufacturers' warranties. I. Manufacturers' service manuals for all major equipment items. For custom circuits or modifications, provide a thorough description of the purpose, function, specifications, and operation. M. Performance Test Reports. Include a copy of the shop testing test report generated meeting the requirements of this Specification. Also include a copy of the system startup test report generated meeting the requirements of this Specification, and test results generated during Commissioning of the system. n. Provide a recommended preventative maintenance schedule with reference to the applicable pages in the manufacturer's maintenance manuals. Where inadequate information is provided by the manufacturer, provide the information necessary for proper maintenance. 2. Correct and update the System Reference Manuals, if necessary, according to the Consultant's instructions after acceptance testing. 3. Provide DVD or CD-ROM (unless otherwise requested by the Owner) copies of the training sessions for later review by the operators and maintenance staff. 1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Theatrical Lighting Systems Equipment Integrator Qualifications: 1. The following Theater Lighting Systems Equipment Integrators have been pre -qualified to provide the equipment specified herein: Barbizon of the Rockies 8269 East 23rd Avenue, Suite 111 Denver, CO 80238 (303) 394-9875 Norcostco of Denver 4395 Broadway Denver, CO 80216-3549 (303) 620-9734 Westview Productions 3217 W Hampden Ave THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 11 61 00 - 8 ©2015 K2 Audio K2 Audio February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins. CO 2. Clearly mark switches, jacks, outlets, cables, connectors, etc. logically and permanently during fabrication and installation. 3. Where many cables are run in close proximity color code by function in a logical manner. 4. Take necessary precautions to prevent and guard against electromagnetic, electrostatic and radio frequency interference. 5. Exercise care in wiring, so as to avoid damage to the cables and to the equipment. Between racks, cabinets, consoles or modules insure cables are well -supported, neatly laced and dressed. Make joints and connections with mechanical connectors approved by the Consultant. 6. When cable is surface mounted and crossing through fire walls, use the equivalent fire rated plenum cable to the specified cable type. 7. Label terminal strips, punch blocks, wire and cables in a permanent and logical manner with a unique number on each end of cable runs. 8. Final location of equipment is as shown on the Drawings, located in the field by the Architect or as shown on supplementary drawings prepared by the Consultant. C. Pre -installation meetings: 1. Meet with the Owner on the site and reach a written understanding regarding project conditions outside the Theater Lighting Systems Integrator's scope of work which will impact the timely completion of this contract. Items that must be coordinated include a schedule of access to City of Fort Collins, CO Old Town Square stage areas and all other areas where access will be required; security of the site; secure storage for equipment and tools on site, cleanliness of the site including both trash and dust, HVAC for the site; power in the stage areas and other required locations; conduit and junction box completion, any wire pulling needed for this contract but not provided by the Theater Lighting Systems Integrator, any and all job site conditions that may impact the timely completion of this contract or its conclusion in excellent condition, and any and all other work that must be provided by others that is required for the timely completion of this contract or its conclusion in excellent condition. Develop an agreed time line for all the above items, showing the last acceptable completion date for each item, and signed by the Owner and the representative of the Theater Lighting Systems Integrator. 2. Meet with any other contractor(s) whose work will impact the performance of this contract, and coordinate as required. D. Standards: 1. All equipment, where standards have been established, must be built to recognized standard. Standards are established by the following organizations: a. Underwriters Laboratories. b. National Electric Code. C. 1997 Uniform Building Code. d. National Fire Protection Agency. e. Occupational Safety and Health Administration f. United States Institute for Theatre Technology. g. Entertainment Services and Technology Association Technical Standards. 2. No deviation is permitted from the requirement for UL Listing. E. Fabrication: 1. Fabrication will begin only after approved shop drawings and a written notice to proceed have been delivered to the manufacturer at the manufacturer's place of business. F. Energization, Turn -on, and Checkout: 1. A qualified representative employed by the manufacturer must visit the job site after installation is complete and prior to owner turnover to inspect, test and adjust the systems. 2. Proper instruction of operation and maintenance procedures must be provided to the owner's representatives. THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 11 61 00 - 10 ©2015 K2 Audio K2 Audio February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO E. Keep insurance in full force until all work is completed and accepted by the Owner. Insurance shall be modified or canceled only on written notice to the Owner, given thirty (30) days in advance, with replacement policies going immediately into effect. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Product substitutions to be made in accordance with Section 00 26 00 — Procurement Substitution Procedures. B. Equipment list may intentionally exclude minor components in the interest of conciseness and clarity. Where these components are integral to a functionally and aesthetically complete system the Contractor must provide them. 2.2 THEATER LIGHTING SYSTEMS MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. The manufacturer shall be one who has been continuously engaged in the manufacturer of lighting control equipment for a minimum of ten years. All dimmer, DMX distribution, and/or cabinet fabrication must take place in a U.S. manufacturing plant. B. All equipment, where applicable standards have been established, shall be built to the standards of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., the National Electric Code and the United States Institute for Theater Technology. Permanently installed power distribution equipment such as dimmer racks and distribution shall be UL and C-UL Listed, and/or CE marked (where applicable) and bear the appropriate labels. Portable equipment such as consoles and fixtures shall be UL and C-UL Listed, ETL Listed and/or CE marked (where applicable) and bear the appropriate labels. C. The manufacturer shall be a member in good standing with ESTA (Entertainment Services and Technology Association). D. The Manufacturer's primary market shall be the entertainment lighting sector. E. The equipment shall be supplied through a theatrical equipment dealer, which shall be a member in good standing with ESTA. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The major equipment herein specified shall be manufactured by: Pathway/Acuity Brands Lighting Canada #103 - 1439 17th Avenue SE Calgary AB T2G 1J9 Canada (403) 243-8110 B. Alternative manufacturers must submit a full pre -approval package ten (10) days prior to bid date. THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 11 61 00 - 12 ©2015 K2 Audio K2 Audio February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins. CO 3.3 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect and maintain barricades, lighting and guardrails as required to protect general public, workers and adjoining property. 3.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Theatrical lighting rough -in devices shall not be installed until the building is totally enclosed, secured, and weather tight. B. Theatrical lighting equipment electronic components shall not be installed until the building is totally enclosed, secured, weather tight, and all dust or moisture generating construction work within the building is complete and cured. C. Theatrical contractor shall coordinate delivery with Division 26 electrical contractor of all rough in items per the electrical contractor's schedule. D. Delivery and Inventory of items under responsibility of theatrical contractor shall be arranged with final system commissioning schedule. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. It is the responsibility of the theatrical contractor to furnish everything required for proper and complete installation and operation of the theatrical control system although every item mat not be specifically mentioned in this specification or on the drawings. B. The theatrical contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Providing all hardware as required and freight to job site for system hardware 2. Low voltage wire for lighting control system and freight to jobsite. 3. Field measurements and coordinating physical size of all equipment with the architectural requirements of the spaces into which they are to be installed. 4. Position all items accurately as indicated on the drawing and true, plumb and level. 5. Note any deviations required to adjust for field obstructions and report to required persons to incorporate changes on as -built drawings. 6. Coordination issues with other trades. 7. Overseeing the installation of the theatrical lighting equipment as specified by the electrical contractor to ensure design and operational intent. 8. Installation and rough focus of all theatrical instruments and accessories per engineer/owners plot or per drawings. 9. Site visits as specified. 10. System commissioning and training as indicated. 11. Compliance with all job site rules and regulations as set forth by general contractor or other sections of this specification. 12. Disposal of all shipping containers and garbage associated with the hardware supplied. C. The project manager for the theatrical contractor shall make three (3) scheduled site visits to the job site during the execution of the project to ensure proper installation and coordination. The site visits shall be scheduled at the following stages and during a time mutually agreeable to the GC, EC, and theatrical distributor: 1. After arrival on the jobsite of rough in materials and prior to initial rough in by the electrical contractor. 2. After initial rough in by electrical contractor and prior to cover up to verify conduit routs, conduit sizes, and physical positioning. THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 11 61 00 - 14 ©2015 K2 Audio K2 Audio February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO C. O&M for all system components 6. Record drawings and system manuals shall be turned over to the owner's agent during the system training prior to the theatrical distributor getting a stamp of substantial completion. 7. It shall be the responsibility of the theatrical contractor to obtain a signed sheet from the owner's agent indicating that the training sessions have been satisfactorily completed as specified. 3.8 Warranty A. Manufacturer shall warrant products under normal use and service to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two years from date of delivery. B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of such parts determined defective upon inspection. C. Warranty does not cover any product or part of a product subject to accident, negligence, alteration, abuse or misuse. Warranty does not cover any accessories or parts not supplied by the manufacturer. D. Warranty shall not cover any labor expended or materials used to repair any equipment without manufacturer's prior written authorization. END OF SECTION 11 61 00 THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 11 61 00 - 16 ©2015 K2 Audio Charles Schwab Rooftop Plaza Lone Tree, CO DESCRIPTION: Nestled between two large office buildings, the Roof -Top Plaza serves as an outdoor space that can be enjoyed daily by the thousands of employees at the Charles Schwab Campus. Lined with pavers, concrete benches, lighting, and even an "infinite wall"of native grass, the 75,000 square foot plaza is a hub for employee gathering and idea sharing. With the entire Charles Schwab project being built to LEED standards, the Roof -Top Plaza is no exception. Sustainability efforts of every sort have been made to construct the plaza congruently to our belief in long-term sustainability. 1114WAy1-1101c14.11 Concrete seating and walls Irrigation Plaza lighting Drainage System State of the art landscape design Paver system Decorative Metal Work MortennNIJA Building what's next. THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT END OF APPENDIX A: THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE 12/08/2014 13138.00 - Campbell County High School - South Campus - 95% CD 11 6100 - 18 studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. C. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct meeting prior to construction. Attendance required by Owner, Architect, Contractor(s), Supplier, other parties who are involved or requested to appear. D. Inspections. E. General. All pieces of stone are subject to the Architect's approval prior to, during and after installation. Replace rejected stone work with satisfactory F. Architect's or Owner's Representative inspection of the dimensional stone paver does not release the Contractor from the responsibility to provide all the work in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. G. Mockups: Before installing stone unit pavers, build mockups for each form and pattern of unit pavers required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work, including same base construction, special features for expansion joints, and contiguous work as indicated: 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting stone unit paver installation. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed. 7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed or damaged at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from weather, moisture, deterioration and contamination during delivery, installation and site storage. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in a dry place. Stone Unit Pavers: 1. Protect stone during storage and construction against moisture, soiling, staining and physical damage. 2. Handling. Handle stone to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling or other damage. Do not use pinch or wrecking bars without protecting edges of stone with wood or other rigid materials. Lift with wide -belt type slings wherever possible; do not use wire rope containing tar or other substances which cause staining. If required, use wood rollers and provide cushion at end of wood pieces. 3. Storage. Store on wood skids or pallets, covered with non -staining waterproof membrane. Wood in contact with stone must be low in resins and of species free of tannin. Place and stack skids and stones to distribute weight evenly and to prevent breakage or cracking of stones. Protect stored stone from weather with waterproof, non -staining covers or enclosures, but allow air to circulate around stones. Replace damaged units with new as directed. C. Accessories. Protect materials from weather, moisture, deterioration and contamination during delivery, installation and site storage. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of material fabricators for environmental conditions before, during, and after installation. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and fabricator's printed recommendations. Stone Paving 32 14 40 - 2 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO a. Type: Granite b. Size: 3"x6"x6" C. Finish: Diamond 100 top w/ sawn edges d. Color: "Mesabi Black" e. Distributor: Cold Spring Granite B. Sandstone Pavers (Tree Grates) 1. Stone Unit Paver: a. Type: Colorado Buff Sandstone b. Size: 3" x12"x24" c. Finish: Honed top w/ sawn edges d. Color: "Buff' e. Distributor: Arkins Park Stone 2. Stone Wall Caps: a. Type: Colorado Buff Sandstone b. Size: Varies re: plans C. Finish: Natural cleft top w/ snapped exposed edges and sawn joint edges d. Color: "Buff' e. Distributor: Arkins Park Stone 2.2 SETTING BED MATERIALS A. Joint Sand: ASTM C33 sand 1. Color: Tan B. Bedding Sand. Sand setting material shall be clean, sharp, washed concrete sand conforming to ASTM C33, with the following gradation: Sieve Size % Passing #4 100 #8 95-100 #16 70-100 #30 40-75 #50 20-40 #100 10-25 #200 0-10 C. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: 1. Aggregate shall conform to "Class 6 Aggregate" and the following gradation in accordance with the State Department of Highways, division of Highways, State of Colorado, Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, subsection 703.03 of the latest edition: SIEVE SIZE PERCENT PASSING 20mm 100 #4 30-65 #8 25-55 #200 3-12 2. The Liquid limit to not be greater than 30, Plasticity Index not to exceed 6. Stone Paving 32 14 40 - 4 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO placement conditions and patterns indicated. Stone shall meet fixed structures as indicated on the Drawings, J. Keep units clean and rake out joints between stones for joint material. K. Final elevation of stone pavers shall be flush with surrounding surfaces and conforming to elevations indicated. L. Adjust to obtain uniform joints of/<" for guillotine cut, unless otherwise noted on plans and drawings. M. Joints. Tree wells to have 1/8" joint between pavers to allow water to pass through. Joint to be set but 1/8" spacer. N. Soak paver joints lightly and reapply joint material as needed to insure full penetration of material into and completely filling the joints. O. Sweep and remove excess joint filling material from site. 3.4 AGGREGATE SETTING -BED PAVER APPLICATIONS A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 to underside of sand leveling bed. B. Place aggregate subbase over compacted subgrade. Provide compacted thickness indicated on drawings. Compact subbase to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density and screed to depth required allowing setting of pavers. C. Place geotextile over compacted subbase course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches. D. Place sand leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (max.), taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. E. Lay pavers so that the surface levels are within the tolerances specified. Follow an order of laying, which maintains an open working face and does not trap a paver. Align the first row of pavers against the edge restraint or by using a string line or straight edge. Check the alignment of pavers periodically by using straight lines and make adjustments where necessary. Lay whole pavers first, followed by closers. Complete the area to be laid, as far as possible using whole blocks. Where appropriate, incorporate cut pavers to assist with the formation of boundaries and with changes in direction. Complete infilling before compaction commences. Cut pavers to shape and size to form edge. Do not insert pieces of a size less than 1/3 (one-third) of a full block. F. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch and a maximum of 1/8 inch, being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. G. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low -amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions: 1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed to rain. 2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36 inches of the laying face. Cover open layers with nonstaining plastic sheets overlapped a minimum of 48 inches on each side of the laying face to protect it from rain. H. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling. I. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints. J. Repeat joint -filling process 30 days later. 3.5 REPAIR, POINTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Clean stone unit pavers to be free from stain, dirt or dust. If necessary scrub face with mild soap and clean water applied with stiff fiber brushes. Rinse well with clean water. Stone Paving 32 14 40 - 6 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 13 05 01 - FOUNTAIN GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 of Specification of Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. 13 05 02 — Fountain Bonding & Grounding B. 13 05 03 — Fountain Equipment Commissioning C. 13 05 05 — Fountain Concrete Work D. 13 05 10 — Fountain Recirculation Equipment E. 13 05 15 — Fountain Water Treatment F. 13 05 20 — Fountain Valves & Piping G. 13 05 25 — Fountain Recirculation Fittings & Components H. 13 05 35 — Fountain Finishes 13 05 40 — Fountain Waterproofing J. 13 05 45 — Fountain Maintenance fi[c�:ll�b7l►Le� A. All bidding shall be done per project documents. No substitutions shall be made unless submitted in writing and approved by Fountain Designer. B. Division 13 0500 bidding responsibilities: 1. Notify Architect of any discrepancies or conflicts within the drawings prior to bid. Contractor shall be responsible for any cost issues associated with conflicts or discrepancies not brought to the attention of the Architect at least seven (7) calendar days prior to bid, or such time period as is listed in the Division 01 bid Instructions, whichever is greater. 2. Include materials and equipment items as specified in the contract documents. Substitutes will only be accepted if approved prior to bid by addendum. The contractor shall not be financially, schedule, or in any other way relieved for this responsibility irregardless of any implied equal item. Assurance of acceptance shall be only in written form, either prior to bid by addendum, or during the submittal process. The Contractor assumes all risk for anticipating acceptance without written approval. The contractor is responsible to provide substitution requests in writing. FOUNTAIN GENERAL CONDITIONS 13 05 01 - 1 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1.6 RELATED SPECIFICATION SECTIONS: A. Earthwork and Excavation: RE: Division 31. B. Concrete Work: RE: Division 03. C. Plumbing and Mechanical: RE: Division 22 and Division 23. 1. Furnish and install RPZ backflow preventer and isolation valves for domestic fresh water supply. Connect to Auto -fill valve (one per fountain). 2. All natural gas piping as indicated on drawings and installation instructions, for fountain heaters or room heaters. 3. Furnish and install hose bibs in mechanical room(s) and in deck areas as shown in drawings or as required by code 4. Furnish and install the filter waste lines and line beyond air -gap to waste. 5. Furnish and install fresh water and waste water plumbing to/from mechanical room, surge tank(s), vault(s), and etc. 6. Furnish controls, sensors, and connections from fountain stub outs. Wells in piping will be by Fountain Contractor. Sensors on fountain piping will be by Mechanical Contractor if fountain is heated. 7. Mechanical Contractor shall provide and install all combustion air, ventilation and flues as required for air handling related to all fountain equipment room(s), pit(s), vault(s), etc. All materials and parts of mechanical systems to be resistant to associated chemicals/vapors. a. Vault or room storage rooms ventilation systems must: 1) Be independent and not mixed, i.e. one system for acid and another for chlorine and not tied into any other systems. 2) Be entirely corrosion resistant. 3) Provide air circulation to adequately remove chemical vapors. 8. Furnish and install deck drains and discharge as per plumbing plans and/or as required by code. Coordinate with General Contractor and Fountain Contractor. 9. Assist Fountain Contractor with fountain at heater start-up including but not limited to gas pressure verification, air flows, and controls if provided. D. Electrical: RE: Division 26. 1. All electrical connections shall be by the Electrical Contractor. The Fountain Contractor shall provide the filter pumps, motors, solenoids, and pre -wired control assemblies as called for on plan and as required by fountain systems equipment manufacturer. The Electrical Contractor shall install and wire all electrical equipment furnished by the Fountain Contractor. Electrical contractor shall provide and install all disconnect switches, emergency -off switches, panels, relays, grounding, conduit, and starters, as indicated, and/or required by Codes. 2. Provide and install all power and control wiring as indicated by schematic details of Fountain system electrical drawings and Electrical Coordination Table. 3. All Electrical Disconnects, Switches, VFD's, Magnetic Starters, Stop -Start Stations, Receptacles and relays shall be furnished by Division 26 work and coordinated with the Fountain Contractors work. 4. Furnish and install all GFCI outlets and service needed for all fountain systems and appurtenances, as well as adequate lighting in the equipment room and related spaces in accordance with the specifications and as shown on the drawings. 5. Bond and ground all fountain equipment, anchors, lights, reinforcing, etc. as required by Article 680 of the National Electrical Code, as described in Division 26. 6. Bond and ground outdoor fountain deck(s) with 12"x12" or less bonding grid extending E. minimum 3 feet horizontally from fountain wall and as required by Article 680 of NEC. 7. Assist Fountain Contractor at time of start-up. FOUNTAIN GENERAL CONDITIONS 13 05 01 - 3 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 90% Construction Documents Old Town Square Renovation Fort Collins, CO 14. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required. 15. Furnish and install filtration system for each fountain, including re -circulation pumps, water treatment equipment, surge/holding tanks, flow meters, and required gauges and valves. Install all piping, valves and gauges as shown on drawings and as may be necessary to provide a complete and working system. 16. Furnish and install fountain heaters for recirculation system as if shown on documents. Provide and install sensing wells on fountain piping to provide necessary control for fountain heater or heat exchangers. Review all documents and coordinate with mechanical plans to ensure provision of ancillary equipment required for combustion air and venting. 17. Duct work/ventilation system(s), gas piping, and refrigerant piping, to be furnished and installed by Mechanical Contractor. 18. Furnish, layout and install all anchors, sockets, inserts, stanchions, deck anchors, stainless steel rope anchors in the fountain, lane ropes, backstroke markers, and rail goods included in this Section and in documents. Install and adjust all equipment to ensure safe and proper function. 19. Furnish and install fountain finish(es) including coping, interior fountain finishes shown on drawings and listed in schedules including all ceramic stone trims and edging as required. Protect all surfaces from concrete splash or damage until accepted by Owner. 20. Joint and sealant between fountain shell and deck to be provided and installed by General Contractor or by Deck Contractor. 21. Furnish and install all sanitization feeders, and any supplemental treatment systems as shown on the drawings and/or listed in the schedules, including all necessary piping to the re -circulation systems. 22. Furnish and install all fountain equipment control systems and instrumentation required for an operational system, including sensors, remote switches, relays, control and coaxial wiring and appurtenances provided by manufacturer. 23. Perform any required low voltage electrical work as maybe required in this section in accordance with requirements of Division 26. Coordinate electrical connections as required relating to the filter, automated valves, pump controls, automatic water level control systems, chemical controllers, features control, remote control of equipment, lighting, and system control interlocking with Electrical Contractor. 24. Furnish and install automatic fill systems and fill piping for the fountain(s), from water service entrance provided by Division 22 contractor. Provide and install water level sensing line and inlet fitting. 25. All fresh water and waste water piping to be installed by Division 22 contractor. 26. Start, test, calibrate and adjust all equipment, chemical feed equipment, vacuum cleaning equipment and provide written verification that all systems are installed in compliance with manufacturer recommendation. Instruct Owner's representative in the operation and maintenance of the system. Furnish Owner with complete O & M Manuals and video recording of instruction. 27. Furnish and install all chlorine/bromine-resistant sealant joints inside all fountains or within areas of fountains or deck that are the Fountain Contractor's responsibility, including backer rods, primers and accessories required. 28. After filling the fountains, should any repairs, continuing work, etc. require drainage or partial drainage of the fountain(s) systems, for any reason related to his work, the Contractor shall be responsible for any subsequent refilling without cost to the Owner, and shall complete the project with the fountain system full of water, complete in every way, and in full operation. 29. The Contractor shall make available on call the services of a competent and experienced field engineer to inspect the completed installation, adjust the automatic controls for the proper set point, place the system in operation and give operation instructions to its care and use. FOUNTAIN GENERAL CONDITIONS Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative 130501 -5 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO f. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF): Standard 50. g. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Specifications referenced herein. h. Department of Public Health. i. City and County Building Codes. j. Gunite Contractors Association (CGA): Technical Publication. k. American Concrete Institute (ACI). I. OSHA A. Submit product data for review prior to ordering in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01. Product Data: Submittals shall adequately and completely describe the equipment. Provide data in one three ring binder, tabbed and indexed for reference. Piece mail submittals are not acceptable unless it is a re-submittlal. To include, but not limited to; a. Concrete mix designs with previous test results from equivalent / similar mix design. b. Shell equipment including, jets, main drain with grate sizes, inlets, gutter grating, gutter sealants, gutter finishes, water stops and inserts C. Fountain filters, valves, gauges, support stands, and control systems d. Chemical feed systems and controls. e. Pumps and any related controls f. Cleaning and maintenance. Obtain a chemical analysis of the source/fountain make-up water supply and submit to Architect and Fountain Designer. Including the following: a. Total alkalinity/PPM. b. Calcium hardness/PPM. c. Chlorine/PPM. d. pH. e. Iron. f. Copper. g. Other Metal. h. Phosphates. B. Shop Drawings: The contract documents provide direction and specific instruction regarding the assembly of the 13 11 01 contract. Reference to the contract documents is permitted. However, at least the following information shall be portrayed and submitted for review. The contractor shall provide all specific information required herein, no exceptions. a. Fountain structure shop drawings indicating: 1) excavation, sub -base, under -drain and/or inspection port 2) floor slopes 3) bond beam and/or gutter forming and related reinforcing 4) rebar size, grade, patterns 5) any joints or waterstops 6) set -backs for finishes 7) location of fountain fittings/imbeds 8) Field -built suction outlets (drains, sumps, and related pipe sizes) Pipe routing shop drawings, fountain to mechanical room indicating 1) Elevations FOUNTAIN GENERAL CONDITIONS 13 05 01 - 7 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins. CO 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS & EXAMINATIONS OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS & SPECIFICA- TIONS: A. Inspection: Examine areas for conditions under which work is to be performed. B. Report in writing to Owners representative all conditions contrary to those shown on drawings or specified herein and all other conditions that will affect satisfactory execution of work, such as improperly constructed substrates or adjoining work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Field Measurements: The drawings accompanying this specification are essentially diagrammatic in nature and show the general arrangement of all equipment, piping, ductwork, services, etc. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to show all offsets, fittings and accessories, which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions of all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing all fittings, pipe and accessories that may be required to meet such conditions. Where conditions necessitate a rearrangement, the Contractor shall obtain the Architect's and Fountain Designer's written approval. D. Starting Work: Constitutes acceptance of the conditions under which work is to be performed. After such acceptance this contractor shall at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work resulting from such unsatisfactory conditions. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: A. Deliver all materials and equipment to the job site in original packages fully identified, with manufacturer's label. Store off ground and protect from weather with a suitable covering. Deliver cementitious material to site in manufacturer's standard packages. Immediately upon delivery to work site, store in waterproof sheds, and the Contractor shall provide sheds required. No cementitious or other material that has become caked or hardened will be permitted in the work. Protect plastic pipe from exposure to chemicals (aromatic hydrocarbons, halogenated hydrocarbons and other esters and ketones) that might attack the material. Protect all pipes from mechanical damage and long exposure to sunlight during storage. 1.12 WARRANTY: A. Provide one (1) year warranty covering all fountain workmanship, materials, and equipment. Refer to Division 01 of the Specifications for additional requirements. B. Special Project Warranty on Concrete Structure: The Fountain Contractor shall guarantee for five (5) years repair of the shotcrete shell structure(s) covering any defects, cracks, and/or leaking in the shell(s) caused by defective workmanship or material. All standard manufacturer's warranties shall apply to all equipment and products provided by the Contractor. Ceramic tile and interior fountain finish shall be warranted for defects in material and installation for a period of 2 years from acceptance by Owner. FOUNTAIN GENERAL CONDITIONS 13 05 01 - 9 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 13 05 02 - FOUNTAIN BONDING & GROUNDING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 of Specification of Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. 13 05 01 — Fountain General Conditions B. 13 05 03 — Fountain Equipment Commissioning C. 13 05 05 — Fountain Concrete Work D. 13 05 10 —Fountain Recirculation Equipment E. 13 05 15 — Fountain Water Treatment F. 13 05 25 — Fountain Recirculation Fittings & Components G. 13 05 45 — Fountain Safety & Maintenance H. Electrical: RE: Division 26 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK: A. Fountain Contractor must coordinate the bonding and grounding of all fountain components composed of metals. All connections must be made by the electrical contractor with the help of the Fountain Contractor. Work is including but not limited to: 1. Fountain structure(s), including, but not limited to, concrete, reinforcement steel, rail inserts, hardware, metal pipe, heaters, exchangers, equipment, and other bondable metals in the fountain structure and fountain system. 2. Provide water bonds or sacrificial anodes as required by manufacturer and for metal play features or other components that are metal in the fountain and fountain system. 3. Provide conductivity testing for bonding of the fountain. An independent company shall provide a review and report of the bonding and grounding connections showing the fountain is completely bonded. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work Includes (but is not necessarily limited to): Fountain contractor is responsible for coordinating the bonding or grounding of the fountain system and equipment. They must instruct the Electrical Contractor which items need to be bonded or grounded. The Electrical Contractor will be responsible for connecting those items as required and follow NEC 680. Verify that all bonding and grounding work has been properly completed and tested. FOUNTAIN BONDING & GROUNDING 13 05 02 - 1 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative 3. PROFILE PROJECTS Stapleton Conservatory Green Denver, CO DESCRIPTION: Conservatory Green is a unique gathering spot for the neighboring residents and commercial traffic. The plaza boasts a large shade shelter, a timed fire pit, a splash pool with water curtain, and a large turf area for events. With five different finishes and stains, decorative concrete is a dominating feature of Conservatory Green. An architectural sedimentary wall consist of five different stains mimics the soil layers, making the plaza look like it was cut straight into the existing terrain. The decorative planter boxes and amphitheater seating find a sharp contrast between the soft rolling hills of the prairie of which the plaza was inspired and the rough sharpness of concrete. The project started early summer 2013 with a budget of roughly $2.3M and finished end of summer 2014 at $2.8M largely due to design changes. KEY FEATURES: Wood Foot Bridge Outdoor Amphitheater Concrete Paving Broom Finish Sand Finish Concrete Unit Pavers Wood Mulch Crusher Fines Concrete Seat Walls Concrete Retaining Wall with Visual Appearance of Soil Sediment Tivoli Light Poles Planter Cubes Granite Boulders Water Features MortennwM Building what's next. Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins. CO PART 2-PRODUCTS: 2.1 WATER BONDS AND SACRIFICIAL ANODES: A. Water bonds may be used inline of the water feature or equipment and installed per the instructions of the manufacturer. The anodes must provide a method of viewing the sacrificial metal in the anode tee to determine whether the metal has to be replaced. The copper wire coming from the tee must be connected to the bonding loop of the fountain. 2.2 BONDING LUGS: A. Shall conform to NEC 680 and must be connected per the instructions of the NEC or the manufacturer of the lug. 2.3 BONDING WIRE: A. Shall conform to NEC 680 and must be a minimum of a new #8 copper wire or as noted in the NEC. I201:4&M WO: 1111 Ml9Eel 0 3.1 PROTECTION: A. Fountain Contractor shall be responsible for protecting all wire, structures, etc. from being cut. B. Any damaged wire caused by application of concrete shall be repaired at the Fountain Contractor's or responsible party's expense. C. Remove and discard of all forms and protection material once all bonding is complete. 91P tX.02II►Le1_IN�9.[6lits] :1 o1 A:Ze111►11I*K4]1!Eel :1*iaTii el:7R A. Bonding must be complete prior to concrete being placed and it must be conductivity tested to ensure bonding. B. Refer to Section 1.07 for times for when to test. 3.3 WARRANTY: A. The Fountain Contractor shall guarantee that all bonding is complete and if not and the result affects the shell, equipment, or any other item of the fountain, it will be replaced at the expense of the Fountain Contractor or the responsible party that did not complete this work outlined in the specification. 3.4 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION: FOUNTAIN BONDING & GROUNDING 13 05 02 - 3 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 90% Construction Documents SECTION 13 05 03 - FOUNTAIN EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Old Town Square Renovation Fort Collins, CO A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 of Specification of Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED SPECIFICATION SECTIONS: A. General Terms and Conditions: RE: Division 01 B. 13 05 01 — Fountain General Conditions C. 13 05 10 — Fountain Recirculation Equipment D. 13 05 15 — Fountain Water Treatment E. 13 05 20 — Fountain Valves & Piping F. 13 05 25 — Recirculation Fittings & Components G. 13 05 35 — Fountain Finishes H. 13 05 45 — Fountain Safety & Maintenance I. Electrical; RE: Division 26 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK: A. Furnish, install, and commission all fountain recirculation equipment, accessories and systems including but not limited to and if provided: 1. Chemical Controllers 2. Sanitizer/Treatment Systems 3. Supplemental Treatment Systems 4. pH Supply Systems 5. Valves, Gauges, Sensors, etc. for special connections and systems 6. Heaters 7. Pumps and Pump VFD's 8. All components necessary to deliver a fully operational system and as required per code. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Work Includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Fountain Contractor must coordinate the installation and commissioning of the components for the fountain system as noted but not limited to. Setup, connections of power, and interlocking of items must be coordinated by the Fountain Contractor. Work FOUNTAIN EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING 13 05 03 - 1 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO A. Fountain Contractor shall be responsible for protecting all equipment until the factory representative is scheduled to complete their review. Any damaged caused by installation of equipment or damage by another party shall be repaired at the Fountain Contractor's or responsible party's expense. Remove and discard of all forms and protection material once all reviews have been completed and equipment is commissioned. W� VjkllrG1:i:7_1►IVA A. The Fountain Contractor shall warranty the equipment as required by the warranty section of this specification for the fountain equipment. RE: Section 13 0501. 2.3 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION: A. After work of this section has been completed, clean up work area and remove all equipment, excess materials, and debris. Protect fountain bonding from damage until time of final completion. END OF SECTION 13 05 03 FOUNTAIN EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING 13 05 03 - 3 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 5. Ground/Bond all steel as per contract documents and per code. 6. Acquire all necessary approvals from building/health departments and Engineers prior to applying concrete. 7. Furnish and install all concrete as indicated on contract documents. a. Fountain(s) shall be constructed utilizing the most efficient methods as to minimize the amount of construction and cold joints. A monolithic structure is preferred. 1) Execute proper installation of all waterproofing methods herein. 8. After filling the fountains, should any repairs, continuing work, etc. require drainage or partial drainage of the fountain(s) systems, for any reason related to his work, the Contractor shall be responsible for any subsequent refilling without cost to the Owner, and shall complete the project with the fountain system full of water, complete in every way, and in full operation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Refer to section 1.08 of 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions. 1.6 SUBMITTALS & SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Refer to section 1.09 of 13 05 01. Fountain General Conditions. 1.7 TESTING/FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. General: The Fountain Contractor shall be responsible to ensure the following tests are taken: 1. Concrete: Tests to measure slump entrained air content and compressive strength shall be conducted by independent testing laboratory. Refer to Division 03. a. Compressive Strength Tests: Provide minimum of 3 test cylinders per 50 cubic yards, not from same sample or fraction thereof for each class of concrete poured each day. Comply with ACI-318, Sub -section 4.3 (samples secured - ASTM C172, cylinders prepared and cured - ASTM C31, and tested - ASTM C39). Identify samples, moist cure at 70' F for five days and ship samples to laboratory. b. Slump and Air Content Tests: Perform on concrete from same batch as sampled for strength tests and whenever there is consistency of concrete. Slump tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C143. Air content tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C231. If measured slump or air content falls outside specified limits, check shall be made immediately on another portion of same sample. In event second failure, concrete shall not be used in work. c. Average of any three consecutive strength tests for each class of concrete, shall be equal to or greater than specified strength, and no individual test shall fall more than 500 psi below specified strength. d. When test results are below specified requirements or when tests of field -cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and curing, Architect and Fountain Designer may require additional tests in accordance with ACI-318, Subsection 4.3. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Refer to section 1.11 of 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions PART 2-PRODUCTS: FOUNTAIN CONCRETE WORK 13 05 04 - 2 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO C. Maximum allowable 28 day compressive field strength shall be 4000 psi when cured. 2.4 NON SHRINK GROUT: A. Shall be: 1. Upcon High Flow, as manufactured by Upco Company, Cleveland Ohio 2. Sika 3. Quikrete 2.5 CONCRETE ADMIXTURES (if specified): A. Refer to "Waterproofing" section, 13 0540 for integral waterproofing system specifications. B. Color; Refer to section 3.03 C. Fibermesh: Propex Concrete Systems; Refer to section 3.04 D. Air Entrainment — 6% 2.6 WATERSTOPS: A. Refer to "Waterproofing" section, 13 0540 for specifications of water stops, coatings, pipe penetrations, etc. 2.7 REINFORCING STEEL: A. Steel Reinforcing: Use deformed bars of sizes shown on the drawings conforming ASTM A 615 Grade 60. B. Steel Reinforcing Placement: 1. Placing reinforcing steel in conformance with the information on the Contract Drawings and CRSI Recommended Minimum length of splices shall be as shown in table on Contract Drawings. Tie splices with 18-gauge annealed wire as specified in the referenced CRSI standard. 2. Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual Standard Practice for Detailed Reinforced Concrete Structures." Show bar schedules, stirrup whirlfountain, diagrams of bent bars, arrangements and assemblies, as required for the fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement. 2.8 CONSTRUCTION AND EXPANSION JOINTS: A. Locate as shown on the drawings or as approved in writing by the Architect and Fountain Designer. All joints require two-part polysulfide caulk. B. Pre -molded expansion joint filler shall be of sufficient width to completely fill the joint. Filler shall be accurately cut to butt tightly against the water stop and the side forms. Joint filler must comply with ASTM D 1752. FOUNTAIN CONCRETE WORK 13 05 04 - 4 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO be added at job site only if requested by fountain contractor. When additional water is added, drum shall be rotated a minimum of 30 additional revolutions. 2. A delivery ticket shall be furnished to Architect and Fountain Designer with the following information: a. Name of concrete firm. b. Serial number of ticket. c. Date. d. Truck number. e. Specific class of concrete. f. Amount of concrete. g. Time loaded. h. Water added. i. Time unloaded. j. Location of pour. Concrete Placement: 1. Place concrete against original undisturbed soil, thoroughly compacted earth, or existinc concrete that will not yield during placing operation. 2. Remove all loose, fine aggregate or rebound from surfaces receiving concrete before placing succeeding layers. Whenever possible, first layer shall entirely cover reinforcing steel to secure it in proper position. 3. Where new concrete is applied against concrete, thoroughly clean the existing surface and drench with water at least twice on the day before placing new concrete. Surfaces upon which concrete will be applied shall be sufficiently damp to prevent excessive absorption of water content in new concrete mix, but not so wet as to overcome suction. 4. Concrete deposited on vertical surfaces shall be shot at right angle to surface starting at the bottom and continuing upward. Build up in layers of a thickness that will not slump, allowing sufficient time between placing of layers for initial set to take place. G. Finishing: When thickness and planes outlined by forms and gauging wires have been reached, rod surfaces to true lines. After rodding, remove gauging wires. Finish, all exposed surfaces to straight and true lines, gun finish as left by nozzle, or cut finish as left by Fresno. 3.3 COLOR ADDITIVES: A. Colored Concrete Additive: Made with pure, concentrated mineral pigments especially processed for mixing into concrete and complying with ASTM C 979. B. Base dosage rates on weight of portland cement, fly ash, silica fume, lime and other cementitious materials but not aggregate or sand. C. Mix -Ready disintegrating bags simplify use of color additives. Toss unopened Mix -Ready bags directly into concrete mixer. Bags travel deep into mix and disintegrate under mixing action, so there is less colored dust released into air and no empty sacks to litter job site. Premeasured bags make it easy to add the right amount of color additives without weighing. Additional packaging systems are also available for convenience of ready mix plant operators. D. Packaging: If color additives are to be added to mix at site, furnish color additives in premeasured Mix -Ready disintegrating bags to minimize job site waste Admixtures: Do not use calcium chloride admixtures. FOUNTAIN CONCRETE WORK 13 05 04 - 6 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 3.6 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION: A. After work of this section has been completed, clean up work area and remove all equipment, excess materials, and debris. Protect fountain from damage until time of final completion. Remove and replace finishes, which are chipped, cracked, abraded, improperly adhered, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 13 05 04 FOUNTAIN CONCRETE WORK 13 05 04 - 8 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 3. Furnish and install fountain heaters and/or chillers as shown on documents. Provide and install sensing wells on fountain piping to provide necessary control for fountain heater or heat exchangers. 4. Duct work/ventilation system(s), gas piping, and refrigerant piping, to be furnished and installed by Mechanical Contractor. 5. Furnish and install all fountain equipment control systems and instrumentation required for an operational system, including sensors, remote switches, relays, control and coaxial wiring and appurtenances. 6. Perform all required electrical work in accordance with requirements of Division 26. Coordinate electrical connections as required relating to the filter, automated valves, pump controls, automatic water level control systems, chemical controllers, features control, remote control of equipment, and system control interlocking with Electrical Contractor. 7. Furnish and install automatic fill systems and fill piping for the fountain(s), from water service entrance provided by Division 22 contractor. Provide and install water level sensing line and inlet fitting. 8. All fresh water and waste water piping to be installed by Division 22 contractor. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Refer to section 1.08 of 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions 1.6 SUBMITTALS & SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Refer to section 1.09 of 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions PART 2 - PRODUCTS: 2.1 PUMP(S): A. General: Pump motors shall be high efficiency for motors .5HP and greater. Insulation NEMA Class F or better for 3 phase motors. B. Circulation Pumps: Furnish and install as scheduled on the Contract Drawings or Equal as approved by the Fountain Designer. Furnish pump installation shop drawings, including hk pads and pipe connections for all pumps to Fountain Designer for approval. Circulation pumps shall be self -priming, NSF listed, non -corrosive construction and shall include strainer. C. Fountain Pumps: Furnish and install as scheduled on the Contract Drawings or Equal as approved by the Fountain Designer. Furnish Submittal data to Fountain Designer for approval. Pumps shall be self -priming, NSF listed, non -corrosive construction and shall include strainer. D. Pressure and Compound Gauges: Furnish and install where called for on the Contract Drawings and as required by Code. Pressure gauges shall be Ashcroft 1009 liquid filled, 0-60 PSI. Compound gauges shall be Ashcroft 1009 liquid filled 15-0-60. Furnish with pulsation damper or snubber. E. Acceptable Manufactures: 1. Pentair 2. ITT 3. Aurora 4. Paco 5. Grundfos FOUNTAIN RECIRCULATION EQUIPMENT 13 05 10 - 2 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 2.6 FILTRATION SYSTEM —SAND: A. General: 1. The filter system to be furnished under this Section shall the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the fabrication of filters for at least ten years. The filters shall bear the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) seal of approval, Standard #50 for sand type filters. 2. As assurance that each item of apparatus is properly sized to perform in conjunction with each other, main items of equipment are described in general in these specifications. 3. Additional information can be found on the engineering drawings accompanying these specifications. B. Guarantee: The Equipment Supplier shall guarantee that the equipment to be furnished provides the surface area and flow capacities called for on the plans, and that the various parts are designed to operate correctly and in conjunction with each other, and that if the installation is made in accordance with his drawings and operated in accordance with his instructions, the system will perform the prescribed functions correctly, the water entering the fountain will be clear, bright, free from suspended matter visible to the unaided eye, will not produce any toxic effect or impart undesirable taste, odors or colors, and will be sanitary to the satisfaction of all authorities having jurisdiction. C. Supervision: An authorized representative of the Equipment Supplier shall provide the supervisory services of an Installation Engineer to fully instruct designated personnel in the operation, care and maintenance of the filter system. D. Filter System: 1. The filter system specified under this section shall be of a pressurized design and shall consist of Non -Corrosive Hi -Rate Permanent Media Filter. 2. The filter system shall require filter media and shall have a maximum flow of 15 U.S. gallons/minute (10.2 liters/second) per square foot (square meter) of filter area. 3. The filter system shall consist of filter tank(s), internal overhead distribution system, internal lower collection system, gauge panel with 2-60 PSIG (400 kPa ) gauges, internal automatic air relief, external air relief with a manually adjusted shut off valve, integrally molded media / manhole access, integrally molded drain/dump port, FRP support, all of which shall be fabricated in a fully assembled state by the original equipment manufacturer, then disassembled for shipping to prevent damage to internal parts or face piping. 4. Filter backwash system shall be semi -automatic for individual tank backwash including dial valves or linkage. Filter Tank: 1. Filter tanks shall pass a hydrostatic pressure test of 75 PSIG (777kPa), and shall comply with all governing Pressure Vessel Code requirements, in addition to NSF standards. 2. An integrally molded combination media dump port and drain complete with an ABS media retainer shall be located in the filter tank(s) body. 3. Influent and effluent connections shall be integrally molded. 4. Filter tanks shall be tested in compliance to ANSI/NSF Sanitation Standard 50-1992 by a government certified and recognized testing agency. 5. Tanks shall be sized and stacked as shown on drawings. Internal Distribution/Collection System: Internal filter tank equipment shall include an upper distribution system and lower collection system, hydraulically balanced to prevent turbulence and/or displacement of the filter media during service operation or backwash. Standard pipe arrangements or an internal valving system will not be acceptable. FOUNTAIN RECIRCULATION EQUIPMENT 130510-4 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 3.1 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS: A. Provide for major equipment, reinforced concrete housekeeping bases poured directly on structural floor slabs (as required by equipment manufacturer) 4 inches thick minimum, unless noted otherwise on plans, extended 4 inches minimum beyond machinery bedplates. Provide templates, anchor bolts, rubber vibration isolators and accessories required for mounting and anchoring equipment. Anchorage system shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer for length and installation of anchor bolts. 3.2 OPERATIONAL START-UP: A. Work included: At the completion of the fountain installation and filling of the fountain features, the Fountain Contractor shall perform testing, adjusting and balancing of all fountains related systems provided under Division 13 11 00. Once the system is balanced, an operations report must be included in the operations manual of proper adjustment of control devices in order to operate fountain components per design documents and code compliant conditions. B. Investigate fountain circulation system: 1. Adjust flows and temperatures indicated. Mark final setting for each of the following in the report. a. Valve settings. b. Automatic Control Valves, operational. C. Pump Rotation. d. Pump Voltage; actual AMP's vs. maximum allowable on each phase and thermal overload size. e. Pump Suction and Discharge Pressures, GPM. f. Filter Flow and Backwash Rates, GPM / s. f. g. Heater Transfer Devices; flow rates entering and discharging water temperatures. h. Heater Combustion Air and Flues, functioning properly. i. Skimmers or Gutter Flows Balance and Components, operational. j. Wall and Floor Inlets Velocity and GPM, correctly adjusted. k. Automatic Fail Safes, operate correctly. I. Gauges and Controls, functioning properly. m. Bonding has been tested and complete. Test Run: To verify that the system installation is complete and will operate satisfactorily, facilitate a test run of all equipment per normal operation conditions and sequencing. Run test, operate and adjust equipment as may be required during test. Simulate power outages and normal experienced operation abnormalities to verify all fail safe controls are working properly. Fountain Contractor will be responsible for operation, equipment and materials during this test. Acceptance: As a condition of final acceptance, the Owner reserves the right to require the Fountain Contractor to spot check the report in their presence to verify and authenticate the findings. Final acceptance will not be made until a satisfactory report is received and the Owner is confident of it content. 3.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: A. Refer to section 1.11 of 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions. 3.4 WARRANTY: A. Refer to section 1.12 of 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions. 3.5 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION: FOUNTAIN RECIRCULATION EQUIPMENT 1305 10 - 6 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative 11 1800 Larimer Green Roof Denver, CO DESCRIPTION: A 22-story, 500,000 square foot of Class AA office, built as a glass and steel tower, 1800 Larimer is the first major high-rise office building completed in Denver's central business district since the mid 1980s. It is also the first LEED Platinum certified high-rise in Denver. The project includes a 17,000 square foot landscaped green roof over the garage, which contributes to a reduction of the heat island effect for the site and reintroduces a significant percentage of open space and habitat to the site via native plantings. Part of the structure below the green roof holds a 100-year- flood-level storm water detention and water quality tank that greatly improves the site's contribution to storm water quality, as well as providing non -potable irrigation water for the plantings on the terrace. KEY FEATURES Concrete hardscapes (exposed agg / colored) concrete walks Hydrotek Green Roof Wateproofing / drainage mat Landscaping (irrigation / plantings) Site Furnishings (benches, trash cans, etc) Marten Building what's next. Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 13 05 15 - FOUNTAIN WATER TREATMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 of Specification of Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED SPECIFICATION SECTIONS: A. Section 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions B. Section 13 05 10; Fountain Recirculation Equipment C. Section 13 05 20; Fountain Valves & Piping D. General Terms and Conditions: RE: Division 01 E. Mechanical; Division 23 F. Electrical, RE: Division 26 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK: A. Furnish and install all fountain recirculation equipment, accessories and systems including but not limited to: 1. Chemical Controllers 2. Sanitizer/Treatment Systems 3. Supplemental Treatment Systems 4. PH Supply Systems 5. Valves, Gauges, Sensors, etc. 6. All components necessary to deliver a fully operational system and as required per code. B. Electrical connections: All electrical equipment, hook-ups, wiring and conduit. Re: Electrical drawings. C. Mechanical connections: All air handling and related equipment and fixtures. Re: Mechanical drawings. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Work Includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Furnish and install all sanitization feeders, and any supplemental treatment systems as shown on the drawings and/or listed in the schedules, including all necessary piping to the re -circulation systems. FOUNTAIN WATER TREATMENT 1305 15 - 1 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO A. An integrated electronic system shall be furnished to continuously monitor and control the pH level, disinfection level (HRR) and chlorine concentration of swimming fountain and whirlfountain water. B. pH, Temperature and HRR (ORP) Sensors: 1. Provide gold tip probes for saline chlorinator. 2. Provide additional probe for back-up sanitizer C. Flow Cell and Assembly: Flowcell assembly shall be included. The fowcell shall incorporate a valve for water test sample; clear face to view probes, and constructed entirely of non- corrosive material, PVC schedule 80. D. Flow Switch: include a remote mounted flowswitch and sensor assembly enclosed in a non- corrosive enclosure and incorporating visual indication of flow condition and operate on low voltage of 12Vdc. E. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 4x (IP66) rated to eliminate the possibility of corrosion, and damage to inside of controller. F. Controller Hardware: 1. In case of power loss, the controller shall retain all programmed values. 2. Internal feed override momentary contacts for all relays shall be provided to allow manual turn on override of chemical feeder pumps and other installed devices. 3. Controller shall have fused and replaceable Solid State Relays to allow Normal Open connection in the event of malfunction. 4. Controller shall have a switch to change operation between 110 VAC or 220 VAC, single phase according to customer needs. Main power supply of controller shall be fused. G. Power: 1. Shall consume less than 1 amp at any given time. 2. Relay outputs shall be capable of handling standard line voltage of 5 amps with one time delay fuse, each for pH, and chlorine/bromine for control of chemical feed. Controller shall be capable of operating 24 hours per day. Display 1. Display shall have a LED display for pH, and HRR. 2. Provide a continuous display of derived chlorine level in ppm. 3. Will provide the date, time and alarm status displayed on the bottom line of the display. 4. The location and phone number of the controller can be programmed to display on the face. 5. In the event of an alarm display a descriptive alarm message. 6. Langelier index (LSI) & Ryznar index (RSI) shall always be displayed with date stamp. LED Display: shall be provided with visual pH and chlorine feed pump indicator, up and down, lights, which are activated as chemicals, are being fed. Controller shall also display paused mode of proportional chemical feed. shall be provided with a visible alarm indicator to warn operator of high or low pH, HRR, temperature, chlorine levels, a low or no flow and failsafe conditions exist. Control Parameters: Shall provide a qualitative measure of chlorine/bromine sanitation level utilizing High Resolution Redox (HRR). FOUNTAIN WATER TREATMENT 1305 15 - 3 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 2. Chemical Feed Pump: Stenner 45m self -priming, peristaltic feed pump. Pump to have three point roller assembly to prevent siphoning and mechanical feed rate controller. Mount feed pump(s) on chemical resistant panel. Use #5 Tube. 3. Acid room to be adequately vented as per drawings and in section 1.06 of 13 1101 specifications. 4. Acid should be diluted prior to entering acid room, fumes from high concentration of acid will corrode and deteriorate all un-protected items in room. 5. Provide acid in acid cabinet from Securall, C360, with self closing doors, self latching, and venting. Provide'% hp exhaust fan, EXM200 with galvanized flex hose FGH2O0 for cabinet. Vested contractor to coordinate connections. 2.4 SANITATION SYSTEM: A. Tri-chlor Tablet Chlorination System: 1. General Description: The system shall be designed to feed low concentrations of calcium hypochlorite in solution intermittently or continuously as required for pool and spa applications. The system shall be a single pre -assembled, package unit with a welded aluminum frame consisting of chlorinator, electrical box, centrifugal pump, and balance tank for ease of installation and operation. 2. The base proposal requires furnishing equipment as specified herein, though substitutions will be considered. The bidder is cautioned that substitutions must meet the quality and operational requirements of each feature specified in Section 1.02 below. Batch systems with pressure mixing components producing chlorine concentrations exceeding the limits of the specifications will not be considered. 3. Any system offered shall use an NSF Standard 50 listed erosion feeder and tablet combination, and shall be capable of meeting all requirements of the Health Department having jurisdiction over the installation. 4. System Features: a. A maximum chlorine solution level of 0.05% (500 ppm) shall be maintained to prevent calcification in system components. Systems producing chlorine concentrations higher than 0.05% shall not be acceptable. b. Delivery shall be by erosion feed technology to control accurate and consistent concentration limits in the chlorine treatment solution. Soaking type, spray and/or vortex technology systems shall not be acceptable. c. The chlorinator shall automatically and continuously feed a limited quantity of chlorine in solution as needed, when the system is not running, no more chlorine than that amount which can be fed in one minute or less shall be left in the tank to prevent dilution. Batch systems preparing excess quantities of solution for delivery over an extended period shall not be acceptable. d. All piping in the chlorinator unit shall be Schedule 40 PVC. Systems with flexible tubing shall not be acceptable. 5. System Components: a. Tablet Chlorinator is designed exclusively for calcium hypochlorite tablets. Tablets are placed on a sieve plate inside the chlorinator; as water flows across the sieve plate, the tablets erode at a rate proportional to the flow rate. b. Inlet Water Supply Connection with main line as shown in schematics. Include flow meters, gauges, valves and all accessory items for operational system. C. Inlet Solenoid Valve. Opens and closes on command when the system receives a signal. 24V or 110 V required to the chemical controller. 6. Electrical Requirements: One electrical circuits are required for operation: (1) 24v or (1) 110v control circuit from a pool controller tot eh solenoid. 7. Warranty: The manufacturer shall guarantee in writing that this unit, if operated in accordance with written instructions given and accepted by the Owner, will perform in FOUNTAIN WATER TREATMENT 1305 15 - 5 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO a. System shall utilize direct Belt Drive with square machined pulleys and shafts to prevent slippage and pin shearing. Systems utilizing shear pins or complicated gear boxes will be unacceptable. b. Wiper power supply shall be 24 volt DC for improved safety. C. System shall incorporate Direct Shaft Encoding for positional location. Systems relying on external proxy switches or internally located magnets will be unacceptable. d. Wiper interval shall be operator selectable with optional override switch. e. Wiper faults are to be indicated on the control system display. f. Wiper System to utilize "Intelligent Operation" for automatic start up commissioning g. Records wiper position @ chamber ends. Position must be fixed and not dependent on a timed interval or component striking end of chamber. h. Establish a travel run without setting limit adjustments to ensure system integrity and longevity. 6. Ultraviolet Control System: Control cabinet shall be Engineered Treatment System/ atg.Willand SPECTRA microprocessor control unit. System shall be epoxy coated NEMA 12 rated cabinet. Three levels of operation shall be provided to meet the needs of the operator and fountain environment: Simple Control — (Start, Stop & Reset), Full Parameter Display, and Customized Operator Configuration. Modes of operation shall be password protected to secure system critical setup functions. Control system shall have clearly identifiable Start, Stop and Reset control buttons (suitable for gloved operation) with Running and Fault LCD indicators. a. Two-line LCD screen shall display a minimum of the following: Ultraviolet dose (derived from flow and intensity inputs), Ultraviolet intensity (as a % and mw/cmz), Lamp Current, Flow rate (accepts signal from optional flow meter — displayed as gallons per minute), Chamber temperature (displayed as deg. F), Operation hour meter, System spares listing, Lamp fault, low Ultraviolet & temperature alarm, Ground fault trip, Wiper fault. All alarm functions shall have simple text message display to assist in fault finding. b. Control system shall have a minimum of the following system interface control: Remote operation, Process interrupt features (from valves, flow meters), Low UV dose (configurable to shutdown or alarm only, Flow meter input, Auto -restrike, Half to full power Ultraviolet setting with 24hr/7day settable timer. c. Control system shall have built in data -logging capabilities to record the following information: Ultraviolet intensity required, Ultraviolet intensity measured. Lamp current, Chamber temperature, Flow rate (if flow meter connected), Time and date stamp, All alarms generated. 7. Project Commissioning: Ultraviolet Chamber and Control Panel shall be commissioned by a qualified factory trained technician. During this time period, final electrical and control cabling will be connected from the Spectra control cabinet to the Ultraviolet disinfection chamber. Daily operation and simple maintenance instructions shall be provided during this commissioning process. A factory trained representative of the manufacturer shall perform all warranty work. Manufacture to warranty Ultraviolet Chamber and Spectra Control panel for a period of 12 months. Medium pressure Ultraviolet bulbs shall be warranted for a period of 4000 hours. Intermittently operated bulbs (>_ 1 on/off cycles per day) will be replaced free of charge should failure occur prior to 3000 hours and replacement will be prorated between 3000 and 4000 hours. A detailed warranty sheet shall accompany this document upon request. 8. Verify with manufacture for concentrations and use with saline chlorinator. Provide bonding protection for each unit using water bonds or anodes. 9. Acceptable Manufactures: a. ETS b. Siemens c. Hanovia d. Delta FOUNTAIN WATER TREATMENT 1305 15 - 7 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO C. Acceptance: As a condition of final acceptance, the Owner reserves the right to require the Fountain Contractor to spot check the report in their presence to verify and authenticate the findings. Final acceptance will not be made until a satisfactory report is received and the Owner is confident of it content. 3.5 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION: A. After work of this section has been completed, clean up work area and remove all equipment, excess materials, and debris. Protect fountain from damage until time of final completion. Remove and replace finishes, which are chipped, cracked, abraded, improperly adhered, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 13 05 15 FOUNTAIN WATER TREATMENT 1305 15 - 9 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO A. Refer to section 1.08 of 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions 1.6 SUBMITTALS & SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer to section 1.09 of 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES AND PIPING MATERIALS A. Valve Connections: Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joint. Use line size valves. B. Use of Valves: 1. If metal vales to be used, contractor must verify that they can be used in the type of water that is going to be run through the valves. It must be fitted or coated to handle the corrosiveness of the water and any chemicals that may pass though the plumbing. 2. Pipe sizes 3" - 12" - Butterfly. (NO CAST IRON VALVES TO BE USED, UNLESS THEY ARE RATED AND CAN BE USED FOR THE TREATED WATER WITH CHEMCIALS BEING USED FOR THIS PROJECT) a. Butterfly Valves: Butterfly valves 3" - 12" shall be wafer design flangeless or lug bodies shall be suitable for use between ANSI 125 or 150 Ib. flanges. All valves 3" through 6" shall be lever handle style unless otherwise called out on the plans. All valves 8" and larger shall be gear drive, Spears, DeZurik, Muller, or equal. b. Butterfly valves 14" - 24" shall be lug body design c. Bodies of the flangeless design shall be provided with at least four (4) bolt guides to center the valve in the pipeline. d. All butterfly valves shall have a PVC or aluminum bronze body with nickel coated disc, one piece stainless steel shaft with Buna-N or EPDM seat minimum 150 PSI rating. e. All butterfly valves 3" - 6" shall have 10 positions locking in handle, butterfly valves 8" - 24" shall have gear operators and chain operators as required. f. All valves shall be as manufactured by Spears or equal as approved by the Architect/Engineer and Aquatic Designer 3. Miscellaneous valves 1/2" - 2 1/2" - PVC True Union Ball Valves. 4. All chemical lines and equipment - PVC True Union Ball Valves. a. Ball Valves: PVC Type True Union Ball Valves, Eslon, Assahi, Spear or equal. C. Check Valves: Furnish and install as shown on the drawings. Shall be PVC water or spring style with Spacer. Must be one full pipe size larger than installed pipe size to eliminate flow restrictions. Models as manufactured by Techno Check or Praher. D. Expansion Joint/Flexible Connector: Provide Metrosphere Model as manufactured by Metraflex, Chicago, Illinois, as indicated on the drawings. E. Solenoid Valves: Use slow closing, two-way valves to eliminate water hammer of characteris- tic voltage, material, and pipe size for correct flow rate as manufactured by ASCO, ASCO Redhat, Dayton or equal. F. Submerged Service Operators: Use only approved service operators for the valve requiring underwater operation. FOUNTAIN VALVES & PIPING 13 05 20 - 2 Copyright 2015 Ohison Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 4. All support hardware used under water or in surge tanks shall be fiberglass or stainless steel, Strut -Tech orAickinstruct. E. Fountain Pipe Excavation and Backfill: Excavation for all swimming fountain systems supply related piping. a. Existing subsoil materials shall not be used for pipe bedding. b. All piping shall be bedded with a minimum of 6" clean sand material and a minimum of 2'- 0" clean stone material top cover. The balance may be existing site material, provided no organic material, clay or topsoil is used. C. Refer to applicable soils report for additional recommendation. Piping: 1. Piping must be laid on a grade so it will drain completely by gravity to prevent damage. In all instances where gravity drainage is not provided, the contractor shall install drain valves and French drains so that all lines can be drained completely. Shop drawings will be required on any such installation. a. Cut all pipe with mechanical cutter without damage to the pipe. b. Locate all valves for maximum operation accessibility. 2. Placing and Laying: Inspect pipe for defects before installation. Clean the interior of pipe thoroughly of foreign matter and keep clean during laying operation. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are unstable. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely closed so that no trench water, earth or other substance will enter the pipes or fittings. 3. Threaded Joints: After cutting and before threading, the pipe shall be reamed and shall have burrs removed. Screw joints shall be made with graphite or inert filler and oil or with an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Threads shall be full - cut and not more than 3 threads on the pipe remained exposed. Use Teflon II tape on the male threads of all threaded pipe joints. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks will not be permitted. Unions shall be provided where required for disconnection of exposed piping. Unions will be permitted where access is provided. 4. Solvent welded joints: Shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 5. Cross Connections: Installation shall be made that will prevent any cross connection or inter -connection between distribution supply for drinking purposes and the swimming fountain that will permit a backflow of water into the potable water supply. 6. Valve Identification: Label all valves to describe their function. Provide wall mounted laminated piping and valve legend. 7. Mechanical Piping Identification: All piping in Mechanical Room to be labeled with description of line and arrows indicating direction of flow, with directional flow arrows or equal at 10' intervals. All labels shall be in conformance with the scheme for identification of piping systems (ANSI A13.1, 1981) sponsored by the National Safety Council, the American Society of Mechanical Engineers and OSHA. Provide color codes as per local code requirements, if non exist use the following; Raw Water - Blue Heated Water - Red Filtered Water - Green Chlorine/Bromine — Yellow Wastewater - Black CO2 or Acid - Orange 8. Testing and Flushing of Piping: a. Pressure Piping: After pipe has been laid, joints completed the trench should be partially backfilled-leaving joints exposed for examination. Subject lines to hydrostatic of not less than 25 psi, joints shall remain watertight under this pressure for a period of 2 hours. All buried pipe and pressure testing shall be check by the Architect/Owners and Aquatic Designers representative to verify that the support, workmanship, fittings, materials and mechanical soundness meet specifications before Fountain Contractor completes backfilling. Notification of the Architect and FOUNTAIN VALVES & PIPING 13 05 20 - 4 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 13 05 25 - FOUNTAIN RECIRCULATION FITTINGS & COMPONENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 of Specification of Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 13 05 01; Fountain General Conditions B. Section 13 05 05; Fountain Concrete Work C. Section 13 05 20, Fountain Valves & Piping D. Section 13 05 40, Fountain Waterproofing E. General Terms and Conditions: RE: Division 01 F. Earthwork and Excavation: RE: Division 31. 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Furnish and install all materials and labor for; 1. Recirculation Systems 2. White Goods and accessories 3. All components necessary to deliver a fully operational system and as required per code. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work Includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Coordination and layout of surge tanks, pipe routing and piping block -outs as required. 2. Installation / Construction of surge tanks and gutter systems. 3. Furnish and installation of all white goods, fittings and components as indicated on contract documents and as required per code. Including: a. Dropouts b. Main Drains / Suction Outlets C. Return Inlets 4. Installation of all associated pipe / plumbing to deliver a complete, water -tight working system. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to section 1.08 of 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions FOUNTAIN RECIRCULATION FITTINGS & COMPONENTS 13 05 25 - 1 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 90% Construction Documents Old Town Square Renovation Fort Collins. CO a. Acceptable crystalline admixture manufacturers: 1) Aquafin, IC -Admix 2) Xypex 6. Ground and bond all metal incorporated into the surge tank to NEC standards, including but not limited to; a. All reinforcing steel b. Access hatch PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all fittings and components as per manufacturers instructions, contract documents and as required to deliver a water -tight, code compliant, functioning system. B. All systems are to be pressure tested prior to backfilling or grouting. C. Ground / Bond all necessary materials as per NEC Standards D. Acquire all building / health department, Architects and Engineers approval prior to backfilling, grouting, embedding, etc. [c����V 1�17a\�IH�:Zij1 x�1[i1►1 A. After work of this section has been completed, clean up work area and remove all equipment, excess materials, and debris. Protect fountain from damage until time of final completion. Remove and replace finishes, which are chipped, cracked, abraded, improperly adhered, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 13 05 25 FOUNTAIN RECIRCULATION FITTINGS & COMPONENTS 13 05 25 - 3 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 2.1 TILE, STONE, AND SETTING MATERIALS: A. Furnish and install swimming pool work tiles as shown on the drawings and as listed in the schedules. Determine order/delivery dates at contract buy-out. Provide secure storage on - site. No extension of time will be granted because of unavailable materials or material delivery schedule delays. Coordinate tile ordering with Installer of Section 09. B. Environmental Conditions: Maintain temperature at 50' F minimum during tile work and for 7 days after completion or furnish protection as approved by the Architect and Aquatic Designer. C. Extra Stock: Supply extra 2% of each size, color, and type in clean marked cartons for Owner's use. D. Tile: Furnish all ceramic tile required as follows (all shall be frost and acid proof). Colors shall be as selected by Architect and Aquatic Designer from standard price range tiles. E. Furnish all tile or stone required for special markings and lettering in conformance with the Contract Documents and applicable Codes, including depth markings and no diving markers. 1. Setting Materials: a. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. b. Hydrated lime: ASTM C206, 7 Type S. C. Sand: ASTM C144. d. Water: Clean and potable. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer's of Pre -Mix: Multi -cure as manufactured by the C-Cure Chemical Company, used with latex additive or Kerabond with Kerolastic additive or Flex PCI System. 3. All corner edge trim tile to be bull -nose or hand grip tile as specified in finish schedule of contract documents and per code. Use of standard square tile for corner edges will not be acceptable. F. Grout: Commercial Two -Part Epoxy Grout. 1. Acceptability of Surfaces: Before tiling, check area to be tiled for acceptability as follows: (Installation of tile finish on a subsurface constitutes acceptance of the subsurface by the applier of finish materials.) 2. Surface medium -rough texture. 3. All surfaces to be tile shall be free of dust, rust, paint, from oil or other release coatings. 4. Provision for rope anchors and ladders and other embedments at proper locations. 5. Concrete true to line, level, plumb and curvature. 6. Width, depth and length will permit finished accuracy of markings and dimensions. G. Layout: Align all joints to give straight uniform grout lines. 2. Observe exact minimum length per dimensions shown on drawings. FOUNTAIN FINISHES 13 05 35 - 2 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative 4 COMPANY RESOURCES Total Number of Resources in the Denver Office # of Employees 14 Job Category Administration 5 Procurement 5 Accountant 31 Project Managers 25 Superintendents 9 Business Development/Marketing 33 Foreman 26 Engineers Organizational Chart M.MLSrcIu. 1Wm69 T.a^' L.abrb Wmber CanTam M.mbx anoar.mpwm Gene MrJ9e MLII RD�Snale9y ..`{Hq Grypr T00 .K.tM'IWim ..i.. r...l... I RMYler aroerunay WyBenwn Bnn 51.m (E'MarFet(m0er CE/MerLeflender CE'MaNelleaUer Cl/Mmio�(ea0er ..� ... a . _. m Location of Office Management: IEmployeesJobCategory 17 Safety & Quality 4 Construction Executives 21 Preconstruction/Estimating/Scheduling 8 Integrated Construction 4 Surveyors 5 Operations 207 Total Salaried 400 Total Craftworkers OFai. Mortenson All of our staff are located in Colorado and the key team members will be on site. Mortenson also has additional resources a few miles away at the Woodward project and our Denver office is available as needed. Many of our Team members have grown up, went to school, and/or currently live in Fort Collins. N1orten� M Building what's next. Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 2.3 QUARTZ AGGREGATE FINISH: (FOR ROCKWORK WATER FEATURE; OPTION) A. Work Included: Shall include but not limited to the complete installation of a quartz aggregate finish as designated in he plans and specifications within strict accordance to manufacturer instructions and listed references. B. The material will be applied pneumatically. No wheel barrowing C. Experience/Qualifications: The installer shall provide documentation providing a minimum of five (20) successful installations of similar scope with current contact information and phone numbers. 2. The installer shall be a member of the National Plasterer's Council in good standing and shall provide documentation/certification that the laborer's performing the work on site have been factory trained by the pool finish manufacturer. The Installer must have a Workers Compensation policy. 3. The installer shall provide a letter of reference from the pool finish manufacturer. 4. The finish applicator shall coordinate with the pool shell contractor, specific concrete finish requirements for the pool finish application. All pool floors shall have a slip resistant finish. 5. It is the applicator's responsibility to insure that the concrete substrate is adequate for proper bonding of pool finish in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 6. All pool finish work must strictly follow manufacturer installation guidelines, references and recommendations. 7. A brush or roll on liquid resin based bonding coat produced and approved by the pool finish manufacturer is required to be applied to the entire pool structure where the pool finish is to be applied. The manufacturer's approved bond coat must be installed and cured in accordance with manufacturer instructions prior to applying quartz aggregate finish, NO EXCEPTIONS. 8. Prepare all pool surfaces to receive the quartz aggregate finish per manufacturer recommendation. 9. Acceptable Manufacturers. a. Diamond Brite by SGM Industries b. CLI industries PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TILE OR STONE: A. Install all tile or stone in a timely workmanlike method. B. Tile or stone shall be installed in flush and square to each other C. Contractor shall install tile or stone so that all tile lines are as straight/smooth as possible FOUNTAIN FINISHES 13 05 35 - 4 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 13 05 40 - FOUNTAIN WATERPROOFING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 of Specification of Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED SPECIFICATION SECTIONS: A. Section 13 05 01: Fountain General Conditions B. Section 13 05 05: Fountain Concrete Work C. Section 13 05 20: Fountain Valves & Piping D. General Terms and Conditions: RE: Division 01 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK: A. Furnish and install all materials and labor for, 1. Waterproofing products to provide water tight finished products where specified within Division 13 05 00. 2. All components necessary to deliver a fully operational system and as required per code. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1. Work Includes (but is not necessarily limited to): a. Wall penetrations / sleeve installation b. Installation of joint sealants c. Furnish and installing all plastic/PVC waterstops d. Furnish and installing all gasket type waterstops e. Furnish and installing all Link -Seal systems f. Furnish and installing/applying all waterproofing concrete admixtures 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Refer to section 1.08 of 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions 1.6 SUBMITTALS & SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Refer to section 1.09 of 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions FOUNTAIN WATERPROOFING 13 05 40 - 1 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins. CO 2.4 MASTIC WATERSTOP: 2.5 A. As shown on drawings, is a soft, pliable yet durable bar that when exposed to water seals, locks out water without swelling, and prevents migration. Use as a water stop in cold and control joints and where concrete abuts another surface such as pipe penetrations and other shell penetrations. Install as per manufacturer instructions and use primer if instructed. B. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. J.P. Specialties Inc. Earth Shield, Type 10 Mastic Water Stop, Non Swelling. 2. Greenstreak Group Inc. Lockstop, mastic water stop, Non Swelling. 3. Henry Company, Synko Flex Products, mastic water stop, Non Swelling. CRYSTALLINE CONCRETE ADMIXTURE: A. Admixture shall be Xypex C-500, C-1000 or C-2000, as supplied by Xypex Chemical Corporation, through IMX Technologies or approved equal. This Admixture shall be a dry powder compound consisting of Portland cement, very fine treated silica sand and various active proprietary chemicals. Xypex causes a catalytic reaction that generates a non -soluble crystalline formation of dendritic fibers within the matrix of the concrete, permanently sealing the concrete from the penetration of liquids and chemicals. Product shall meet the following criteria: 1. Chemically Resistant for pH Levels of 3 to 11 constant contact and pH Levels of 2 to 12 periodic contact per ASTM C267-77, ASTM C672-76. 2. Potable Water Approved per National Safety Foundation (ANSI/NSF) 61. 3. Freeze -Thaw and De-icing Chemical Resistance per ASTM C672-76. 4. Radiation Resistance per USANI N69-1967. 5. Crack Sealing ability for re -sealing cracks up to .04 mm (1/64") per ASTM C856-88. 6. Withstand 175 PSI water pressure penetration test per U.S. Army Corps of Engineers CRD-C-48-73. 7. Concrete Admixture shall not decrease the compressive strength of the concrete mix design (28 day compressive strength test), ASTM C 39/C 39M. 8. Crystalline Waterproofing Manufacturer shall have a minimum 10 years history manufacturing crystalline waterproofing products. 9. Concrete Batch Plant Operators shall be Certified by Manufacturer in the mixing and use of Crystalline Waterproofing Products. 10. Shall provide a ten year watertight warranty per Manufacturer or Manufacturers Representative. 11. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Xypex b. Aqua Fin -IC Admix 2.6 SURFACE APPLIED CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING: A. Acrylic Modified Cement Waterproofing: Cementitious, two -component, acrylic emulsion based, highly flexible, crack bridging waterproof membrane barrier against positive water pressure, with the following characteristics: 1. Product: AQUAFIN-2K/M 2. Color: 3. Dry Component -A: 4. Liquid Component-B: 5. Working Time: 6. Shore A Hardness: (ASTM D-2240) Gray or ................. as per color chart Precise blend of cementitious material White acrylic emulsion and admixtures Approximately 45 minutes 85 FOUNTAIN WATERPROOFING 13 05 40 - 3 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 13 05 45 - FOUNTAIN MAINTENANCE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 of Specification of Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED SPECIFICATION SECTIONS: A. Section 13 0501: Fountain General Conditions B. General Terms and Conditions: RE: Division 01 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Work Includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Furnish and install all maintenance and safety equipment as listed on contract documents and as required by code. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Refer to section 1.08 of 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions 1.5 SUBMITTALS & SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Refer to section 1.09 of 13 05 01, Fountain General Conditions PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUMP PUMP: A. Provide one (1) drainage pump. Pump shall have a 20' (foot) integral cord for GFCI hookup. Built-in check valve and capable of pumping 7000 Gallons per hour. Pump to be provided to owner to store and use to drain surge tank and / or fountain(s) 1. Pump shall be a StaRite, Trident, 3/4 HP, 115V 2.2 TELESCOPIC POLE: FOUNTAIN MAINTENANCE 13 05 45 - 1 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO B. All Signage 3.3 Fountain Contract is responsible for furnishing and installing all hangers/mounts, etc. required to properly and orderly store all safety and maintenance equipment. A. Hangers/mounts shall be made of non corrosive material. B. Provide Kiefer #510285 aluminum pole hangers or equal. END OF SECTION 13 05 45 FOUNTAIN MAINTENANCE 13 05 45 - 3 Copyright 2015 Ohlson Lavoie Collaborative 4. Coordinate the mechanical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of same. Coordinate mechanical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. 5. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner's agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. 6. In acceptance or rejection of installed mechanical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 7. Visit site prior to bid and verify that conditions are as indicated. Contractor shall include in his bid costs required to make his work meet existing conditions. 1.4 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES/SITE A. Visit the premises site before submitting bid and verify the conditions are as indicated. Contractor shall include in his bid costs required to make work meet existing conditions as no extras will be allowed for lack of knowledge of existing conditions. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Comply with all applicable codes, laws, industry standards and utility company regulations. 1.6 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES A. Apply for and pay for all permits, fees, licenses and inspections for this Division of work. Do not include the cost of any "Plant Investment Fee" or "System Development Charge" for sewer and/or water or any "Gas Application Fee" charged by the Utility Company. This will be arranged for and paid for by the Owner B. Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections required by applicable codes, rules and regulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Furnish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. 1.7 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Temporary heat will be furnished by the General Contractor. Use of the permanent heating system will not be allowed. Coordinate temporary heating schedule and bid with general contractor. 1.8 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Existing systems and conditions shown on drawings for existing buildings are to be noted "for guidance only". The Mechanical Contractor shall field check all existing conditions prior to bidding and is to include in his bid an allowance for removal and/or relocation of existing ductwork, piping, fixtures, or other equipment and adapt new and existing mechanical system to all other work as required. B. Existing ductwork, equipment, piping, etc. which are not indicated for reuse become the property of the Contractor. However, fixtures, pumps, fans, fire protection equipment, etc. shall become the property of the Owner unless noted otherwise. BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD MAY, 2013 15100 - 2 duct is inaccessible when building is complete. "Exposed" is intended to be within equipment rooms, unfinished areas, above "push up" ceilings, accessible pipe and duct tunnels. 1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings and Product Data on all equipment and for Fire Protection. B. Shop drawings required for this project are as follows: 1. Plumbing fixtures 2. Insulation 3. Fans 4. Piping S. Motor Starters C. Present shop drawing submittal data at one time, bound and indexed in a neat and orderly manner. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Provide four sets of submittal data, unless noted otherwise in Division I. I. Provide, with shop drawing submittal, 1/4 inch scale layout drawings of rooms with boilers, chillers, and HVAC equipment. Layouts shall show locations of, and shall be coordinated with electrical equipment, and equipment shall be drawn to scale. 2. Place orders for all equipment in time to prevent any delay in construction schedule or completion of project. If any materials or equipment are not ordered in time, additional charges made by equipment manufacturers to complete their equipment in time to meet construction schedule, together with any special handling charges, shall be borne by the Contractor. D. Contractor agrees that shop drawing submittals processed by the engineer are not change orders. The purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and contract documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or after shop drawings and specifications shall control and shall be followed. 1.12 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of Architect and engineer before proceeding. 1.13 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the process of the work, maintain an accurate record of the installation of the mechanical systems. Upon completion of the mechanical systems installation, transfer all record data to prints of the original drawings. Drawings shall include all addendum items, BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD MAY, 2013 15100 - 4 2. Such alternate proposals shall not be substituted for the base bid and must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be deducted for each item and all deviations from specified items. Highlight all difference from specified equipment. If any such alternates are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items within 14 days of award of contract. Late requests for proposed substitutions shall not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concerns. 2.3 BID ALTERNATE(S) A. Refer to Division I and all contract documents for additional information. B. Alternate(s) for Material and Equipment 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid alternates at the time the base bids are due. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STORAGE A. Provide for proper storage of all materials and equipment and assume responsibility for losses due to any cause. All storage shall be within the contact limit lines of the building site. Cover and store all equipment and materials out of elements; any rusted or weather damaged item shall not be used. 3.2 PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions I. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the product manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 2. Consult with manufacturer's technical representatives, who are recognized as technical experts, for specific instructions on special project conditions. 3. If a conflict exists, notify the Architect/Engineer in writing and obtain his instruction before proceeding with the work in question. B. Movement of Equipment 1. Wherever possible, arrange for the movement and positioning of equipment so that enclosing partitions, walls and roofs will not be delayed or need to be removed. 2. Otherwise, advise Contractor of opening requirements to be maintained for the subsequent entry of equipment. BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD MAY, 2013 15100 - 6 Provide initial water seal fill for all waste p-traps, condensate traps, or similar traps. 3.4 PROTECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS A. All temporary water connections shall be made with an approved back flow preventer. B. All hose bibbs shall have, as a minimum, a vacuum breaker to prevent back flow. C. Direct connections to hydronic systems shall only be made through a reduced pressure back flow preventer. 3.5 PROTECTION OF SYSTEMS SERVING OCCUPIED SPACES A. Where work is being performed in occupied spaces, or occupancy is to be phased in with ongoing construction contractor shall prevent contamination of all systems serving the occupants including but not limited to: 1. Supply or return air a. Systems shall be capped or provided with adequate particulate and gas phase filtration to prevent dust, chemical, or biological contamination. Particulate filters shall be as a minimum equivalent to those specified for the completed system. 2. Domestic Water a. Isolate sterilized portions from non -sterilized portions. 3.6 ASBESTOS A. The identification and/or abatement of asbestos hazards is not part of this contract. 1. If asbestos is encountered, contact Owner for instructions. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Division 1 sections of the specifications regarding requirements of Record Drawings and Operation and maintenance Manual submittal and systems demonstration. 1. Demonstrate that each system operates properly. 2. Explain the operation of each system to the Owner's Representative. Explain use of O&M manual in operating and maintaining systems. B. Date and time of demonstration will be determined by the Owner. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Label all piping and equipment. Provide color coded full band or strip type markers and flow arrows on piping. Provide engraved plastic valve tags with valve number and attach with standard chain or s-hooks. Provide engraved plastic sign on or near specified equipment. BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD MAY, 2013 15100 - 8 D. Adjust and balance all air and water systems. Check, adjust and balance all systems to meet the design conditions and tabulate all information on acceptable forms. All systems shall be checked for proper performance during design conditions, both heating and cooling. 3.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Books of Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be personally delivered to the Owner's authorized representative and the Owner instructed as to their use and the equipment involved. (Provide two books for each building). B. Approval will not be given for final payment until the tests, balancing and operating instruction portions have been completed. 3.14 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. All equipment shall be started by the manufacturer or under the manufacturer's supervision. Start-up data shall be recorded in logs. Copies of start-up logs shall be forwarded to Mechanical Engineer and included in Operation and Maintenance manuals. END OF SECTION SECTION 15100—BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are a part of these specifications. Consult them for further instructions and be governed by the requirements thereunder. 1.2 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All equipment shall have housings suitable for the location installed. C. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of damage and corrosion, unless specifically directed to reuse any existing materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. Squirrel cage, open dripproof with thermal overload protection and ball bearings. BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD MAY, 2013 15100 - 10 SECTION 00300 BID FORM 4. COMPANY RESOURCES Full List of Equipment in Hand Resource Name Dril Rig, HDD 170 Hp Resource Description Horizontal Directional Drill, 170 Hp, 50,000lb Resource Type Drilling Equipment Dril Rig, HDD 47 Hp Horizontal Directional Drill, 47 Hp, 10,000 lb Drilling Equipment Drill Rig, Blast Hole Truck Mounted Blast Hole Rig AtlasT46H, 700 Hp Drilling Equipment Drill Rig, Truck 140 Watson I100Truck Mounted Drill, 140 Hp Drilling Equipment Drill Rig, Truck 152 Watson 2100 Truck Mounted Drill, 152 Hp Drilling Equipment Excavator- Mini Compact Excavator Cat 303CR Excavator Excavator Cat312 Excavator Cat 312C Excavator Excavator Cat315 Excavator Cat 315C Excavator Excavator Cat320 Excavator Cat320C Excavator Excavator Cat325 Excavator Cat325CL Excavator Excavator Cat330 Excavator Cat330CL Excavator Excavator Cat345 Excavator Cat345CL Excavator Excavator Cat365 Excavator Cat365CL Excavator Excavator, Hammer attachment Hydraulic Hammer - G80 7,500 lb. Misc Excavator, Shears Processor/Shear Misc Excavator, Compaction wheel 36" Compaction wheel Misc. Generator 25 kw, Generator 25 kw Generator Generator 100 kw Generator 100 kw Generator Jack Hammer 55 lb Jack Hammer Misc Lift Boom 41'-50' BOOM LIFT 41'-50' STRAIGHT Lift Lift Boom 5V-60' BOOM LIFT 51'-60' STRAIGHT Lift Lift Scissor SCISSOR LIFT 21' - 30' RT Lift Light Plant Portable LIGHT TOWER TOWABLE Misc Loader 928G Cat Articulated Wheel Loader 928G Wheel Loader Loader 938G Cat Articulated Wheel Loader 938G Series II Wheel Loader Loader 950H Cat Articulated Wheel Loader 950H Wheel Loader Loader 966G Cat Articulated Wheel Loader 966G Series 11 Wheel Loader Loader 980G Cat Articulated Wheel Loader 98OG Series II Wheel Loader Log Loader Cat 320D Cat 320D FM Log Loader, Crawler, 157Hp Logging Log Loader Cat 325D Cat 325D FM Log Loader, Crawler, 204Hp Logging Log Feller Buncher Cat 521 Cat 521 Feller Buncher, Crawler, 284 Hp Logging Log Feller Buncher Cat 551 Cat 551 Feller Buncher, Crawler, 305 Hp Logging Motor Grader 140H Motor Grader 140H, 12'Blade Motor Grader Motor Grader 160H Motor Grader 160H, 14'Blade Motor Grader Motor Grader 14H Motor Grader 14H, 14'Blade Motor Grader Motor Grader 16H Motor Grader 16H, 16' Blade Motor Grader Office Trailer TRAILER OFFICE - 12' X 60' Field Office Pickup PICKUP TRUCK Vehicles Pile Driver Air Pile Driver Air Conmaco 5300 Pile Driver Pile Driver Diesel Pile Driver Diesel MKT DE 150 Pile Driver Pile Driver Vibrator Pile Driver American 200 Vibro Pile Driver Pile Driver, DH 245 le Driver, Delmag D8023 Diesel Hammer, 245 Hp Pile Driver Pile Driver, DH 48 Pile Driver, Delmag D1942 Diesel Hammer, 48 Hip Pile Driver Post Auger Portable Earth Auger Drilling Equipment Power Trowel Ride Power Trowel Ride -on 96" 33 HP Concrete Tools MorteniM Building what's next. or minimize freeze damage potential. The Architect/Engineer will neither guarantee nor be responsible for any consequences of freezing. 3.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Flexible Connections Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. 3.3 PIPE HANGERS A. General Provide pipe supports for vertical lines at each floor. Provide pipe hangers to support the systems without sagging, including hangers at each offset or change in direction, at ends of branches over five feet in length and at the following maximum spacing: Pipe Size Hanger Spacing Hanger Rod Diameter Minimum a. 3/4" and smaller 6 ft. 3/8" b. V 8 ft. 3/8" c. 1-1/4" through 2" 10 ft. 3/8" d. 2-1/2" through 3" 10 ft. 1/2" e. 4" through 5" 10 ft. 1/2" f. 6" through 10" 2 ft 5/8" g. 12" and larger 12 ft. 7/8" h. Cast iron no hub 5 ft. and at joints 3.4 PIPE DEPTHS A. Interior pipe below slabs shall be a minimum of 4 inches below slab and shall not be in contact with concrete at any point. Minimum exterior cover over water piping, unless otherwise shown or required by code, shall be 8 feet above the top of the pipe. Area drains shall have maximum cover possible consistent with finished landscape and acceptable flow lines. Gas piping shall have minimum of 3 foot cover with warning tape 12" above pipe. Sanitary waste and storm drain lines shall have 3 foot cover minimum. 3.5 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Full-length pipe in longest lengths possible shall be used. All threads shall be right hand, pipe standard, clean cut, full depth and tapering. Install piping so as to permit complete draining. Provide drains at all low points. All interior soil, waste and condensate lines shall have uniform pitch in the direction of flow of not less than 1 /4 inch per foot unless otherwise noted. Ream out all pipe ends, turn on ends and rattle before installing. BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD MAY, 2013 15100 - 12 B. In mechanical equipment room floors, all pipe sleeves to the Schedule 40 pipe and shall extend 1" above finished floor. In mechanical equipment room floors, all ducts shall have a 4" high concrete curb around duct. C. Caulk all pipes and ducts leaving equipment rooms between sleeve and duct or pipe, 1" deep on each side of wall, floor, or roof. Caulk bare pipes and ducts with lead wool. Caulk insulated pipes with 1- or 2-part polysulphide caulking compound. D. In the same manner as described in Paragraph C above, caulk all other pipes and ducts throughout the building which penetrate walls and floors and roofs this includes pipe and ducts to rooftop units. E. All pipes which may be in view shall be finished with chrome floor, wall and ceiling plates, except in equipment rooms. 3.9 FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS A. Furnish and install as indicated on the plans and/or as may be necessary for the proper installation of all equipment furnished under this Division, all foundations, bases and supports. Contractor shall be responsible for their correct location and sizes to fit all equipment. Shim and grout between the equipment and its base to align and level. Bolt equipment inertia bases, vibration isolators, and supports to prevent relative movement. B. Furnish all hangers, anchors, sway bracing, guides, etc., for the various piping and duct systems as required for their proper installation. END OF SECTION BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD MAY, 2013 15100 - 14 3.2 DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPING A. Insulate all hot water supply lines and circulating water lines with U.L. approved, flame resistant, V thick glass fiber, 850° pipe insulation with white, flame resistant jacket with self- sealing lap as made by Johns Manville Company or equivalent, with ends butted. Seal off the ends of the pipe insulation at all valves, fittings, flanges, etc. B. Valves, Flanges, Unions and Fittings: Insulate valves and fittings with glass fiber blanket insulation and premolded PVC covers (covers to be UL 25/50 rated). C. Buried Pipe: Spiral wrap all buried pipe, valves and fittings (except water service from street to building) with "Protecto Wrap" No. 200 coating, 50% overlap. No insulation is required. END OF SECTION fittings or hubless, cast iron soil pipe with cast iron couplings approved for below grade installation. From this point on shall be as specified under "Sanitary Sewer." 2. Vent piping above ground 2" and over; standard weight, cast iron soil pipe and fittings, or standard weight, galvanized steel pipe with 150 lb. galvanized malleable iron fittings. Pipe 1-1/2" and under; standard weight, galvanized steel pipe with black cast iron fittings for 125 lb. SWP. 3. Waste and vent piping above ground may be DWV copper drainage pipe and fittings using 50-50 solder. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Architect. H. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. 1. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 3.3 SOIL, WASTE, VENT & STORM DRAIN (to 10 ft. outside bldg.) A. General 1. Main lines within the building; provide a uniform fall of not less than one inch in eight feet. 2. Branches; provide a uniform fall of not less than one inch in four feet. PLUMBING MAY, 2013 15400 - 2 PLUMBING MAY, 2013 15400 - 4 Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15' divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30°; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45". E. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area. F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands and sheet metal screws. G. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8" and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. Use mechanical joints for exposed round duct joints. H. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 2.3 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: Standard leakage rate and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. Multiple or single blade in opposed blade configuration constructed of 0.064 inch thick Galvanized steel. Blade axles, tie bars and brackets shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Ball bearings are to be oil impregnated bronze or molded synthetic. 2.4 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards and as indicated. B. Coordinate locations with Architect prior to fabrication. C. Fabricate rigid and close -fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. D. Access doors smaller than 12" square may be secured with sash locks. E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18" square, three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24" x 48". Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes. F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.5 LOW VELOCITY FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Acoustically insulated flexible duct, consisting of inner core of perforated one ply corrugated duct, 1 " thick insulation and air tight vapor barrier cover. The flexible duct must be approved by code authority for the specific application. 1. Clevaflex Clevaform type DBA or equivalent. HVAC INSTRUMENT AND CONTROLS MAY, 2013 15900 - 2 E. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after automatic dampers at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8" x 8" size for hand access, 18" x 18" size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.2 GRILLE, REGISTER, DIFFUSER AND LOUVER INSTALLATION A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. B. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. C. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. 3.3 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION A. Duct sizes shown on the drawings are outside (sheet metal) duct dimensions. Ductwork shall be furnished and installed in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure (STD) Duct Construction Standards and High Pressure (STV) Duct Construction Standards Manual. B. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. C. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. D. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. E. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. Do not install takeoffs on elbows or other points of the system where air velocity is not uniform. G. Suspend ducts from structure with proper hangers at 4' -0" intervals, at each floor and wherever necessary. Make all duct connections to motor driven equipment with flexible connections, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the plans. Install turning vanes in all 90' square elbows, whether shown on Plans or not. Install manual splitter dampers and/or opposed blade dampers in all velocity duct division and splits where shown. Splitter dampers shall have push rod and external locking device. Install adjustable volume extractors in low velocity duct takeoffs with linkage for external operator. H. Make all duct offsets with 15 degree transitions. Sharper transitions can be made only when space does not allow 15 degree offsets, 30 degree offsets minimum. Make all radius elbows with radius of one and one half times the diameter or width of duct and an inside throat radius of one times the diameter or width. HVAC INSTRUMENT AND CONTROLS MAY, 2013 15900 - 4 Insulation Schedule DUCTWORK TYPE INSULATION THICKNESS Exhaust Ducts Within B 1" Rectilinear Supply/Return Air Ducts B 1" Round Supply/Return Air Ducts A 2" 3.7 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Attach all flexible ducts inner to duct connectors, diffuser necks, or ductwork with stainless steel worm driven clamp. Tape outer vapor barrier securely over clamp with vapor barrier tape. 3.8 DUCT SYSTEM ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. END OF SECTION HVAC INSTRUMENT AND CONTROLS MAY, 2013 15900 - 6 BG 08/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION 3. NFPA 101 — Life Safety Code. 4. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 6. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 7. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. 8. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 9. International Building Code. 10. International Mechanical Code. 11. International Fire Code. 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). B. Comply with requirements of Underwriters Laboratories for all items installed for which U.L. standards have been established. C. The drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, statutes, or ordinances in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take precedence when they are more stringent or conflict with the drawings and specifications. 1.03 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Architect for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguities, inconsistencies, or errors therein which he may discover. The Architect will issue any interpretation or correction as an Addendum. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguities, inconsistencies, or errors are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor, materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. Failure to request clarification during the bid phase of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of their responsibilities. The signing of the contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of the full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. 1.04 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES A. Visit site prior to bid and verify that conditions are as indicated. Contractor shall include in his bid costs required to make his work meet existing conditions. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 2 BG 08/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION 1.09 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the progress of the work, maintain an accurate record of the installation of the electrical system. Upon completion of the electrical installation, transfer all record data to prints of the original drawings. Drawings shall include all addendum items, change orders, alternates, reroutings, etc. As a condition of acceptance of the project, deliver to the Architect one copy of the record drawings. 1.10 PROTECTION A. Of People: Arrange barriers, signs, etc. as required to minimize the hazard of people. Comply with applicable safety and health regulations. Coordinate as necessary with the Owner and the General Contractor. B. Of Work: Take all measures necessary to protect the work both before and after installation, to assure that it will be in clean, undamaged, unblemished condition when turned over to the Owner. Repair/replace work damaged during construction. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARD FOR MATERIALS A. All electrical material shall be new and of the quality and type specified. B. Manufacturer and catalog number shown in these specifications or on drawings are intended as a guide to quality. Equivalent materials and equipment of other manufacturers will be considered provided such substitutions are requested in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 2.03 and shall include all information necessary to support the claim of equivalency. C. No extension of completion date shall be allowed for time lost in consideration, shipping, or installation of approved substitutions. Review of substitutions signifies general equality of materials and equipment only. This review does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for proper operation of the system, compliance with specifications and necessary changes due to dimensional differences or space requirements. 2.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop drawings required for this project are as follows: 1. Service equipment 2. Panelboards 3. Wiring devices 4. Fire alarm and detection system 5. Motor starters BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 4 KEY PROJECT SlAFFkv- r&mj,�; tn 0 �u 0 . r o 0 LL BG 08/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION 2.04 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Bidder's Choice: Material or equipment listed by several manufacturers' names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed manufacturers may be used in the base bid. B. Performance Specifications: When any item is specified by requirements to meet a performance, industry or regulating body standard, or is specified by a generic spec, (no manufacturer's name listed) no prior review by the Engineer is needed unless specifically called for in these specifications. C. Contractor to be responsible for any changes and costs to accommodate any equipment except the first named in the specification. D. Substitutions of Material (Contractor and owner initiated) Other items of material and equipment not listed as equivalents may be offered (at the Contractor's option) as substitutions to specified items by submitting it as a separate price with his base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such substitute proposals shall not be included under the base bid and must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be deducted for each item and all deviations from specified items. Highlight all difference from specified equipment. If any such substitutions are to be considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed substitution items within 14 days of award of contract. Late requests for proposed substitutions shall not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concerns. If substitutions are rejected, Electrical Contractor shall supply base bid item as specified. 2.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to protect electrical system materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Upon completion of all installations, lamping and testing, thoroughly inspect all exposed portions of the electrical installation and completely remove all exposed labels, soil, markings, and foreign materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION A. Contractor's personnel and subcontractors selected to perform the work shall be well versed and skilled in the trades involved. B. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 6 BG 08/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION 3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide all cutting, trenching, backfrlling, patching and refinishing or resurfacing required for electrical work in a manner meeting the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All openings made in fire -rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a manner to conform to the fire rating for the surface penetrated. 3.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Arrange and be held responsible for delivery and safe storage of materials and equipment for electrical installation. B. Carefully check materials furnished to this Contractor for installation, and provide receipt acknowledging acceptance of delivery and condition of the materials received. Thereafter, assume full responsibility for its safekeeping until the final installation has been reviewed and accepted. 3.06 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. B. Close all conduit openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. C. Any equipment or conduit systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above "MILL" or "SHOP" conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction. 3.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are received and Owner's personnel have been thoroughly indoctrinated in the maintenance and operation of all equipment. B. Operating manual, parts lists, and indoctrination of operating and maintenance personnel: Furnish the services of a qualified representative of the supplier for each item or system itemized below who shall instruct specific personnel, as designated by the Owner, in the operation and maintenance of that item or system. C. Instruction shall be made when the particular system is complete and shall be of the number of hours indicated and at the time requested by the Owner. A representative of the Electrical Contractor shall be present for all demonstrations. SYSTEM I HRS. OF INSTRUCTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 8 BG 08/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION 2. On each separate mounted disconnect and starter for a motor or fixed appliance, indicate motor or appliance designation, voltage, and phase. (Motor or appliance designations shall be as given on the Mechanical or Architectural plans.) Use three -sixteenth inch (3/16") minimum height letters. 3. On all branch circuit panelboards indicate panel designation, voltage and phase. Use three -fourths inch (3/4") minimum height stenciled letters in metal tape or one-half inch (1/2") engraved letters on laminated nameplate. Apply to the inside of each door. 4. For all branch circuit panelboard directories, provide neatly typed, removable cards and protective plastic faces. Spare circuit breakers shall be identified as such. 5. For all device plates for switches used to control exhaust fans or other equipment, provide one -eighth inch (1/8") minimum height black filled, engraved letters on stainless steel device plates. 6. For all receptacle device plates, provide one -eighth inch (1/8") minimum height letters on white (normal power) and red (emergency power) nameplates indicating panel and circuit number. 7. For all exposed conduits, junction boxes, wiring gutters, etc., provide three -fourths inch (3/4") minimum height stenciled letters, or one-half inch (1/2") minimum height pressure sensitive labels equal to Brady self -sticking vinyl cloth. Labels shall be provided at the following locations: a. Entering or leaving panels or switchgear or enclosures. b. All junction boxes shall be identified as to circuits contained within. C. Exposed conduits containing circuits above 600 volts shall have voltage labeled at least once for each exposed length or not more than fifteen feet (15'-0") apart. 8. Provide caution signs reading "Danger High Voltage" having two-inch (2") minimum height letters and affix them to all switchgear, unit substations, transformers, pull boxes, and other equipment associated with systems rated 600 volts or higher. Provide a warning sign at all rooms, enclosures and vaults housing equipment rated above 600 volts in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 9. Underground Utility Identification: Provide a six-inch (6") wide, yellow colored plastic tape. Install the tape for the continuous length of all underground primary raceways provided under this contract. Tape shall be buried not less than twelve inches (12") below finished grade. Tape shall be Brady "Identoline" or acceptable and imprinted in large, legible, black letters "Caution — Electrical Utilities Below". 3.09 CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING AND POWER A. Provide all temporary facilities required to supply construction power and light. Install and maintain facilities in a manner that will protect the public and workmen. Comply with all applicable laws and regulations. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 10 BG 08/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. 2. Coordination outages with Architect/Owner. 3. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. 4. Fire protection, fire alarm, and detection systems shall be maintained and capable of proper operation during construction. The local Fire Marshall shall be notified before construction starts, when scheduled interruptions are expected and after construction is complete. Protect and support life safety systems routed through areas of demolition. C. Demolition and Extension of Existing Electrical Work Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Division 1, Division 2, and this section. 2. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. 3. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. 4. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. 5. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets, which are not removed. 6. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. 7. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. 8. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. 9. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. 10. Maintain access to existing electrical installations, which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. 11. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installation, or as specified in individual section. D. Cleaning and Repair Clean and repair existing materials and equipment, which remain or are to be reused. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 12 BG 08/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION SECTION 16100--BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Used) PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: 1. Conduits installed underground or in grade slabs shall be Schedule 40 PVC with ground wire. 2. Conduits subject to mechanical damage or where otherwise required by code shall be galvanized rigid heavy wall conduit; all other conduit may be electric metallic tubing. 3. Flexible metallic conduit shall be used where vibration or other reasons do not allow solid connections to motors, equipment, etc. Flex may also be used to fish in existing walls or where required to connection in millwork. The use of flex shall be held to a minimum. Where flexible metallic conduit is used in areas subject to moisture, PVC - coated flex (Liquidtight) shall be used. 4. Where approved by applicable codes, type "MC" metal clad cable may be used for feeders and branch circuits. B. Fittings: Use solvent welded fittings for all PVC conduit. 2. Use set -screw or compression fittings for all EMT conduit. Use threaded fittings for all rigid conduit. 2.02 WIRE AND CABLE A. Voltage range 0 to 24: High conductivity copper, thenno-plastic insulation, 300 volt rating. B. Voltage range 24 to 600: High conductivity copper, moisture -resistant thermo-plastic insulation, 600 volt 75°C rating for general use. For HID fixtures and wiring within 3 inches of fluorescent ballasts, wire shall be copper, minimum 90°C rated. Sizes indicated are for installation in a maximum 30°C ambient. Conductor ampacity shall be derated for higher ambient installations. C. Conductors used specifically for equipment or service ground may be bare or have insulation to match circuit/feeder conductors. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 14 BG 08/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION Small room sensor — Passive infrared type, minimum coverage of 500 square feet. WS CI-300-1. G. Wall plates shall be steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field painting material for finished spaces. Galvanized steel for unfinished spaces. Cast aluminum with spring -loaded lift cover and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations" in damp spaces. H. Wet locations weatherproof cover plates shall be NEMA250, complying with type 3R weather resistant in -use rating die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. 2.07 DISCONNECTS A. Safety switches shall be heavy-duty, quick -make, quick -break with cover interlock, fusible or non -fusible, and grounding lugs in enclosure to suit locations and requirements. G.E., Siemens, Square D, Cutler -Hammer. 2.08 FUSES A. Time delay, rejection type, high capacity or current limiting as shown on the drawings. Manufacturers shall be Bussmann, Littelfuse or Gould Shawmut. B. Provide one (1) set of three (3) spare fuses for each size and type provided on this project. Provide fuses in a sheet metal storage cabinet with a hinged door equipped with clips or cubicles, each marked with the size and type fuse stored therein. Provide nameplate "Spare Fuses". Install in locations as directed by Owner. 2.09 STARTERS A. Single phase manual starters shall be "quick make -quick break" toggle switch. Single or double pole with a thermal overload heater element capable of interrupting the circuit in case of overload. B. Magnetic controllers shall be full voltage, non -reversing, across the line starters, with ambient compensated inverse time -current characteristic and NEMA ICS2, Class 2 tripping characteristic. C. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory -assembled combination controller and heavy duty disconnect switch with rejection type fuse clips as sized on drawings. D. Provide two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary contacts for each single speed motor and for each speed of multi -speed motors. E. Enclosure shall be NEMA 250, Type 1 for dry indoor locations, NEMA 250, Type 3R for outdoor, NEMA 250, Type 4 for damp/wet locations, and NEMA 250, Type4x for kitchens. Provide door mounted LED indicators for the following conditions: [Power On] BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 16 BG 08/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION H. Seal all conduit penetrations of fire rated walls, floor, or ceilings with U.L. listed "Dow Corning" #2000 or #2001 fire stop sealant or equivalent. All empty raceway systems shall have a polypropylene pullwire or equal, and shall be identified at all junction, pull and termination points using permanent metallic tags. Tag shall indicate intended use of conduit, origination, and termination points of each individual conduit. Non-metallic and flexible metal conduits shall have a code -sized copper grounding conductor. Increase conduit size as required. 3.02 WIRE INSTALLATION A. Branch circuit conductors shall be as follows: 1. For general applications through size #8: THWN 75°C wire and full size ground, or type THHN 90°C. 2. Branch circuit conductors through size #10 to be solid, #8 and larger stranded. 3. Unless indicated on the drawings, (the minimum) wire used for branch circuits shall be #12 THWN protected by 20 ampere circuit breakers. 4. Branch circuits for receptacles shall be on 20 amp, single pole circuit breakers with #12 conductors. 3.03 WIRING DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Review architectural and mechanical drawings before installing outlets. Changing of outlets to conform to these drawings and any other slight change in mounting height or location of outlets required shall be considered as a part of this contract. Use outlet boxes of sufficient size and shape to best suit the particular location and to contain the enclosed wire and connections without crowding. Size all boxes per N.E.C. Article 370. B. Switch and receptacle outlet boxes shall be standard boxes with cover plates. Where more than one switch or device is located at one point, use gang boxes and gang cover plates. C. Receptacles in wet locations shall be installed with a hinged outlet cover/enclosure marked "suitable for wet locations while in use" and "UL listed". There must be a gasket between the enclosure and the mounting surface, and between and hinged cover and mounting plate/base to assure proper seal. Taymac; specification grade or equivalent. 3.04 MOTORS, MOTOR STARTERS, SAFETY DISCONNECTS, MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLS INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. This list does not attempt to include all components. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. (MD is Mechanical Division--ED is Electrical Division). I ITEM I FURNISHED I SET IN PLACE I WIRED & BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 18 BG 08/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION B. Bolt -free standing equipment to 4" high concrete housekeeping pads. 3.06 EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS AND/OR OWNER A. Verify exact location and requirements of equipment to be furnished by others prior to rough -in. B. Contractor shall refer to water fountain drawings for exact locations and additional electrical requirements. Provide j-boxes, receptacles, connections, conduits wire, interlocks, controls, etc. as required by the water fountain drawings. C. See Division 15 drawings for location of mechanical equipment. Provide service to, and connect equipment as required. D. Inspect owner furnished equipment for damage, defects, missing components, etc. Report deficiencies to the Owner immediately. Do not install or connect deficient equipment. 3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Final connections to motors, transformers and other vibrating equipment shall be with seal tite flex and approved fittings. Do not secure conduits, disconnects, or devices to ductwork or mechanical equipment. B. Final connections to equipment shall be in accordance with manufacturer's approved wiring diagrams, details, and instructions. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide materials and equipment compatible with equipment actually supplied. C. Electrical Contractor shall provide controls, interlocks, accessories, etc. in motor control starters as required by the temperature control Contractor. Starters shall contain 120V control transformer, pilot light, and pushbuttons or selector switch as required, in addition to other items (auxiliary contacts, door switches, relays, etc.) required. Submit elementary control diagrams. END OF SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 20 BG 04/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION SECTION 16400--SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS A. The Contractor is responsible for all coordination with the utility company for this project to ensure the installation of electrical services shall be compatible with the utility company's requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT A. Electrical service entrance equipment shall be UL listed and labeled for service entrance equipment and shall have a interrupting rating of circuit breaker units equal to or greater than fault currents, which might be imposed on them. It shall further limit the available fault current to branch circuit panels to 10,000 amperes or less. 2.02 CT CANS A. CT cans shall be code gauge steel, primed and painted, size as required by utility. Enclosure to suit installation. As manufactured by Queen, Hoffman, or approved equivalent. 2.03 SWITCHBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Switchboards and panelboards shall be complete with: Main [and sub -main] [ fusible unit(s) or] [circuit breaker(s)] as shown on the drawings and be complete with pull or tap boxes, lug landing sections, cross bussing, etc. Branch circuit breakers shall be bolt on, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. C. Equipment shall conform to U.L. standard and service equipment shall be configured to conform to the serving utility requirements. D. Unit shall be enclosed in a NEMA rated housing suitable for location installed. E. Equipment shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Square D, Siemens or Cutler -Hammer equivalent. 2.04 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELS A. Bolt on circuit breaker type with hinged door, indoor circuit directory. Circuit breakers to meet the non -interchangeability requirements of the N.E.C. where applicable; all breakers 20 ampere SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 16400 - 1 BG 04/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION 3.04 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The Contractor shall provide a complete system of conduits, conductors, meter cans, CT cans, etc. required to provide secondary service entrance. B. Provide all trench and backfill required for installation of underground electrical service; see appropriate section, Division 1, or National Electrical Code for installation of underground services. 3.05 METERING A. Meter can to be provided by serving utility and installed by this Contractor. Meters to be installed by serving utility. 3.06 SERVICE GROUNDING A. Take necessary precautions to insure permanent and effective grounding of the service neutral and to insure continuity to ground through the conduit system to all raceways, panels, panelboards, lighting fixtures, switches, motors and other electrical enclosures, by the use of approved methods as defined in the National Electrical Code. Make all ground connections solderless. Securely bond the entire grounding system to cold water mains using rigid clamp jaw type fittings. If ground connection is made to cold water pipe line on building side of water meter, install jumpers by-passing meter. B. Where non-metallic piping is used for building service, tie reference ground only to metallic piping inside of building and provide a properly sized ground rod system for the primary ground system. Tie reference grounds for metallic piping to the primary ground system. END OF SECTION 16400 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 16400 - 3 5. KEY PROJECT STAFFING _906U **fffl 0 L11Pill 616 /_1:f 1 Dale is a great communicator who patiently seeks to understand every aspect of the project in order to support the entire project team. Dale is integral to the success of the project because he ensures project goals are clearly identified and communicated. He has extensive experience in the preconstruction and construction process on unique, complex projects. As the Principal -In -Charge, Dale provides oversight and leadership to Mortenson's Denver office. He confirms projects are properly staffed and that the expectations are clearly understood and fully met. His success as a leader is based on three decades of industry experience that includes several large, world -class projects.Trust, communication, and commitment to meeting your expectations are Dale's most valued attributes. RELEVANT EXPERIENCE Corporate/Office • Charles Schwab Lone Tree Colorado Campus, Lone Tree, CO I $240M • Byron G. Rogers Federal Office Building Modernization, Denver, CO $154M • 1800 Larimer Office Building, Denver, CO I $103M Federal • Fort Carson -13th CAB Barracks, Ft. Carson, CO I $94.8M • Fort Riley- Whole Barracks Renewal, Ft. Riley, KS I $51.2M • 62 Bomber Hanger, Whiteman AFB, MO $32M • Fort Carson - WT Barracks, Ft. Carson, CO $28.3M • Fort Riley - First Brigade Barracks, Ft. Riley, KS I $21.6M • Aircraft Maintenance Hanger, Whiteman AFB, MO I $19AM • Veterans Administration - Harry S. Truman Ambulatory Care Addition, Columbia, MO I $16.5M • Weapons Storage and Security Improvements, Whiteman AFB, MO $10AM Mortenmdd Building what's next. BG 04/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION B. Provide photocontrols, time clocks, contactors, relays, etc. to control interior and exterior fixtures. All items for lighting controls that are to be mounted outdoors or in wet locations shall be installed in weatherproof housings. C. Recessed light fixtures installed in gyp. board or plaster ceilings shall have plaster frames installed prior to ceiling material. D. Multi -ballasted fluorescent fixtures shall be dual switched unless noted otherwise. E. Fixtures recessed in "t-bar" ceiling shall be supported independently of ceiling system, with four #12 hanger wires up to structure. Secure hanger wires to corners of fixture. Clip fixture to grid on two sides with factory -furnished clips. Final connection to fixture shall be made with a flexible U.L. approved assembly. END OF SECTION 16500 BG 04/08 BGCE MASTER SPECIFICATION Shop drawings: Before any fire alarm system materials are delivered to the job site, submit complete shop drawings to the architect in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. a. Prior to submittal for architect's review, secure approval and stamp of acceptance of the Fire Marshall/District Having Jurisdiction. b. Upon request, the Architect with furnish without charge to the contractor one set of reproducible transparencies of those drawings included in the contractor documents which may be suitable for use in preparation of shop drawings. C. Shop drawings shall include: 1) Layout drawing of the complete fire alarm system indicating relationship of all other overhead items including ceiling air diffusers, lighting fixtures, and all other items. 2) Complete details and sections as required to clearly define and clarify the design, including a materials list describing all proposed materials by manufacturer's name and catalog number. 3) As -Built Drawings: During progress of the work, maintain an accurate record of all changes made in the fire sprinkler system installation from the layout and materials shown on the reviewed shop drawings. 4) Manual: Upon completion of this portion of the work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the architect a copy of a manual complied in accordance with the provisions of Sections 16010 and 16100 of these specifications; include a copy of the as -built drawings. END OF SECTION 16700 END OF DIVISION Clanton & Associates, Inc. February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) 2. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 4. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) A117.1-1961 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 6. Underwriter's Laboratory (UL) 7. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) 8. International Code Council ICC 9. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 10. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 11. Laws, codes and regulations of Federal, State, County, City and District authorities having jurisdiction over this work. 1.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials and apparatus required for the Work, except as specified otherwise, shall be new, and shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail, and shall be so selected and arranged as to fit properly into the spaces. B. All component parts of each item of equipment or device shall bear the Manufacturer's nameplate, giving at least the name of the manufacturer, description, size, type, serial number, and electrical characteristics in order to facilitate maintenance or replacement. This nameplate shall not be visible during normal operation of the equipment. C. Blemished, damaged, or unsatisfactory luminaires shall be replaced in a satisfactory manner at no additional cost to the project. 1.4 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Definitions: Instructions in Specifications or on Contract Drawings such as "Provide." shall mean the CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install items, equipment, wiring, etc., complete with all details. B. Drawings and Specifications: Lighting Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general design, layout, and arrangement of equipment and various systems. Install all lighting equipment per NEC requirements and manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Take all dimensions and measurements from Architect's plans and/or the actual equipment to be furnished. All dimensions and measurements must be verified in the field since actual locations, distances, and elevations will be governed by actual field conditions. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all measurements taken in the field. 3. Study and review all Contract Documents. Should conflicts arise which require changes in the Contract Documents, notify the ARCHITECT and LIGHTING DESIGNER prior to installation. If installation has already occurred, notify the ARCHITECT and LIGHTING DESIGNER immediately upon discovery of the discrepancy. EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS FOR PUBLIC SPACES 26 56 01 -2 Copyright 2015 Clanton & Associates, Inc. Clanton & Associates, Inc. February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins. CO C. Alternate Luminaires Voluntary or unsolicited substitutions of specified luminaires, lamps or devices will not be considered without written prior approval from the LIGHTING DESIGNER. PRE -BID: Substitutions or alternates for consideration must be received by the LIGHTING DESIGNER for review no less than fourteen (14) days prior to Bid Submission. If no alternates or substitutions are received, the CONTRACTOR will bid only the specified equipment. The time required for the LIGHTING DESIGNER to conduct the review of all alternates will be charged and invoiced separately to the CONTRACTOR at the Senior Designer hourly rate. AWARD: After the Bid Award, luminaire samples of proposed substitutions or alternates to specified equipment must be submitted for review and approval by the LIGHITNG DESIGNER no later than thirty (30) days after Project Award or at such time which will not incur additional costs or delay the project schedule. The time required for the LIGHTING DESIGNER to conduct the review of all alternates will be charged and invoiced separately to the CONTRACTOR at the Senior Designer hourly rate. Submittal of a Bid for this project shall include a written acknowledgment and acceptance of these terms from the CONTRACTOR. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall be required to submit a sample of any luminaires which are to be proposed as alternates or substitutes for specified equipment. Unless otherwise indicated, samples shall be as follows: a. For standard catalog types — A complete, production line sample, with all necessary installation hardware, proper lamp(s), and must be equipped with a cord and plug (6min. length). b. For custom or special luminaires - A sample of a project -specific, custom designed or developed luminaire shall be submitted for the purpose of ascertaining its photometric performance, quality of fabrication, visible parts and details, maintenance features (including relamping process), method of installation, and safety features. D. Alternate Luminaires CONTRACTOR shall provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all luminaires, light standards, lamps and ballasts. Manuals shall include: E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals CONTRACTOR shall provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all luminaires, light standards, lamps and ballasts. Manuals shall include: Product cutsheets for luminaires, light standards, lamps and ballasts. Luminaire manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions. C. Luminaire shop drawings for modified or custom luminaires. EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS FOR PUBLIC SPACES 26 56 01 - 4 Copyright 2015 Clanton & Associates. Inc. Clanton & Associates, Inc. February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO K. In adjustable luminaires, aiming and positive locking devices shall be provided. L. All luminaires when installed shall be set within 0.25 degrees of plumb and free of warps, dents, or other irregularities. The finish of exposed parts or trims shall be as specified in the Luminaire Schedule. M. All lamp holders shall be of high quality and shall securely hold lamps preventing vibration. N. Rivets, springs, and other hardware shall not be visible after installation. O. All necessary modifications shall be made to insure compatibility of luminaires with the lamps specified. P. All necessary modifications shall be made to insure compatibility of ballasts with the lamps specified. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Luminaire Schedule in Electrical Plan Sheets of the Contract Drawings for acceptable manufacturers of individual luminaires. B. Photocontrols: Tork, Intermatic 2.3 LIGHT STANDARDS A. A light standard shall consist of a metal pole, base plate, base plate template, base cover, nut covers, hand holes, hand hole covers, GFCI receptacle(s) with in -use cover, and mast arm. B. All structural components of light standards, bases, couplers, anchor bolts, luminaires, and other attachments to be used for lighting shall be designed for a minimum of 100 MPH sustained wind velocity with gusts up to 130%, in accordance with AASHTO LTS-4. C. All standards shall have cable -entrance holes and hand holes. Metal surfaces shall be free of any imperfections marring the appearance and of any burrs or sharp edges that might damage the cable. D. Light standard assemblies, including hand hole and hand hole cover, shall be rated for 2500 hour salt spray test endurance. E. After erection and alignment of the light standard, the space between the foundation and the base plate shall be filled with non -shrink grout. F. Light standard assemblies shall be fabricated and placed in accordance with the details and dimensions shown on the Drawings. The careful erection and aligning of the components furnished shall be considered a most essential feature of the installation and shall be within 0.25 degrees from plumb. G. Where dissimilar metals are used in the materials of the light standard, CONTRACTOR shall ensure protection against galvanic corrosion. H. All miscellaneous bolts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. All nuts, bolts, and washers supplied which are not galvanized shall have chemical properties of ASTM A 325, Type EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS FOR PUBLIC SPACES 26 56 01 - 6 Copyright 2015 Clanton & Associates, Inc. Clanton & Associates, Inc. February 6, 2015 90% Construction Documents 1. Osram/Sylvania 2. General Electric 3. North American Philips 4. Luxeon 5. Cree 6. Nichia C. Equipment and Materials Metal Halide Lamps a. All discharge tubes shall be ceramic type. b. Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be 80 or higher. C. Lamps shall have universal operating position. 2. Light Emitting Diode Lamps (LED) Old Town Square Renovation Fort Collins, CO a. All LED lamps shall emit white light and have a Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) 3500' Kelvin +/- 2500 Kelvin. b. All LED lamps shall have a minimum Color Rendering Index (CRI) of 70. C. LEDs shall have a minimum L70 rated life of 50,000 hours measured in accordance with IES LM-80-08. Testing procedures and results shall be submitted to the PROJECT ENGINEER. d. Heat shall be conducted away from the LED circuit board, electronic power supply, and all other electronic components for correct operation under ambient air temperatures up to 120 degrees Fahrenheit plus the heat generated under direct sunlight. e. LED junction temperature shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations. f. LEDs shall be matched by a quality assurance binning process to satisfy the CCT, and CRI requirements as described herein. A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. HID Ballasts: Advance, Aromat, Universal, Hatch. 2. LED Drivers: Advance, Osram/Sylvania, Magtech B. Equipment and Materials HID Ballasts a. Provide magnetic regulator ballast or constant wattage autotransformer HID lamp ballasts, of ratings, types and makes as recommended by lamp manufacturer, which properly mate and match lamps to electrical supply by providing appropriate voltages and impedances for which lamps are designed. b. All HID ballasts shall have a minimum starting temperature of minus 20 degrees Fahrenheit. c. Ballasts shall operate at a minimum of 90 percent average power factor. Operation shall be suitable with a line voltage variation of +10%. d. HID fixtures shall operate at 120V, 277V or 480V, as required on Contract EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS FOR PUBLIC SPACES 26 56 01 - 8 Copyright 2015 Clanton & Associates, Inc. Clanton & Associates, Inc. February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO F Provide flexible inner -duct for lower voltage wires to maintain voltage separation within light standards where different voltage wires are required for additional electrical equipment mounted to light standards. G Provide labor and materials for final focusing of all adjustable luminaires under the PROJECT ENGINEER's supervision. Aim adjustable luminaires in night test of system. Focusing shall take place before Project is turned over to the OWNER. H Clean the housing, trim, reflector surfaces, lens of all luminaires after construction is complete, so as to render them free of any dirt, dust, oil, and grease. I Use belt slings or non -chafing ropes to raise and set pre -finished luminaire poles. J Provide ground rod(s) at each pole with grounding conductors. All ground rod systems shall have an electrical resistance of 10 Ohms or less. K Bond light fixtures and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor No. 6 AWG copper minimum. L Any Iuminaire, standard, foundation, or other lighting/electrical equipment damaged during construction shall be replaced or satisfactorily repaired. M Replace all burned out lamps, or inoperative lamps and/or inoperative ballasts and transformers in all luminaires just prior to acceptance of Project by OWNER. Ascertain and make sure that all lamps installed are exactly as specified for each Iuminaire type. N Notify PROJECT ENGINEER about field conditions at variance with Contract Documents. This includes but is not inclusive of changes in landscape type and location, and field verification of towers, trees, walls, boundary markers, signs, walkways, and other changes that affect location of equipment. 0 It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to replace and restore all surface materials in kind, equal to, or exceeding those disturbed by trenching, excavation or backfilling operations. This includes but is not limited to: seeding, sod, replacement of sub -base, pavement, trees, shrubs. All excess materials shall be disposed of as directed by CONTRACTOR's Quality Department. 3.3 TESTS A All lighting circuits and equipment shall be given an initial operational test, consisting of having the entire system energized for seventy-two (72) consecutive hours without any failures of any type occurring anywhere in the system. All circuits shall test clear of faults, grounds and open circuits to the satisfaction of the CONTRACTOR's Quality Department. B The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that the lighting control system, including photocells, time switches, and lighting contactors, are fully operational and comply with the Sequence of Operations. C After satisfactory completion of all tests required in these Specifications and by the CONTRACTOR's Quality Department, the lighting system shall be placed in operation. Final acceptance will not be made until the system has operated satisfactorily for a period of not less than fourteen (14) days. D The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for the system during this period of operation and he shall make any adjustment or repairs which may be required, and remedy any defects or damages which may occur at no additional cost to the project. EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS FOR PUBLIC SPACES 26 56 01 - 10 Copyright 2015 Clanton & Associates, Inc. JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 31 00 00 EARTHWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, and Division One and other related specification sections apply to work of this section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clearing, grubbing and site preparation B. Removal and disposal of debris C. Handling, storage, transportation, and disposal of excavated material D. Sheeting, shoring, bracing and protection work E. Pumping and dewatering as required or necessary F. Backfilling G. Pipe embedment H. Construction of fills and embankments I. Excavation for buildings & structures J. Pavement Subgrade preparation K. Trench Stabilization L. Final grading M. Slope Stabilization N. Erosion Control O. Appurtenant work 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 32 12 00 Flexible Paving B. Section 32 13 00 Rigid Paving EARTHWORK 00 00 00 - 1 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Protect adjacent structures and surrounding areas from damage during excavation, filling, and backfilling B. Protect work from erosion or other similar types of damage until the project has been accepted. Leave protection in place for building contractors use. C. Do not backfill or construct fills during freezing weather. Backfill or construct fills only when temperature is 35°F and rising D. Do not use frozen materials, snow, or ice in any backfill or fill area E. Do not backfill or construct fill on frozen surfaces F. Protect excavated material from becoming frozen G. Do not remove trees from outside excavation or fill areas unless authorized by the Owner; protect from permanent damage by construction activities H. Provide temporary bridges for roadways, walkways, driveways, etc. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All imported material to be free of hazardous and organic wastes, "clean" as defined by EPA, and approved for its intended use by the City of Fort Collins or project geotechnical engineer. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Soil materials, whether from sources on or off the site must be approved by the soils engineer as suitable for intended use and specifically for required location or purpose. B. Classification of Excavated Materials: 1. No classification applies. Remove and handle all excavated materials regardless of its type, character, composition, condition, or depth. This includes the sandstones and claystones encountered onsite which can be ripped from place using a Caterpillar Model 235 trackhoe or equivalent, rippers, chisels, breaker bars, and/or other hand or mechanical methods. 2. Excavation of rock that cannot be excavated as outlined above will be considered rock excavation and may require alternative means that may include drilling, blasting, or expansive compounds. 3. Transport and properly dispose of any rubble and waste materials found in excavation off the project site a. If transite or asbestos containing materials are found in excavation, notify the City of Fort Collins immediately and comply with special handling requirements. C. Fills and Embankments 1. To the maximum extent practical, use excess earth from onsite excavation for fills and embankments. 2. Free from rocks or stones larger than 12 inch in greatest dimension and free from brush, stumps, logs, roots, debris, and organic and other deleterious materials EARTHWORK 00 00 00 - 3 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 2. Product shall be a lean. sand -cement slurry, "flowable fill' or similar material with a 28-day unconfined compressive strength between 50 and 200 psi. Non -woven geotextile fabric 1. Needle -punched nonwoven geotextile composed of polypropylene fibers, which are formed into a stable network such that the fibers retain their relative position. Product must be inert to biological degradation and resists naturally encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids. Product must meet AASHTO M288-06 Class 3 for elongation > 50%. a. Mirafi 140N or accepted substitution 2.02 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL ACCESSORIES A. Comply with all applicable municipal or local Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) requirements. B. Silt Fence Fabric: woven polypropylene 1. Mirafi 100X, "Envirofence" 2. Or accepted substitution PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Field verify the location of all underground utilities, pipelines and structures prior to excavation 3.02 PERFORMANCE; GENERAL A. Contractor to verify quantities of cuts and fills and perform all earthwork required to meet the grades as shown on the plans, including but not limited to, additional import or export required to handle compaction, building and pavement subgrade preparation, and pipe bedding. B. Perform work in a safe and proper manner with appropriate precautions against hazard C. Provide adequate working space and clearances for work performed within excavations and for installation and removal of utilities D. Contain all construction activity on the designated site and within the limits of work. Cost of restoration off site will be the responsibility of the Contractor 3.03 PRESERVATION OF TREES A. Do not remove trees outside fill or excavated areas, except as authorized by Engineer B. Protect trees and their roots within the drip line that are to remain from permanent damage by construction operation C. Trim standing trees in conflict with construction operations as directed by City of Fort Collins and Landscape Architect. EARTHWORK 00 00 00 - 5 2014 JVA 5. KEY PROJECT STAFFING PROFESSIONAL SUMMARY Joe will responsible for leading the preconstruction process.The preconstruction manager has ultimate responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the estimates produced for their projects and works closely with the construction executive to provide continuous service to project owners and design teams. RELEVANT EXPERIENCE Civil/Infrastructure • Stapleton Redevelopment, Denver, CO, $575M • Solterra Subdivision, Jefferson County, CO, $25M* • Garfield County Airport Reconstruction, Rifle, CO, $20M* • Riverpoint Commercial Development, Sheridan, CO, $12M* • Takoda Farms Subdivision, Louisville, CO, $9.5M* • Meeker Airport, Meeker, CO, $8.3M* • Copperleaf Subdivision, Araphahoe County, CO, $8M* • Fallbrook Farms, Thornton, CO, $3.5M* • 40th Avenue, Lower, Denver, CO, $2M* • Cherry Creek Schools Sitework, Denver, CO, $1.51vl* • Spanish Peaks Sitework, Huerfano County, CO, $1.7M* • Bolling Drive Sitework, Denver, CO, $1.3M* • VA Hospital Foundations, Aurora, CO, $1.2M* • Midtown Subdivision, Brookfield Development* • Fallbrook Farms Subdivision • Worsham Farm Filing No.2* * Project completed prior to joining Mortenson MortennwM Building what's next. JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO E. Cross braces installed above the pipe to support sheeting may be removed after pipe embedment is completed F. Contractor responsible for obtaining all required permits or easements for encroachments into the public right-of-way and for coordinating any encroachments onto adjacent properties. 3.07 TRENCH STABILIZATION A. Thoroughly compact and consolidate subgrades for concrete structures, precast structures, and utility trench bottoms so they remain firm, dense and intact during required construction activities B. Remove all mud and muck during excavation C. Reinforce subgrades with crushed rock or gravel if they become mucky during construction activities D. Finished elevation of stabilized subgrades are to be at or below subgrade elevations indicated on drawings E. Allow no more than'/z inch depth of mud or muck to remain on trench bottoms when pipe bedding material is placed thereon 3.08 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot B. Remove existing unsuitable/uncompacted fill, old foundations, rubble/debris, soft or otherwise unsuitable material, and replace with suitable material in excavation C. Provide dewatering and temporary drainage as required to keep excavations dry. D. Reshape subgrade and wet as required 3.09 PAVEMENT OVEREXCAVATION AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Excavate subgrade for asphalt pavement areas per the lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on drawings within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot. Excavate subgrade for concrete pavement areas per the lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on drawings within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.05 foot. B. Overexcavate and scarify existing soil as required under pavement areas, slabs, curbs and walks to meet the moisture and compaction specifications herein to 12" minimum depth. C. Extend subgrade preparation a minimum of 1 foot beyond back of proposed pavement, slabs, curbs and walks. D. Proof roll with a pneumatic tire equipment with a minimum axle load of 18 kips per axle a maximum of 24 hours prior to paving to locate any soft spots that exhibit instability and deflection beyond subgrade tolerances listed above. Areas that are observed to have soft spots in the subgrade, where deflection is not uniform or is excessive as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer, shall be ripped, scarified, dried or wetted as necessary and recompacted to the requirements for density and moisture at the Contractor's expense. After recompaction, these areas shall be proof rolled again and all failures again corrected at the Contractor's expense. EARTHWORK 00 00 00 - 7 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1. Do not deposit or compact tamped or otherwise mechanically compacted backfill if frozen or if in water. 2. Take particular care to compact backfill which will be beneath slabs, pipes, drives, roads, parking areas, curb, gutters, or other surface construction. 3.12 BORROW OR SPOIL AREA A. Obtain suitable material required to complete fill and embankments from excavation, on -site areas. B. The location, size, shape, depth, drainage, and surfacing of borrow or spoil pits shall be acceptable to Owner. C. Make all areas regular in shape with graded and surfaced side and bottom slopes when completed D. Cut side slopes not steeper than 1:1 and uniform for the entire length of any one side E. Final grade disturbed areas of borrow to uniform slope (maximum slope = 4:1, minimum slope = 50:1). F. Use material free of debris and deleterious material G. Provide erosion and sediment control measures for borrow or spoil areas as required by municipal or local Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) requirements. 3.13 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Use excess excavated materials in fills and embankments as indicated on the drawings to the extent needed. Coordinate with Owner and Engineer on locations for excess material placement. B. The Contractor is responsible for disposing of excess excavated materials from the site to a location approved by the Owner or Engineer and permitted with the local authorities. C. Remove debris, junk, broken concrete, broken asphalt, rock, stones, stumps, logs, roots, and other unsuitable material from the site and dispose of it 3.14 BLASTING A. Blasting or other use of explosives is not permitted without City of Fort Collins approval. 3.15 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Establish alignment and grade or elevation from offset stakes provided by the contractor's surveyor. B. Excavate trenches so pipes can be laid straight at uniform grade without dips or bumps, between the terminal elevations indicated on the drawings C. Comply with pipe specification sections regarding vertical and horizontal alignment and max joint deflection EARTHWORK 00 00 00 - 9 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO N. Do not allow any part of bells or couplings to contact the trench bottom, walls, or granular embedment when pipe is joined O. Cuts in existing surface construction 1. No larger than necessary to provide adequate working space 2. Cut a clean groove not less than 1112 inch deep along each side of trench or around perimeter of excavation area 3. Remove pavement and base pavement to provide shoulder not less than 6 feet wide between cut edge and top edge of trench 4. Make pavement cuts to and between straight or accurately marked curved lines parallel to trench centerline or limits of excavation 5. Remove pavement for connections to existing lines or structures only to the extent required for the installation 6. Replace the pavements between saw cuts to match original surface construction 3.16 PIPE EMBEDMENT A. Embed pipes above and below the bottom of pipe as indicated in the drawings and as specified herein B. Spread and surface grade granular embedment to provide continuous and uniform support beneath pipe at all points between pipe joints C. After grading, aligning, and placing pipe in final position, and shoring home, deposit and compact sufficient embedment under and around each side of the pipe and to hold the pipe in proper position and alignment during subsequent operations D. Place and compact embedment material uniformly and simultaneously on both sides of pipe to prevent lateral displacement E. Granular embedment compact by slicing with shovel or vibrating 1. Maximum uncompacted thickness of layers: 6 inch F. Compacted embedment: Place in horizontal layers at maximum uncompacted depth per compaction specifications herein. Thoroughly compact each layer to meet the moisture and compaction specifications herein. 3.17 TRENCH BACKFILL A. Compacted backfill needed for all trench excavations B. Where the trench for one pipe passes beneath the trench of another pipe, compact the backfill for the lower trench to the bottom of the upper trench C. Place job excavated materials in 8 inch max uncompacted thickness, uniform layers 1. Increased layer thickness may be permitted for uncohesive material if Contractor demonstrates to Engineer's satisfaction that specified compacted density will be achieved 2. Thoroughly compact each layer to meet the moisture and compaction specifications herein. D. Use methods and equipment appropriate to the material to be compacted to prevent transmission of damaging shocks to pipe E. Graded gravel EARTHWORK 00 00 00 - 11 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO C. Grade all surfaces for effective drainage, provide a 2 percent minimum slope except as otherwise shown on the plans D. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades E. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances F. Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and prevent ponds from forming where not intended. G. Finish subgrades at lawns and unpaved areas to required elevations within a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch. H. Coordinate final subgrade depth with finish landscape treatment. 3.21 SETTLEMENT A. Warranty for settlement of all fills, embankments, and backfills is stipulated in the General Conditions from final completion of Contract under which Work is performed B. Repair or replace within 30 days after notice by Engineer or Owner 3.22 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide under provisions of General Conditions and Division One Specifications B. Coordinate testing with Owner. Owner will provide all field testing to determine compliance of in - place and backfill materials and compaction in accordance with the specifications, and to verify design bearing capacities. C. Fills and Embankment Testing 1. Two moisture -density relationship tests, ASTM D698, on each type of fill material 2. One in -place compaction test for each 5,000 square feet every 1.5 feet of vertical lift of material placed 3. Additional in -place compaction tests at the discretion of the Owner D. Pipe Embedment and Backfill Testing 1. Two moisture -density relationship tests, ASTM D698, or two relative density tests, ASTM D4253/D4254, as appropriate for each type of embedment on backfill material proposed, except granular embedment material 2. One in -place compaction test every 200 lineal feet of trench in the compacted embedment zone and at every 1.5 feet of vertical lift of backfill materials, ASTM D2922/D3017 3. One in -place compaction test near top of trench for trench depth of 2 feet or less, ASTM D2922/D3017 4. Additional in -place compaction tests at the discretion of the Owner E. Pavement and Structural Subgrade Testing 1. At a minimum, two moisture -density relationship tests, ASTM D698, or two relative density tests, ASTM D4253/D4254, as appropriate and adequate for each type backfill material proposed. EARTHWORK 00 00 00 - 13 2014 JVA studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 32 02 90 — Tree Protection PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Contractor to also be familiar with and review the City of Fort Collins Tree Management Standards and BMP's. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Protection and trimming of existing trees that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction. B. RELATED SECTIONS 1. Section 329300 - Exterior Plants: Tree and shrub planting, tree support systems, and soil materials. 2. If alternates, allowances, or unit prices apply to Work of this Section, insert brief paragraphs here to alert Contractor and reference appropriate Division 1 Sections for specific details. Ii99M9l:1y1►11V*]kq. A. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to remain during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule from arborist detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction. C. Qualification Data: For tree service firm and arborist. D. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged. E. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed tree protection and trimming work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of tree protection and trimming. B. Arborist Qualifications: An arborist certified by ISA or licensed in the jurisdiction where Project is located. C. Tree Pruning Standard: Comply with ANSI A300 (Part 1), "Tree, Shrub, and Other Woody Plant Maintenance --Standard Practices (Pruning)." D. Before tree protection and trimming operations begin, meet with representatives of authorities having jurisdiction, Owner, Landscape Architect, consultants, and other concerned entities to review tree protection and trimming procedures and responsibilities. PART 2-PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS Tree Protection 32 02 90- 1 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 3.3 REGRADING A. Grade Lowering: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond tree protection zones. Maintain existing grades within tree protection zones. B. Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed during grade lowering. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. C. Minor Fill: Where existing grade is 6 inches or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single un-compacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations. D. Moderate Fill: Where existing grade is more than 6 inches but less than 12 inches below elevation of finish grade, place drainage fill, filter fabric, and topsoil on existing grade as follows: E. Carefully place drainage fill against tree trunk approximately 2 inches above elevation of finish grade and extend not less than 18 inches from tree trunk on all sides. For balance of area within drip -line perimeter, place drainage fill up to 6 inches below elevation of grade. F. Place filter fabric with edges overlapping 6 inches minimum. G. Place fill layer of topsoil to finish grade. Do not compact drainage fill or topsoil. Hand grade to required finish elevations. 3.4 TREE PRUNING A. Prune trees to remain that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. B. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist. C. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1). D. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. 3.5 TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions. B. Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that die or are damaged during construction operations that arborist determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. C. Provide new trees of 6-inch caliper size and of a species selected by Landscape Architect when damaged trees more than 6 inches in caliper size, measured 12 inches above grade, are required to be replaced. Plant and maintain new trees as specified in Division 2 Section "Exterior Plants." D. Aerate surface soil, compacted during construction, 10 feet beyond drip line and no closer than 36 inches to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch-diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches deep at 24 inches o.c. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augered soil and sand. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Burning is not permitted. B. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material and displaced trees from Owner's property. END OF SECTION Tree Protection 32 02 90- 3 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO R. ASTM D290: Bituminous Mixing Plant Inspection S. ASTM D946: Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction T. ASTM D692: Course Aggregate for Bituminous Paving U. ASTM D1073: Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures V. ASTM 1241: Materials for Soil -Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses W. ASTM D2026: Cutback Asphalt (Slow -Curing Type) X. ASTM D2027: Cutback Asphalt (Medium -Curing Type) Y. ASTM D2028: Cutback Asphalt (Rapid -Curing Type) Z. MS-2: Mix Design Method for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot Mix Types -The Asphaltic Institute (AI) AA. CABO/ANSI A117.1 for accessibility requirements related to walks, ramps, parking areas, drives, curb ramps, etc. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One Specifications B. Samples: Provide samples of materials for laboratory testing and job -mix design for asphaltic concrete paving section. C. Record of Work: Maintain record of time and date of placement, temperature, and weather conditions, retain until completion and furnish copy to engineer. D. Test Reports: Submit laboratory reports for following materials tests 1. Coarse and fine aggregate from each material source and each required grading a. Sieve analysis: ASTM C136 (AASHTO T19) b. Unit weight of slag: ASTM C29 (AASHTO T19) c. Soundness: ASTM C88 (AASHTO T104) for surface course aggregates only d. Sand equivalent: ASTM D2419 (AASHTO T176) e. Abrasion of coarse aggregate: ASTM C131 (AASHTO T96), for surface course aggregates only 2. Asphalt cement for each penetration grade a. Penetration: ASTM D5 (AASHTO T49) b. Viscosity (Kinematic): ASTM D2170 (AASHTO T201) c. Flash Point: ASTM D93 (AASHTO T48) d. Ductility: ASTM D113 (AASHTO T51) e. Solubility: ASTM D4 (AASHTO T44) f. Specific gravity: ASTM D70 (AASHTO T43) 3. Job -mix design mixtures for each material or grade a. Bulk specific gravity for fine aggregate: ASTM C128 (AASHTO T84) 4. Uncompacted asphalt concrete mix: Maximum specific gravity ASTM D2041 (AASHTO T209) 5. Compacted asphalt concrete mix a. Bulk density: ASTM D1188 (AASHTO T166) b. Marshall stability and flow: ASTM D1559 FLEXIBLE PAVING 00 00 00 - 2 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO B. Asphaltic Cement: ASTM D946, AASHTO M226, AC10 or AC20 grade determined by design mix, homogeneous, free from water, no tendency to foam when heated to 347 degrees F, and per CDOT Standard Section 702. C. Aggregate for Asphaltic Concrete, General 1. Sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag: ASTM D692 2. Sand, stone, or slag screening: ASTM D1073 3. Percent wear: ASTM C131, less than 45 for aggregates retained in #10 sieve D. Base Course Aggregates for Asphaltic Concrete 1. Uncrushed gravel may be used in mixture if it meets design criteria specified 2. Provide uniform quality combined aggregates with a minimum sand equivalent value of 40 3. Provide aggregate in gradations for courses to comply with Class S and SG, Colorado Department of Transportation, ASTM C136 4. A maximum of 20% Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) will be allowed in (non -polymer or non -rubberized) mixes, provided that all the requirements for hot bituminous pavement are met. E. Surface Course Aggregates for Asphaltic Concrete 1. Provide natural sand, unless sand prepared from stone, slag, or gravel or combinations are required to suit local conditions 2. Provide uniform quality combined aggregate with a minimum sand equivalent value of 50 3. Provide aggregate in gradations for courses to comply with Class SX, Colorado Department of Transportation, ASTM C136. F. Weed Control: First application, "Roundup." Second application, Casoron "W-50" or "G-10" with colored marker dye, manufactured by Pacific Coast Borax Company or an accepted substitute of non-flammable type. 2.02 MIXES/SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Determine full depth design mix based upon aggregates furnished 1. Test mix by independent laboratory at Contractor's expense 2. Grade dependent on temperature during placement 3. Submit mix designs under provisions of Section Division One specifications for review and acceptance by Engineer B. Submit mix design giving unit weight and to meet following requirements prior to placement of asphalt: Property — 50 Blow S Mix SX Mix Marshall Stability Ibs 1600 (min.) 500 (min.) Flow, 0.01' 8-18 8-20 Air Voids in Mix, % 3-5 3-5 VMA, % min. 14 15 Initial Gyrations 7-8 7-8 Design Gyrations 75-100 75-100 Hveem Stability 30 min 30 min Voids Filled w/ Asphalt 65-75 65-75 Establish a single percentage passing each sieve size, a single percent of asphalt and a mix temperature. Maintain job mixes within following percentages of design mix: Aggregates: #8 and larger t 8% #16 to #100 t 6% FLEXIBLE PAVING 00 00 00 - 4 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 3. Apply at rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gallons per square yard of surface 4. Apply tack coat by brush to contact surfaces of curbs, gutters, catch basins, and other structures projecting into or abutting asphaltic concrete pavement 5. Allow surfaces to dry until material is at condition of tackiness to receive pavement 6. Where asphaltic concrete will adhere to surface, tack coat may be eliminated by Engineer 3.03 RING/FRAME ADJUSTMENTS A. Set ring/frames of subsurface structures to final grade as a part of this work. B. Placing Ring/Frames 1. Surround ring/frames set to elevation with a ring of compacted asphalt concrete base prior to paving 2. Place asphalt concrete mixture up to 1-inch below top of ring/frame, slope to grade, and compact by hand tamping C. Adjust frames to proper position to meet paving D. If permanent covers are not in place, provide temporary covers over openings until completion of rolling operations E. Set ring/frames to grade, flush with surface of adjacent pavement 3.04 PREPARING THE MIXTURE A. Comply with ASTM D995 for material storage, control, and mixing and for plant equipment and operation B. Stockpile 1. Keep each component of the various sized combined aggregates in separate stockpiles 2. Maintain stockpiles so that separate aggregate sizes will not be intermixed and to prevent segregation C. Heating 1. Heat the asphalt cement at the mixing plant to viscosity at which it can be uniformly distributed throughout mixture 2. Use lowest possible temperature to suite temperature viscosity characteristics of asphalt 3. Do not exceed 350 degrees F D. Aggregate 1. Heat -dry aggregates to acceptable moisture content 2. Deliver to mixer at recommended temperature to suite penetration grade and viscosity characteristics of asphalt cement, ambient temperature, and workability of mixture 3. Accurately weigh or measure dry aggregates and weigh or meter asphalt cement to comply with job -mix formula requirements E. Mix aggregate and asphalt cement to achieve 90-95 percent coated particles for base mixtures and 85-90 percent coated particles for surface mixture, per ASTM D2489 3.05 EQUIPMENT A. Bituminous Pavers: Self-propelled, spreads without tearing surfaces, and controls pavement edges to true lines without use of stationary forms FLEXIBLE PAVING 00 00 00 - 6 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1. Spread, tamp, and finish mixing using hand tools in areas where machine spreading is not possible as acceptable to Engineer 2. Place mixture at a rate that will insure handling and compaction before mixture becomes cooler than acceptable working temperature Joints 1. Construct transverse joint at right angles to centerline when operations are suspended long enough for mixture to chill 2. Construct joints to have same texture, density, and smoothness as adjacent sections of asphalt concrete course 3. Clean contact surfaces free of sand, dirt, or other objectionable material and apply tack coat 4. Offset transverse joints in succeeding courses not less than 24 inches 5. Cut back edge of existing pavement or previously placed course to expose an even, vertical surface for full course thickness 6. Offset longitudinal joints in succeeding courses not less than 6 inches 7. When the edges of longitudinal joints are irregular, honeycombed or inadequately compacted, cut back unsatisfactory sections to expose an even, vertical surface for full course thickness 8. Wearing course constructed in even number of strips; place 1 longitudinal joint on centerline of road 9. Wearing course constructed in odd number of strips; place the centerline of 1 strip on centerline of road J. Gutter: Finish surface high adjacent to concrete gutter so when compacted surface is slightly higher than edge of curb and flashing 3.07 COMPACTING THE MIX A. Provide pneumatic and steel -wheel type rollers to obtain the required pavement density, surface texture and rideability B. Begin rolling operations when the mixture will bear weight of roller without excessive displacement C. Do not permit heavy equipment, including rollers to stand on finished surface before it has thoroughly cooled or set D. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers E. Start rolling longitudinally at extreme lower side of sections and proceed toward center of pavement. Roll to slightly different lengths on alternate roller runs F. Do not roll centers of sections first under any circumstances G. Breakdown Rolling 1. Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of transverse and longitudinal joints and outside edge 2. Operate rollers as close as possible to paver without causing pavement displacement 3. Check crown, grade, and smoothness after breakdown rolling 4. Repair displaced areas by loosening at once with lutes or rakes and filling, if required, with hot loose material before continuing rolling H. Second Rolling FLEXIBLE PAVING 00 00 00 - 8 2014 JVA 5. KEY PROJECT STAFFING Justin's responsibilities include monitoring and updating schedules, cost request, administration of shop drawings and submittals, preparation of record documents, material expediting and responding to contractor change order reports. His other duties include on -site construction engineering activities and quality control, conducting internal/external audits to ensure quality control requirements are met specific to infrastructure and landscape construction. Stapleton Redevelopment, Denver, CO I $575M Westerly Creek I $3.8M Westerly Creek Concrete Bridges I $1.2M Filing 36 North Stapleton Gateway I $3.8M Filing 40 Far East Kingston to Moline I $580K Filing 42 Observatory Green Subdivision I $3.1M Lyons Meadow Park, Lyons, CO I $1M Mortennsoonn Building what's next. JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 4. Remove and replace areas, deficient in smoothness. Overlay corrections may be permitted only if acceptable to Engineer Inspection: The work of this section is subject to the inspection and approval of the engineer and/or owner. The following inspections are required: 1. Protection of adjacent property 2. Staking and establishment of elevations 3. Establishment and compaction of subgrade 4. Placement and compaction of bituminous base course and wearing surface 5. Final inspection 6. Obtain approval of each element of work listed above in sequence of its completion before proceeding with the next item 3.10 CLEANING A. After completion of paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled asphalt materials to the satisfaction of Engineer 3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphalt concrete pavement until it has cooled and hardened and in no case sooner than 6 hours B. Provide barricades and warning devices as required to protect pavement and the general public 3.12 WARRANTY A. Provide installer's 2-year written warranty endorsed by the contractor warranting the pavement from creeping, shoring, cracking, softening, settling, ponding and other defects due to improper placing or defective materials. Replace defective materials upon notification by the owner in accordance with the requirements of the original work. 3.13 SCHEDULE OF MIX PLACEMENT: A. Refer to Drawings for asphalt thickness and lift requirements. END OF SECTION FLEXIBLE PAVING 00 00 00 - 10 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO S. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete T. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete U. ASTM D994 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type) V. ASTM D1190 - Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot -Poured Elastic Type W. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for concrete Paving and Structural Construction X. ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction Y. CABO/ANSI A117.1 for accessibility requirements related to walks, ramps, parking areas, drives, curb ramps, etc. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide under provisions of Division One Specifications B. Product Data: Provide sufficient information on mix design and products specified to verify compliance with specifications. Provide data on joint filler admixtures and curing compounds 1. Existing data on proposed design mixes, certified and complete 2. Submit reports of field quality control testing 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301, Conform materials and installation to applicable portions of the City of Fort Collins construction specifications, standards and details. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. For work on public streets or rights -of -way conform to the requirements of City of Fort Collins construction specifications, standards and details for the Construction of Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks, Driveways, Street Paving, and other public right-of-way Improvements. B. Comply with applicable requirements of CABO/ANSI A117.1 for accessibility requirements related to walks, ramps, parking areas, drives, curb ramps, etc. C. Obtain cementitious materials and aggregate from same source for all work 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle materials under provisions of Division One Specifications B. Reinforcing steel: Store on supports which will keep materials from contact with the ground and cover C. Rubber and plastic materials: Store in a cool place, do not expose to direct sunlight D. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load of ready -mixed concrete E. Contractor shall submit tickets for all concrete delivered to site: RIGID PAVING 00 00 00 - 2 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO D. Expansion Joint Material: 0.5-inch thick, ASTM D1751, asphalt impregnated fiber board, glass fiber or sponge, or closed cell polyethelene foam, Texmastic "vinylex 3600," Sonneborn "Sonoflex F," or accepted substitutions 1011 X 416P►Lya�1:01W A. Comply with ASTM C94 B. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 1-inch C. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II; 555 pounds minimum per cubic yard of concrete D. Water/Cementitious Material (Cement and Fly Ash) Ratio: Less than or equal to 0.44 E. Slump: 4-inch maximum 1. May be increased to 4.5 inches for hand work, acceptable to Engineer 2. As low as possible consistent with proper handling and thorough compaction F. Volumetric Air Content: 5%-1 % after placement for 1-inch aggregate 1. Maximum 6%-l% after placement 2. Vary air content with maximum size aggregate, ASTM C94, Table 3. G. Strength: Compressive strength as determined by ASTM C39, 4000 psi minimum at 28 days H. Consistency: Uniform slump, suitable for the placement conditions with aggregate floating uniformly throughout the concrete mass, flowing sluggishly when vibrated or spaded Adjust mix as required to meet specifications J. Approved fly ash may be substituted for ASTM C150 cement up to a maximum of 20 percent Class C or 30 percent Class F by weight of the cementitious material content. Fly ash for concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C618 with the following exceptions: 1. The loss on ignition shall not exceed 3.0 percent 2. The CaO in Class F fly ash shall not exceed 18 percent K. Admixtures: Content, batching method, and time of introduction in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for compliance with this specification 1. Include a water reducing admixture 2. Calcium chloride content shall not exceed 0.05% of the cement content by weight 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Provide under provisions of Division One Specifications B. Submit proposed mix design to Engineer for review prior to commencement of work C. Tests on cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements D. Test samples in accordance with ACI 301. RIGID PAVING 00 00 00 - 4 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 5. Place join filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement 6. Set dowels, expansion joints, preformed construction joints and header boards as specified or indicated on the drawings 7. Low roll or mountable curbs may be formed without the use of face form by using a straight edge and template to form curb face 8. Backfill behind forms as required to prevent water from entering subgrade C. Reinforcement 1. Add fiber reinforcement to mix at plant prior to delivery to jobsite 2. Place bar or WWF reinforcement at mid -height of slabs -on -grade or as shown on the drawings a. Install in as long lengths as possible. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace with wire b. Support with metal chairs, brick or stone is unacceptable 3. Hold all tie and marginal dowels in proper position by sufficient supports or pins 4. Mechanically install dowels or place on supports if center longitudinal joint is sawed in lieu of placing plastic strip 5. Interrupt reinforcement at expansion joints 6. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed. 7. Provide doweled joints inch at interruptions of concrete with one end of dowel set in capped sleeve to allow longitudinal movement 8. Grease dowels on one side of joints with caps on greased end D. Placing concrete 1. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 2. Lightly moisten subgrade or base course immediately before placing concrete. 3. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed 4. during concrete placement 5. Deposit concrete near final position. Minimize segregation and damage to subgrade 6. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Spread mechanically to prevent segregation and separation of materials 7. Consolidate concrete with vibrators and spade next to forms to remove air spaces or honeycombs 8. Do not place concrete in forms that has begun to set 9. Do not place more concrete in one day than can be finished before dark the same day 10. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement at Contractor's option. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results which meet or exceed minimums specified. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to required cross-section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified 11. Walks: Construct sidewalks with a thickness as shown on plans (with a minimum thickness of 4-inch). Tool edges to rounded profile and finish as specified or as shown on the drawings. Pitch walks at 1.9% for cross drainage unless otherwise indicated E. Cold weather concreting 1. Conform to ACI 306/306R, except as modified herein 2. Minimum concrete temp at the time of mixing Outdoor Temp at Concrete Temp Placement in shade at Mixing Below 30°F 70OF RIGID PAVING 000000-6 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 6. On inclined slab surfaces and steps, provide a coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with a stiff -bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic 7. Edge all outside edges of the slab and all joints with a 0.25-inch radius edging tool. 8. Work edges of gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 0.5-inch radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface 9. Brush with soft bristle brush to remove trowel marks and leave a uniform appearance just before concrete takes initial set. 10. Direction of Texturing: a. Curb and Gutter: At right angles to the curb line b. Sidewalk: At right angles to centerline of sidewalk. 11. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply under pressure at the rate of one gallon to not more than 135 square feet by mechanical sprayers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions acceptable to Engineer. Joint sealing 1. Seal joints and clean concrete prior to opening to traffic. 2. Seal all expansion joints. 3. Separate concrete from other structures with 3/4-inch thick joint filler. 4. Place joint filler in concrete pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. 5. Extend joint filler from bottom of pavement to within 1/4-inch of finished surface. J. Curing and protection 1. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury 2. Have plastic sheeting, straw, burlap and/or canvas materials available at all times to protect fresh uncured surfaces from adverse weather conditions 3. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over sidewalks for 7 days minimum after finishing. Do not permit vehicular traffic over pavement for 14 days minimum after finishing or until 75 percent design strength of concrete has been achieved 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances 1. Division One Specifications - Quality Assurance: Tolerances 2. Maximum Variation of Surface Grade: 1/4- inch in 10 ft 3. Maximum Variation from True Alignment: 3/8-inch in 10 ft B. Division One Specifications - Quality Assurance: Field inspections and testing C. Take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests as required by Division One Specifications in accordance with ACI 301. Unit weight and mix temperature will also be taken D. The first three loads will be tested for slump and air content. If any one test fails to meet requirements, that load will be rejected and tests will continue on each load until three consecutive loads meet requirements. Thereafter, five concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 cu yds or less cu yds of concrete placed each day E. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and cured on site under same conditions as concrete it represents F. One slump and air entrainment test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken RIGID PAVING 00 00 00 - 8 2014 JVA studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 32 13 16 — DECORATIVE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Codes and Regulations: Work shall comply with applicable codes and regulations. Work shall comply with rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of City of Fort Collins, State of Colorado and other authorities having jurisdiction. C. Examine drawings and other Specification sections for requirements herein affecting work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section 31 23 00 for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade. 2. Division 03 Section 03 30 00 for cast in place concrete 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. All submittals are to comply with Division 03, "Concrete" Specification B. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. C. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 2. Aggregate mix: Refer to Architectural Precast Specification for aggregate mix. D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. E. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Design and engineering of formwork are Contractor's responsibility. F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Aggregates. 2. Form materials and form -release agents. 3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing materials. 6. Bonding agents. 7. Vapor retarders. 8. Epoxy joint filler. 9. Joint -filler strips. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: See Specification: "Cast -in -place Concrete" DECORATIVE CONCRETE 32 13 16 - 1 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO D. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass -fiber -reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Fit ties with devices that will leave holes in the concrete surface not less than '/z inch nor more than 1-inch diameter and of depth not less than1 inch. 2. Ties are to have water seal features. 3. Portions of ties remaining in concrete after removal of the exterior parts shall not project beyond the surface of the concrete and shall be at least 1 '/2 inches back from any surface of concrete that will be exposed, painted, damp -proofed or waterproofed. 4. Provide solid backing for each tie. 5. Delete or revise subparagraphs below to suit Project. 2.2 APPLICATIONS A. Primary Sidewalk 1. Color: Standard Gray sidewalk (no color) 2. Finish: Light Sandblast finish or'Sandscape' finish 3. Joints: Sawn control joints. Locations per drawings B. Stairs 1. Color: Standard Gray sidewalk (no color) 2. Finish: Light Sandblast finish or'Sandscape' finish 3. Joints: Sawn control joints. Locations per drawings C. Cip Conc Wall: 1. Color: Standard Gray sidewalk (no color) 2. Finish: Light Sandblast finish or'Sandscape' finish 3. Joints: Preformed control joints to match existing wall jointing D. Stage, Stage Stairs and Ramp: 1. Color: Standard Gray sidewalk (no color) 2. Finish: Light Sandblast finish or'Sandscape' finish 3. Joints: Preformed control joints per structural engineer 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: New, deformed billet steel bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber -reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless -steel bar supports. 2. For zinc -coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric -polymer -coated wire bar supports. B. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass -fiber -reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Fit ties with devices that will leave holes in the concrete surface not less than inch no more than 1- inch diameter and of depth not less than1 inch. 2. Ties are to have water seal features. DECORATIVE CONCRETE 32 13 16 - 3 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO C. Air Content: Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 6 to 8 percent, unless otherwise indicated. D. Admixtures: as required to achieve a maximum 28-day shrinkage of 0.040% per ATSM C157 2.10 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.11 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBGRADE A. Sub -grade to meet requirements of project's soils report. Sub -grade for vehicle traffic shall be in accordance with local concrete street specifications. B. A minimum of 6" of well draining road base or no fines crushed stone or crushed recycled concrete is required over the prepared sub -grade. 3.2 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, Chapter 4 to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: D. Select surface classes, usually two or more, from subparagraphs below. Indicate where each class applies. Classes are taken from ACI 347R. See Evaluations. 1. Class B, 1/4 inch. E. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. F. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. G. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material. K Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. I. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. J. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete to match existing site walls. DECORATIVE CONCRETE 32 13 16 - 5 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint -filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Expansion Joints. A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints as indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. Field - fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. 1. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect. B. Before placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. D. If required, insert below a height limitation, usually 60 inches (1500 mm), for dropping concrete in forms. E. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. DECORATIVE CONCRETE 32 13 16 - 7 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 3.11 JOINT FILLING A. ACI 302.1 R recommends joint filling be deferred as long as possible in concrete floors. Typically, up to 30 percent of concrete shrinkage takes place in first month, with 80 to 90 percent during first 12 months. Revise period below if too short or too long. Joints must be filled before industrial floors can be placed in service. B. Install semi -rigid epoxy joint filler in Expansion Joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Revise field quality -control testing below to suit Project or delete if not required for small projects. B. Refer to Cast -in -place Concrete specification section. END OF SECTION DECORATIVE CONCRETE 32 13 16 - 9 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE 6. PROJECT BUDGET AND COST CONTROL i. Approach The construction industry typically measures the success of a project by two primary factors: schedule and budget. The questions most commonly asked are "Was the project completed on schedule?" and "Was the project within budget?". With Mortenson's integrated approach to preconstruction and construction services, schedule and budget are still the two primary drivers, but the question we strive to address: Our approach focuses more on maximizing outcomes than it does on simply achieving benchmarks. As your construction partner, we will be continually tracking trends throughout the design and construction to make sure that the City of Fort Collins ultimately gets the best value, the most program, and the highest quality possible for their investment in the Old Town Square project. Owddr ms 9 `m S vindr am Y .lA LL 0 der Target Value y r� Budget 'a.ui9o3 Owder �r 9 � p d Earthwork Y JAI as iaP/ ng > 2. Value Engineering Cost Validation With the current design of the project being significantly complete, Mortenson can add value through cost validation. By working with your current design team, Mortenson can play an important role in the development of a market price budget. By pairing scopes of work and specifications with project phasing and scheduling needs, Mortenson can prepare a pricing model. With a substantive model in place the design process can be better kept on track, as any discrepancies between design and costs can be caught early. A solution can then be found that aligns with the proposed budget without sacrificing the integrity of the projects intent. Subcontractor Pricing With the design near its completion Moretsnson can immediately step in and begin the process of reaching out to our specialty trade partners. By receiving pricing responses from our trade partners, a greater level of accuracy can be added to the project budget. Another advantage to collaborating with trade partners early on is the ability to incorporate pricing into their contracts. This reduces the risk of major price fluctuations and adds to the projects stability in cost. Target Value Design Mortenson's team is skilled at exploring target value design if alternatives are needed in order to achieve the desired budget.: First task is to perform a full -detail estimate of the work, and verify that the estimate is within the targeted budget. Joe Shinagle is responsible for completing this task, with support from our in-house estimating staff. Establish target budgets for each of the components. 2. Research market alternatives to materials and subcontractors to ensure meeting the target component budgets. 3. Where beneficial, provide value engineered alternatives for City and Studio Insite's consideration. Mortenson Building what's next. studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins. CO 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed stone unit paver installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. C. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct meeting prior to construction. Attendance required by Owner, Architect, Contractor(s), Supplier, other parties who are involved or requested to appear. D. Inspections. E. General. All pieces of stone are subject to the Architect's approval prior to, during and after installation. Replace rejected stone work with satisfactory F. Architect's or Owner's Representative inspection of the dimensional stone paver does not release the Contractor from the responsibility to provide all the work in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. G. Mockups: Before installing stone unit pavers, build mockups for each form and pattern of unit pavers required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work, including same base construction, special features for expansion joints, and contiguous work as indicated: 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting stone unit paver installation. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed. 7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed or damaged at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from weather, moisture, deterioration and contamination during delivery, installation and site storage. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in a dry place. B. Concrete Unit Pavers: 1. Protect pavers during storage and construction against moisture, soiling, staining and physical damage. 2. Handling. Handle stone to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling or other damage. Do not use pinch or wrecking bars without protecting edges of stone with wood or other rigid materials. Lift with wide -belt type slings wherever possible, do not use wire rope containing tar or other substances which cause staining. If required, use wood rollers and provide cushion at end of wood pieces. 3. Storage. Store on wood skids or pallets, covered with non -staining waterproof membrane. Wood in contact with stone must be low in resins and of species free of tannin. Place and stack skids and stones to distribute weight evenly and to prevent breakage or cracking of stones. Protect stored stone from weather with waterproof, non -staining covers or enclosures, but allow air to circulate around stones. Replace damaged units with new as directed. C. Accessories. Protect materials from weather, moisture, deterioration and contamination during delivery, installation and site storage. Precast Concrete Unit Pavers 32 14 13 - 2 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO PART 2-PRODUCTS aliIIII1111111111 kill A. Concrete Unit Pavers. 1. Hex Concrete Unit Paver: a. Manufacturer: Pavestone (or Approved equal) b. Size: Hex Paver 3" x 8" dia. c. Color: Light Almond d. Finish: Standard and Light Sandblast Finish (per drawings) 2. Linear Concrete Unit Paver: a. Manufacturer: Pavestone (or Approved equal) b. Size: Holland Paver 3" x 4" x 8" c. Color: 3 Tone Blend d. Finish: Standard and Light Sandblast Finish (per drawings) 3. 6" SQ. Concrete Unit Paver: a. Manufacturer: Pavestone (or Approved equal) b. Size: Holland Paver 3" x 6" x 6" c. Color: Charcoal d. Finish: Light Sandblast Finish (per drawings) 2.2 SETTING BED MATERIALS A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: 1. Aggregate shall conform to "Class 6 Aggregate" and the following gradation in accordance with the State Department of Highways, division of Highways, State of Colorado, Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, subsection 703.03 of the latest edition: (Note: recycled crushed pavers may be used should they meet the CDOT Class 6 requirements for sub -grade. Contractor to provide testing results of proposed sub -base material for final approval. Final depth of subbase material is to be provided by the Geotechnical Engineer who performed the soils testing for the proposed sites. Depth of subbase as shown on the drawings are for reference only. The geotech's recommendation shall take presidence over the drawings should discrepancies exist on drawings or in the specifications.) SIEVE SIZE PERCENT PASSING 20mm 100 #4 30-65 #8 25-55 #200 3-12 B. The Liquid limit to not be greater than 30, Plasticity Index not to exceed 6. C. Joint Sand: Sand joint material shall conform with ASTM C33 (not masonry sand) 1. Color: Tan, provide in on -site mock up prior to installation. D. Bedding Sand. Sand setting material shall be clean, sharp, washed concrete sand conforming to ASTM C33, with the following gradation: SIEVE SIZE PERCENT PASSING #4 100 #8 95-100 #16 70-100 Precast Concrete Unit Pavers 32 14 13 - 4 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 3.4 UNIT PAVER INSTALLATION A. Set paving in strict accordance with pattern requirements of final Shop Drawings. Set units straight and true to required line. Lay pavers hand tight, with care taken to maintain level, straight and true lines. B. Balance cuts. Layout single row of stone pavers in each direction, perpendicular to the surrounding edges. Adjust the location of each row so as to create cut pieces which are approximately equal in size. Do not use small slivers of pavers to fill poorly laid out patterns. Incorporate smaller pavers with over -sized pavers; saw cut 'dummy' joint to maintain jointing appearance only with approval from Architect. Cut pavers as needed to meet the placement conditions and patterns indicated. Stone shall meet fixed structures as indicated on the Drawings, C. Keep units clean and rake out joints between stones for joint material. D. Final elevation of unit pavers shall be flush with surrounding surfaces and conforming to elevations indicated. E. Joints. Backfill joints with specified material. Sweep material into paver joints until all joints are filled to top of paver surface. F. Soak paverjoints lightly and reapply joint material as needed to insure full penetration of material into and completely filling the joints. G. Sweep and remove excess joint filling material from site. 3.5 AGGREGATE SETTING -BED PAVER APPLICATIONS A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 to underside of sand leveling bed. B. Place aggregate subbase over compacted subgrade. Provide compacted thickness indicated on drawings. Compact subbase to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density and screed to depth required allowing setting of pavers. C. Place geotextile over compacted subbase course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches. D. Place sand leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (max.), taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. E. Lay pavers so that the surface levels are within the tolerances specified. Follow an order of laying, which maintains an open working face and does not trap a paver. Align the first row of pavers against the edge restraint or by using a string line or straight edge. Check the alignment of pavers periodically by using straight lines and make adjustments where necessary. Lay whole pavers first, followed by closers. Complete the area to be laid, as far as possible using whole blocks. Where appropriate, incorporate cut pavers to assist with the formation of boundaries and with changes in direction. Complete infilling before compaction commences. Cut pavers to shape and size to form edge. Do not insert pieces of a size less than 1/3 (one-third) of a full block. F. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch and a maximum of 1/8 inch, being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. G. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low -amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions: 1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed to rain. 2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36 inches of the laying face. Cover open layers with nonstaining plastic sheets overlapped a minimum of 48 inches on each side of the laying face to protect it from rain. H. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling. I. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints. Precast Concrete Unit Pavers 32 14 13 - 6 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE January 9, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation Design Development Fort Collins, CO SECTION 32 14 40 — STONE PAVING PART 1-GENERAL liK111111111:0aW_%r:1.11.z z nla A1011I A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. All inclusive work pertaining to the supplying and installation of stone unit pavers set on granular sub -base as shown in the construction documents. i I �c� :� .y AGtly �I►y xij QiP► l:`7 A. Division 03 Concrete: for concrete subbase B. Division 31 Earthwork: Compacted sub -grade and sub base course, if any, under unit pavers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013300 — Submittal Procedures for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit copies of all necessary shop drawings to the Architect for approval, in accordance with General Conditions. 2. Drawings shall indicate all bedding, bonding, jointing and anchoring details, location of all control joints, expansion joints, isolation joints, elevations, relationship to adjoining construction, and the dimensions and setting number of each piece of stone pavement. Indicate field cutting which may be required. Verify dimensions and elevations of adjacent work on site by accurate field measurement prior to preparation of shop drawings. C. Product Data: For the following: 1. Stone unit pavers for thickness, color, texture/finish and edge joint type. 2. Base course. 3. Sand setting bed. 4. Joint material (swept between unit pavers), 5. Non -woven Geo-textile filter fabric. 6. Setting Materials: Separate statement or notation on package labels indication compliance with specified requirements and suitability for intended use. 7. Manufacturer's Instructions: Printed instructions for each product, including applicable temperature ranges. 8. Maintenance Data: Recommended cleaning and stain removal methods and cleaning materials. 9. Warranty Documentation in accordance with the Section. D. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of stone unit paver indicated, in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed stone unit paver installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Stone Paving 32 14 40 - 1 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE January 9, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation Design Development Fort Collins, CO B. Temperature. If necessary, maintain temperatures equal to or above 50 degrees F on paved areas during installations and for 7 days after completion. Do not set stone when temperature of air, substrate of materials is below 50 degrees F. C. Cold -Weather Conditions: Remove any ice or snow formed on stonework setting bed by carefully applying heat until top of surface is dry to touch. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen sub grade or setting beds. Remove and replace stone unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing. D. Conform to "Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" by IMI. E. Existing Conditions. 1. Plants. Do not damage any existing plantings indicated to remain in accordance Construction Documents, 2. Utilities. Determine location of underground utilities. Perform work in a manner to avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. 3. Excavation. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon in writing by both parties concerned. When conditions detrimental to work are encountered, notify Architect before proceeding. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty Period: Warranty period extends one year from the date of Substantial Completion. The warranty period begins anew for the replaced area and extends each time the area requires replacement. 1. The contractor, by commencing the work of this Section, assumes overall responsibility, as part of this warranty of the work, to assure that all assemblies, components, and parts shown or required within the Work of this Section, comply with the contract documents. The contractor shall further warrant: 2. Inspect stone unit paving within one month of placement and reset any units that are cracked, chipped or rocking or any areas that have settled. Reset any units or areas that have settled. Apply additional joint fill sand between joints as required. Clean up excess fines. 3. The overall effective integration and correctness of individual parts and the whole of the system. 4. Compatibility with adjoining existing substrates, materials and work by other trades. 5. Settling tolerance maximum of/<" differential between any pavers or surrounding edge materials. 6. If stone unit -paving areas fail after having been replaced previously, area shall be replaced until it is approved. The warranty period begins anew and extends each time an area requires replacing. Replacement pavers shall be of the same kind, condition and quality as original paver and subject to all requirements in this specification. 7. All expenses incurred in the replacements shall be borne by the Contractor. 8. Make replacements within seven days of notification by Owner's Representative. 9. Warranty 10. Warranty shall include all labor and material to replace all cracked, damaged, or failed paving and reset any unit or area which has settled or heaved within a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance. Make repairs/replacements within 7 days as directed by the Owner's Representative. 11. Delete paragraph and subparagraphs below if bituminous setting bed is not used. 12. Delete paragraph and subparagraphs below if no mortar or grout. 13. Retain below for pavers set in mortar. Hot weather will have more of an effect on paver installations than on masonry because the horizontal surface will absorb more solar energy. Insert specific limits to suit local conditions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STONE MATERIALS A. Granite Pavers (Vernal Pool) 1. Stone Unit Paver: Stone Paving 32 14 40 - 3 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE January 9, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation Design Development Fort Collins, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine areas and conditions under which the Work of this Section will be performed. Report to the Architect the condition and depths of the existing base course, filter fabric and setting bed beneath the paving in this area. Review compaction reports to verify acceptable conditions. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Architect. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions. 2. Verify areas to be paved are excavated to depth, line and grade indicated, allowing dimensions to install full depth of aggregate base course at a minimum density of 95%, sand, and pavement depth to specified finish grade. 3. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing installation, with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations. Examine areas where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces and horizontal waterproofing. Proceed with installation only after protection is in place. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect adjacent conditions and sub -base from damage or contamination with foreign materials. B. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles. C. Proof -roll prepared sub -grade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. Proceed with stone unit paver installation only after deficient sub -grades have been corrected and are ready to receive sub -base for stone unit pavers. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use stone unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work. B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Install to pattern/grid shown on drawings. D. Joint Pattern: As indicated on drawings. E. Screed sand setting bed to a loose thickness of 1 inch to 1.25 inches for a uniform and approximately level appearance. Do not disturb or pre -compact sand after sand has been screeded. F. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing stone unit pavers. 1. Install edge restraints to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install stakes at intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after unit paver installation. 2. Install job -built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in - Place Concrete." G. Execute stonework by skilled masons, and employ skilled stone fitters at the site for necessary field cutting as stone is set. H. Set paving in strict accordance with pattern requirements of final Shop Drawings. Set units straight and true to required line. Lay pavers hand tight, with care taken to maintain level, straight and true lines. I. Balance cuts. Layout single row of stone pavers in each direction, perpendicular to the surrounding edges. Adjust the location of each row so as to create cut pieces which are approximately equal in size. Do not use small slivers of pavers to fill poorly laid out patterns. Incorporate smaller pavers with over -sized pavers; saw cut 'dummy' joint to maintain jointing appearance. Cut pavers as needed to meet the Stone Paving 32 14 40 - 5 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE January 9, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation Design Development Fort Collins, CO B. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage during cleaning operations. C. Protect work area during all phases of stone installation. Maintain temporary barricades to prevent disturbance of work area and clearly mark work area to warn and protect pedestrians using adjacent areas. D. Protect adjacent surfaces during progress of the Work in this Section. After installation and cleaning, protect work from damage during subsequent construction activities, until all work is accepted. E. At completion of construction work, remove all temporary protection. END OF SECTION Stone Paving 32 14 40 - 7 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1. Work involving substantial plumbing for installation of copper piping, backflow preventer(s), and related Work shall be executed by licensed and bonded plumber(s). Secure a permit at least 48 hours prior to start of installation or as required by the City of Fort Collins. 2. Tolerances - Specified depths of mains and laterals and pitch of pipes are minimums. Settlement of trenches is cause for removal of finish grade treatment, refilling, compaction, and repair of finish grade treatment. 3. Coordination with Other Contractors - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other Section. 4. Damage To Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grading, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during Work associated with installation of irrigation system at no additional cost to Owner. C. Pre -Construction Conference - Contractor shall schedule and conduct a conference to review in detail quality control and construction requirements for equipment, materials, and systems used to perform the Work. Conference shall be scheduled not less than 10 days prior to commencement of Work. All parties required to be in attendance shall be notified no later than 7 days prior to date of conference. Contractor shall notify qualified representatives of each party concerned with that portion of Work to attend conference, including but not limited to Architect, Owners Representative, Contractor's Superintendent, and Installer. 1. Minutes of conference shall be recorded and distributed by Contractor to all parties in attendance within five days of conference. 1.05 SUBMITTALS - Prepare and make submittals in accordance with conditions of the Contract. A. Complete Irrigation System Design - Contractor shall prepare a complete irrigation system design providing 100% coverage to all landscaped areas shown on plans. Design shall follow these specifications and details and shall be based on the following. Design shall be drafted utilizing AutoCAD by a qualified draftsperson. Final design shall be submitted to Owners Representative and City of Fort Collins for review and approval prior to ordering any material or commencement of any construction. All fees associated with City reviews will be the responsibility of the contractor. 1. The irrigation design shall at a minimum include the following information; a. Location of all mainline piping, lateral piping, drip tubing, heads, control valves, gate valves, quick coupling valves, all drip equipment, controllers, tap, meter and backflow preventer; b. All mainline and lateral piping shall be sized on the plans; C. Each control valve shall have a valve symbol that indicates the valve station number, valve size and designed flow for that valve; d. A complete irrigation schedule indicating equipment symbol, manufacturer, model number and description; e. Tap location shall have a note indicating tap size and available pressure. 2. Watering Period — Irrigation system shall be designed to irrigate the site within a six night per week, six hour per night peak season watering period. 3. Static pressure verification - Prior to beginning design work, Contractor shall field verify the pressure available at the site. This pressure shall be clearly indicated on the irrigation design drawing. If pressure is greater than 85 PSI, a pressure regulating valve shall be included at the tap location. If the available water pressure is not sufficient to operate the irrigation system, Contractor shall include within bid the cost to design and install a booster pump. If no pressure is stated on plans, it is the Contractor's responsibility to verify the pressure available at the site prior to IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 2 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE 328400-2 studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO Controller Charts: a. Do not prepare charts until Owners Representative has reviewed record (as - built) drawings. b. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed. 1) Chart may be reproduction of record drawing, if scale permits fitting of controller door. If photo reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full legibility. 2) Chart shall be blueline print of actual "as -built' system, showing area covered by that controller. C. Identify area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly different pastel color drawing over entire area of coverage. d. Following review of charts by Owners Representative, they shall be hermetically sealed between two layers of 20-mm thick plastic sheet e. Charts shall be completed and reviewed prior to final review of irrigation system. D. Shop Drawings - Submit Shop Drawings if noted on construction drawings, include a complete materials list indicating manufacturer, model number, and description of all materials and equipment to be used. Show appropriate dimensions and adequate detail to accurately portray intent of construction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING - Deliver, unload, store, and handle materials, packaging, bundling, products in dry, weatherproof, condition in manner to prevent damage, breakage, deterioration, intrusion, ignition, and vandalism. Deliver in original unopened packaging containers prominently displaying manufacturer's name, volume, quantity, contents, instructions, and conformance to local, state, and federal law. Remove and replace cracked, broken, or contaminated items or elements prematurely exposed to moisture, inclement weather, snow, ice, temperature extremes, fire, orjobsite damage. A. Handling of PVC Pipe - Exercise care in handling, loading and storing, of PVC pipe. All PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle which allows length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external loads. All sections of pipe that have been dented or damaged shall be discarded, and if installed, shall be replaced with new piping. 1.07 JOBSITE CONDITIONS: A. Protection of Property: 1. Preserve and protect all trees, plants, monuments, structures, and paved areas from damage due to Work of this Section. In the event damage does occur, all damage to inanimate items shall be completely repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner, and all injury to living plants shall be repaired by Owner. All costs of such repairs shall be charged to and paid by Contractor. 2. Protect buildings, walks, walls, and other property from damage. Flare and barricade open ditches. Damage caused to asphalt, concrete, or other building material surfaces shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. Restore disturbed areas to original condition. B. Existing Trees: IRRIGATION 32 84 00 -4 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE 328400-4 studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 4. 4 quick coupler keys and 2 matching hose swivels for each type of quick coupling valve installed. 5. 2 aluminum drain valve keys of sufficient length for operation of drain valves. B. Winterization - include cost in bid for winterizing complete system at conclusion of sprinkling season (in which system received final acceptance) within 3 days notification by the Owner. System shall be voided of water using compressed air or similar method reviewed by Owners Representative. Reopen, operate, and adjust system malfunctions accordingly during April of following season within three days of notification by Owner. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK - In addition to installed system furnish the following items to Owner: A. 10 Pop-up spray heads with nozzles of each type used. B. 4 Rotor heads of each type used. C. 30 Drip emitters of each type used. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: City of Fort Collins may request different parts, fittings, heads, and components. Confirm all material with City prior to ordering any materials. A. General Piping: 1. Pressure Supply Line (from point of connection through backflow prevention unit) - Type " k" Hard Copper. 2. Pressure Supply Lines (downstream of backflow prevention units) - Class 200 PVC BE (1" - 2 1/2"). 3. Non -pressure Lines - Class 200 PVC BE 4. PVC Sleeving - Class 160 PVC. All lines under paving systems shall be sleeved. 5. Drip Tubing - Hardie Dura-Pol EHD 1645 3/4" with .050 inch wall thickness. 6. Emitter Tubing - As recommended by emitter manufacturer. B. Copper Pipe and Fittings: 1. Copper Pipe - Type K, hard tempered. 2. Fittings - Wrought copper, solderjoint type. 3. Joints - Soldered with solder, 45% silver, 15% copper, 16% zinc, and 24% cadmium and solidus at 1125—F and liquids at 1145—F. C. Brass Pipe and Fittings: 1. Brass Pipe - 85% red brass, ANSI Schedule 40 screwed pipe. 2. Fittings - Medium brass, screwed 125 pound class. D. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: 1. Identification Markings: a. Identify all pipe with following indelible markings: 1) Manufacturer's name. 2) Nominal pipe size. 3) Schedule of class. IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 6 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE 328400-6 6. PROJECT BUDGET AND COST CONTROL Sample of a Pre -Construction Cost Estimate 4. Transparent and Open BookApproach Mortensen's philosophy is to conduct the preconstruction process entirely on an open book basis. The GMP will be developed with all costs fully disclosed to the City of Fort Collins and the design team. Representatives from Mortesmom Nww E.em,I.. xn.n. o Phase I N" NlMtldu pellovatlon W.0 Total Phase 1 awaso— 8anmwa 21.7..5 t is lB 1 .. S Cw aan Ile. 1.1 { { M9.9M 9�pne�atua %meM. >Sm , 1, I.. 1 1]0. EtlMw Enb•w h,ta .. I { IY,y6 S 1.,O,,fitS enaanB W'ma Ies { Mem S 0]s.0s0 In.-tc alm m.0i1 iSm { 1f All ... t am { am , ]N.000 S 2Mzns shin e0 Om S sam0 se s Iz e { em , W.WO S Po. I.,sFlnbM W. {tL0 $ 1 ... ey0 s mm { X.. , 166.w , I.,eT.ifY L aaq 1 Im s I.. { I'W %u�lry EO,Da 3 1m S am { malW 1. { B00 It . t •A.010 t S.I. IWac Tithe { am S mm It 1w0.1ro as,o , nm $ ral { Its'. t ,Vs.. n m m WW S Im S am It MIPS aY0 { 1N 3 1.s0 { 1EYo { l.lt. e.a.l mm5 { am It am s I.Bm a]q It IM { tom { tm,ta { 1alle u .n am S M{ Em S ]lO.ta eY0 It2m { M s I&Bm t Mem mm1 i Im { tm 1 to a. t 1m S 1m s e,]w t Is , •camI„�an, —auuelne 1,aa. , kW i e,m s am , eala S Is I. n nano 31.40) s ]m i tm , am s lmpmv.nvnu mLI•• IOA15 S{ 11 i Ia.Im IW�m r Wg1Y IOA,e { lm { M {stall { aim .1. IOMS $ l S 09 S N. sID mm b10.m a1MW ,eAe 1HaEer1.saae►treleee HOMY CaIYluelenCwt E ,a]aaE , 1,a.04 , ,a.= 9uemeeainMW ITl aatv� M..We Ild.abrve BeNaY 12otaza f 1,a.mz , 13e = .el PeooI It SIW , JNn,maeor,. mle am11 S Yem, aaas { mm, s me,se SYOY i nJ]0Am i ,+]a)m i Itwa3m 1000% i 1le),YI to. I ZZ f I,=M &OpY { 1a,1e"', { I..M2 { Ill. Les, NIY•MYv�o the It. OY Oa Is fM1rkmvml0elnaSa•Y WlsrLt•E Wl stltl•e ,tl WF•W sfa•rs IYM { ,slaw tL114 3 ,aE1, It I.., aWY { Ym9 QT { 1z10.eW S 118,9Nt � Ne 21M { mJ.a® 3.1PA , s&YO , 1A5Y TmIGYInMkn Gp { Ia.a;Oa { I.eeasta { te,ms,t fY pvbs•saiMllp SyR , aeM all S IMY ,/0SI 1 naas arm eWYq eelwleeYp Satlf aSy eee n roan.ul.xsa�o�.,�.aweu.a.wr..awr.,raver...ew.e.I.••-M.+rm,•rwo+nrn..I IFRASTRUCTURE each entity will be kept informed every step of the way. Mortensen's open book philosophy includes active involvement by Fort Collins and the design team in the detailed evaluation of trade partner bids. Through this process, Mortenson will lead the review of all factors to be considered in the award of the work and provide clear rationale behind our recommendations. Once established, Mortensen will provide periodic updates on the GMP. We are confident that our approach eliminates all surprises associated with project costs, enhances the experience the team will have in managing the project, increases the confidence of Fort Collins in the performance of the team, and ensures the project meets th expectations of the project's stakeholders. Morten Building what's next. tnv, on studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 1. Low Voltage: a. Electrical Control Wire - AWG UFUL approved No. 14 direct burial copper wire or larger, if required to operate system as designed. b. Wire Colors: 1) Control Wires - Red. 2) Common Wires - White. 3) Master Valve Wires - Blue. 4) Spare Control Wires - Black. 5) Spare Common Wires - Yellow. C. If multiple controllers are utilized, and wire paths of different controllers cross each other, both common and control wires from each controller shall be different colors approved by Owners Representative. d. Control Wire connections and splices shall be made with 3M direct bury splice, Rain Bird Pentite connectors, or similar dry splice method. 2. High Voltage - Type required by local codes and ordinances, of proper size to accommodate needs of equipment serviced. J. Automatic Controller - Size and type required for project. Installed per manufactures recommendations. Size controller with a minimum of 3 extra zones. Acceptable controllers: Hunter ICC_M series, Rainmaster RME series or Toro /Irritrol MC-B-Plus series. K. Electric Control Valves - Size and type required for project. Installed per manufactures recommendations. Valves shall have manual flow adjustment (except drip valves) and manual bleed nut. Acceptable electric valves: Hunter ICV series, Rain Bird PEB series or Irritrol 700 series. L. Sprinkler Heads - Size and type required for project. Installed per manufactures recommendations. Acceptable sprinkler heads: Pop-up and Hi -pop spray heads Rain Bird 1806-SAM-PRS and 1812-SAM-PRS (or Hunter equals). Gear driven rotors Hunter 1-20SS and 1-25SS (or Rain Bird equals). M. Backflow Preventer - Size and type required for project. Installed per manufactures recommendations and shall meet all state and local code requirements. Brass construction with 150 psi working pressure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LANDSCAPE PLAN REVIEW AND COORDINATION - Contractor will be held responsible for coordination between landscape and irrigation system installation. Landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan shall take precedence over the irrigation system equipment locations. If irrigation equipment is installed in conflict with the landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan, the Contractor will be required to relocate the irrigation equipment, as necessary, at Contractor's expense. 3.02 INSPECTION - Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section is to be performed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Grading operations, with the exception of final grading, shall be completed and approved by Owner before staking or installation of any irrigation system begins. 3.03 PREPARATION: A. Staking shall Occur as Follows: IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 8 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE 328400-8 studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Flexible Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe - Lay pipe and assemble fittings following manufacturer's recommendations. B. Drip Tubing: 1. Make all fitting connections as per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Use only manufacturer provided or recommended hole punch when making penetrations in drip tubing for insert fittings. Use of any other hole punch shall be cause for immediate removal and replacement of all installed drip tubing. 3. Install drip line blow-out stubs at all dead ends of drip tubing. C. Control Wiring 1. Low Voltage Wiring: a. Bury control wiring between controller and electric valves in pressure supply line trenches, strung as close as possible to main pipe lines with such wires to be consistently located below and to one side of pipe, or in separate trenches. b. Bundle all 24 volt wires at 10 foot intervals and lay with pressure supply line pipe to one side of the trench. C. Provide an expansion loop at every pressure pipe angle fitting, every electric control valve location (in valve box), and every 500 feet. Form expansion loop by wrapping wire at least 8 times around a 3/4 inch pipe and withdrawing pipe. d. Make all splices and E.C.V. connections using Rain Bird Pentite connectors or similar dry splice method. e. Install all control wire splices not occurring at control valve in a separate splice valve box. f. Install one control wire for each control valve. g. Run two spare #14 AWG UFUL control wires and one common wire from controller pedestal to the end of each and every leg of mainline. Label spare wires at controller and wire stub box. 2. High Voltage Wiring for Automatic Controller: a. Provide 120 volt power connection to automatic controller. b. All electric work shall conform to local codes, ordinances, and authorities having jurisdiction. All high voltage electrical work shall be performed by licensed electrician. D. Automatic Controller: 1. Install controller in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as detailed and where shown on Drawings. Ensure City's compliance with controller prior to ordering 2. Connect remote control valves to controller in numerical sequence as shown on Drawings. 3. Final location of controller shall be approved by Owners Representative prior to installation. 4. Each controller shall be a dedicated separate ground wire and grounding rod as detailed. 5. All above ground conduit shall be rigid galvanized with appropriate fittings. All below ground conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC. E. Electric Control Valves - Install cross -handle 3 inches below finished grade where shown on Drawings as detailed. When grouped together, allow at least 12 inches between valve box IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 10 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE 328400-10 studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO not sufficient to meet backfill, compaction, and final grade requirements. 2. Do not leave trenches open for a period of more than 48 hours. Open excavations shall be protected in accordance with OSHA regulations. 3. Compact backfill to 90% maximum density, determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 utilizing the following methods: a. Mechanical tamping. b. Puddling or ponding. Puddling or ponding and/or jetting is prohibited within 20'-0" of building or foundation walls. O. Piping Under Paving: 1. Provide for a minimum cover of 18 inches between the top of the pipe and the bottom of the aggregate base for all pressure and non -pressure piping installed under asphaltic concrete or concrete paving. 2. Piping located under areas where asphalt or concrete paving will be installed shall be bedded with sand (a layer 6" below pipe and 6" above pipe). 3. Compact backfill material at 90% maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 using manual or mechanical tamping devices. 4. Set in place, cap, and pressure test all piping under paving, in presence of Owner prior to backfilling and paving operations. 5. Piping under existing walks or concrete pavement shall be done by jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving, but where cutting or breaking of walks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done and replaced at not cost to Owner. Obtain permission to cut or break walks and/or concrete from Owner. P. Water Supply and Point of Connection - Water supply shall be extended from water supply lines. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Flushing - After piping, risers, and valves are in place and connected, but prior to installation of sprinkler heads, quick coupler assemblies, and hose valves, thoroughly flush piping system under full head of water pressure from dead end fittings. Maintain flushing for 5 minutes through furthermost valves. Cap risers after flushing. B. Testing - Conduct tests in presence of Owners Representative. Arrange for presence of Owners Representative 48 hours in advance of testing. Contractor shall supply force pump and all other test equipment. 1. After backfilling, and installation of all control valves. fill pressure supply line with water, and pressurize to 40 PSI over the designated static pressure or 120 PSI, whichever is greater, for a period of 2 hours. 2. Leakage, Pressure Loss - Test is acceptable if no loss of pressure is evident during the test period. 3. Leaks - Detect and repair leaks. 4. Retest system until test pressure can be maintained for duration of test. 5. Before final acceptance, pressure supply line shall remain under pressure for a period of 48 hours. C. Walk -Through for Substantial Completion: 1. Arrange for Owners Representative's presence 48 hours in advance of walk- through. 2. Entire system shall be completely installed and operational prior to scheduling of walk-through. IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 12 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE 328400-12 studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins. CO SECTION 32 90 00 — PLANTINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Trees 2. Shrubs 3. Ground cover 4. Shredded Wood Mulch 5. Decorative Stone Mulch B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 "Earthwork" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials. 2. Divivion 32 Irrigation 3. Division 33 "Utlities" for below -grade drainage of landscaped areas, paved areas, and wall perimeters. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of tree or shrub required; wrapped, tied, rigidly supported, and drum -laced as recommended by ANSI Z60.1. B. Container -Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well -rooted exterior plants grown in a container with well - established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and size of exterior plant required. C. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. D. Planting Soil: Existing, Native or Imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with organic and/or inorganic soil amendments. E. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, signed by product manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. 3. Certification of Inspection - Submit copies of invoices for materials with State, Federal, or other inspection certificates and showing source of origin. C. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. D. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants. E. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of exterior plants during a calendar year. Before expiration of required maintenance periods, Contractor shall PLANTINGS 32 90 00 - 1 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery. C. Handle planting stock by root ball. Protect stems and trunks from damage due to transport and lifting. 1. Do not drop plants. Do not lift plants by the trunk, stems, or foliage. Handle plants by the ball or the container. 2. Reject balled plants if the ball is broken or the trunk is loose in the ball. 3. Protect plants at all times from drying out or injury. 4. Minor broken and damaged roots shall be pruned before planting. Major damage shall be cause for rejection as determined by the Project Manager. D. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Heel -in bare -root stock. Soak roots in water for two hours if dried out. 2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. 3. Do not remove container -grown stock from containers before time of planting. 4. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on -site with a fine -mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Spring Planting: April 1 — June 31. Adjust for weather limitations and freezing conditions. 2. Fall Planting: September 1 — November 31. Adjust for weather limitations and freezing conditions. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit. Planting during freezing conditions or forecasted freezing conditions is not permitted. C. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and before planting lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Landscape Architect, 1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations. D. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Do not permit heavy equipment such as trucks, rollers or bulldozers to damage utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize the possibility of damage to underground utilities. Any damage to underground piping or wiring arising out of work of this section must be corrected and repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. E. Damage to Other Improvements: All costs for repair or replacement of any damage to other work done on - site or adjacent properties by installation of plant material shall be borne by the Contractor installing plant material. Existing grades, paving, vegetation and other improvements damaged during planting shall be restored at the Contractor's expense. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Warrant the following exterior plants, for the warranty period indicated, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. 1. Warranty Period for Trees and Shrubs: Two planting seasons or one year (12 months) from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Ground Cover and Plants: Two planting seasons or one year (12 months) from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Remove dead exterior plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. PLANTINGS 32 90 00 - 3 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO F. Balled & burlapped plant material shall be dug with firm natural balls or earth of sufficient diameter and depth to include most of the fibrous roots. Tree ball shapes shall be truncated cones. Balled & burlapped plants may be rejected for failure to meet good digging practices. No balled plant shall be placed if the ball is cracked or broken either before or during the planting process. Any plant that is loose in the ball shall be removed from the site & replaced. G. Container Grown Stock Requirements: 1. Container grown stock shall have a root system sufficiently developed to hold the container soil together firm & whole. No plants shall be loose in the containers. No plant shall be container -bound. 2. Use rigid containers that will hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping of not less than the minimum sizes recommended by ANSI Z60.1. 3. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees are shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and label with number to assure symmetry in planting. H. Substitutions will not be permitted unless upon evidence that a plant is not obtainable and upon authorization from the Project Manager. The nearest obtainable size and variety of plant material having the same essential characteristics shall be used as a substitute. No adjustments of contract price shall be made by the Contractor. 2.3 SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES A. Shade Trees: Single -stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and caliper indicated, complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required. 1. Provide balled and burlapped trees. 2. Branching Height: One-third to one-half of tree height. 3. Size: Refer to drawings. B. Small Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1; stem form as follows: 1. Stem Form: Single stem 2. Provide balled and burlapped trees. 3. Size: Refer to drawings. 2.4 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS A. Form and Size: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub. 1. Provide container -grown shrubs. 2. Size: Refer to drawings. 2.5 CONIFEROUS EVERGREENS A. Form and Size: Normal -quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1.Form and Size: Specimen -quality, exceptionally heavy, tightly knit, symmetrically shaped coniferous evergreens and the following grade: 1. Heavy Grade: "XXX." 2. Provide balled and burlapped trees. 3. Size: Refer to drawings. 2.6 BROADLEAF EVERGREENS A. Form and Size: Normal -quality, well-balanced, broadleaf evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1.Provide container -grown trees. 1. Size: Refer to drawings. PLANTINGS 32 90 00 - 5 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO soluble salt content of a maximum 5 mmhos/cm; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 25 to 65 percent of dry weight. 2. Peat (Acidic pH requirement): Sphagnum peat moss, partially decomposed, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. C. Peat (Acidic): Sphagnum peat moss, partially decomposed, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. D. Peat (neutral pH): Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed -sedge peat and having a water -absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. 2.12 FERTILIZER A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. Adjust percentages to suit site soil conditions. B. Commercial Fertilizer: Prior to landscape installation adjust composition to suit site soil conditions. If used as a soil amendment, revise fertilizer mix to remedy deficiencies found in soil tests. C. Commercial -grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow -release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 3-Ib/1000 sq. ft. of Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium, Adjust amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil -testing agency. D. Slow -Release Fertilizer: Adjust composition to suit site soil conditions. If used as a soil amendment, revise fertilizer mix to remedy deficiencies found in soil tests. Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water -insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 3-Ib/1000 sq. ft. of Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium, Adjust amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil -testing agency. 2.13 MULCH AND CRUSHER FINES A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of the following: 1. Type: Double Shredded Cedar Fiber 2. Depth:3" 3. Installation: Re drawings B. Gravel Mulch: Hard, durable stone, erosion resistant, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of following type, size range, and color: 1. Type: 3/4" "Mountain Granite" by Colorado Materials (303.682.2314). Submit samples for landscape architect approval. 2. Depth: 2" 3, Installation: Re drawings. 2.14 WEED -CONTROL BARRIERS A. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle -punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a non -woven polypropylene fabric, 4.8-oz./sq. yd. Available at Bowman Construction Supply (303) 696-8960, 2.15 STAKES AND GUYS A. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough -sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or current acceptable pressure - preservative -treated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm) by length indicated, pointed at one end. PLANTINGS 32 90 00 - 7 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE studiolNSITE February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. 2. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 12 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. B. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. C. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting. 3.4 TREE EXCAVATION A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further disturb base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped and containerized stock. Subsoil removed from excavations may not be used as backfill. C. Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. D. Drainage: Notify Landscape Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub pits. E. Fill a total of three (3) tree pits, located across the site, with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. 3.5 TREE PLANTING A. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1 inch above adjacent finish grades. 1. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of root balls and partially from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mixes. B. Organic Mulching: Apply 3-inch, average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches beyond edge of planting pit or trench. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. C. Wrap trees of 2-inch caliper and larger with trunk -wrap tape. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width, and securely attach without causing girdling. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect infestation; take corrective measures required before wrapping. Remove tree wrap when seasonal conditions permit. 3.6 TREE PRUNING A. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise indicated by Landscape Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. Shrub sizes indicated are sizes after pruning. 3.7 GUYING AND STAKING A. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip -out. Use a minimum of 2 stakes of length required to penetrate at least PLANTINGS 32 90 00 - 9 Copyright 2015 studiolNSITE JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins. CO SECTION 33 10 00 WATER UTILITIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and fittings for site water distribution and transmission lines and stub connections for building service lines B. Hydrants, Valves and Appurtenances C. Disinfection 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 00 00 Earthwork 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. B1.20.3 Dryseal Pipe Threads (inch) 2. B16 Pipes and Fittings B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. A21.5/C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems 2. A21.10/C110 Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings 3. A21.11/C111 Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 4. A21.50/C150 Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe 5. A21.51/C151 Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast 6. A21.53/C153 Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. A27 Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application 2. A48 Gray Iron Castings 3. A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless 4. A126 Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings 5. A197 Cupola Malleable Iron 6. A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength 7. A351 Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure -Containing Parts 8. A506 Alloy and Structural Alloy Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot -Rolled and Cold -Rolled 9. A536 Ductile Iron Castings 10. A575 Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades 11. B99 Seamless Copper Water Tube 12. D1248 Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable 13. D1330 Rubber Sheet Gaskets 14. D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Products 15. D3035 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR -PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter 16. D3139 Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 17. D3261 Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing WATER UTILITIES 00 00 00 - 1 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins. CO C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test in accordance with City of Fort Collins requirements. B. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on piping, valves and hydrants C. Provide piping complete with all fittings, jointing materials, supports, anchors joint restraint system and necessary appurtenances for watertight, fully operational water lines. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to all municipal codes and ordinances, laws and regulations of the City of Fort Collins and CDPHE Stormwater and/or Groundwater Discharge Permit. B. In case of apparent conflict, City of Fort Collins requirements govern over these specifications. C. In absence of State and local regulations, International Plumbing Code applies. D. NFPA Compliance: Install fire water systems in accordance with NFPA 24 "Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances." E. UL Compliance: Provide fire hydrants that comply with UL 246 "Hydrants for Fire -Protection Service," and are listed by UL. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, for shipping as follows: Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends, flange faces, and weld ends. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling. B. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division One Specifications. 1. PVC pipe has reduced PVC pipe has reduced flexibility and impact resistance as temperatures approach and drop below freezing. Extra care should be used in handling PVC pipe during cold weather. C. Deliver and store valves and accessories in shipping containers with labeling in place in accordance with AWWA C500. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Seal valve ends to prevent entry of foreign materials into valve body. F. During loading, transporting and unloading, exercise care to prevent damage to material. 1. Use nylon slings only 2. Do not drop pipe or fittings 3. Do not roll or skid against pipe already on ground 4. Repair any damage done to coating or lining 5. Handle per manufacturer's recommendations 6. Store rubber gaskets in cool dark location 7. Store all material on wood pallets or timbers WATER UTILITIES 00 00 00 - 3 2014 JVA 7. CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Intense project preplanning and schedule control are core strategies in the management plan for all of our projects. Some of the keys to schedule success are described below. Software Utilized Mortenson utilizes the Oracle Primavera P6 (version 8) scheduling package, a recognized industry standard. In over 30 years of CPM usage, we have developed a highly detailed corporate enterprise structure and utilize proprietary plug-in softwares that streamline the schedule creation and updating processes. Schedules will be delivered to you early, often and quickly as the project progresses. Collaborative Planning We view the schedule as a collaborative tool to identify and record the team's most efficient project completion strategy. With this in mind, we approach the schedule in an open manner, soliciting input and feedback from all project stakeholders, including your team, the design team, code authorities, and subcontractors to ensure we arrive at the most expeditious and cost effective solution. The schedule is a project team plan, not simply a Mortenson plan. Risk Mitigation and Certainty of Delivery Developing a CPM schedule with planned dates is only part of the key to a successful project delivery plan. We operate under the theory that "what gets measured gets done". Developing required production rates with the planned schedule, early in the preconstruction phase of the project, helps the entire project team understand the required pace of the project and identify risk areas. We are then able to intelligently allocate the resources that are necessary to achieve the plan and reduce risk. Production rate expectations are published in our bid packages to ensure our specialty trade subcontractors truly understand the schedule requirements for the project. The result is that uncertainty is removed, giving our subcontractors the ability to be proactive and remove unnecessary contingencies and tighten down their bids. Risk is further reduced during the construction phase by continuously measuring progress against these established production rates. Early identification of pinch points and challenges is key to managing the project's risk more effectively. Long before the work begins, the project team and our subcontractors will know exactly what level of production is expected, and will have already effectively planned how the team will meet those requirements. During installation, we measure on a daily basis how our actual production rates compare to our plan, ensuring that the project proceeds forward smoothly. We eliminate surprises for you and give you the confidence that the work will be completed according to or ahead of the planned completion dates. Look -Ahead Scheduling For this plaza project, we anticipate many phases with very specific milestones for closing and opening areas to the public. The best way to communicate this schedule is with a plan view of the plaza, shaded to show the various phases with milestone dates boldly stated for each phase. This is the best format to clearly communicate the schedule to the City, the neighboring business, the public at large, and our trade subcontractors. Within each phase, a construction schedule in traditional bar chart and tabular format is appropriate. Mortenson Building what's next. 19 JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO B. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 00 00 for work of this Section. Do not disturb trench bottom during excavation. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. C. Place bedding material in accordance with Section 31 00 00 at trench bottom, level fill materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth, compact to 95 percent. Protect from lateral displacement by placing embedment evenly on both sides of pipe D. Provide dewatering and backfill trench in accordance with Section 31 00 00 3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Comply with City of Fort Collins standards and specifications. Use the manufacturer's recommendations if the water district standards do not specifically apply. B. Comply with AWWA C600 for Ductile Iron Pipe installation and AWWA C605 for PVC Pipe installation. C. Cutting Pipe 1. Cut pipe to measurement taken at the site, not from the drawings 2. Cut pipe neatly without damage to pipe or cement lining 3. Cut smooth, straight, and at right angles to pipe axis 4. Dress and bevel end of cut pipe to remove roughness and sharp corners 5. Cut pipe with saw or abrasive wheel D. Provide an isolation or shutoff valve and union at the water connections to each fixture and unit of equipment, whether shown on the drawings or not E. Route pipe as indicated on plan and profile drawings. Install pipe to indicated elevations. F. Maintain minimum 4.5 feet depth of bury and maintain minimum grade for drainage. Maximum depth of 7.0 feet is allowed to avoid a local high point unless shown otherwise on the plans. Add additional soil in areas of future fill to provide minimal cover at all times. Report any variations from plan to Owner and Engineer. 1. Provide air release valve at all high points and blow -offs or hydrant at all low points. Coordinate locations and details with Engineer. 2. Where minimum depth cannot be maintained, provide a minimum of 2 inch of insulation board per 1 foot of cover not provided. Contractor must have Owner and Engineer approval prior to installation. a. Place insulation board over bedding material for the width of the trench G. Maintain separation of water main from sewer lines in accordance with the City of Fort Collins requirements, minimum 10 feet horizontal for sanitary sewer. Less separation may be acceptable with additional protections. H. Utility crossings 1. Whenever possible, lay water mains over sanitary and storm sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18-inch between invert of water main and crown of sewer. 2. If standard crossing detail is not available and above separation cannot be met, provide one continuous length of watertight sewer pipe 20' long centered on water main with joints between different pipes encased in 6-inch minimum of concrete and extending 6-inch either side of joint or encase sewer pipe in 6-inch of concrete completely around pipe, for not less than 10' either side of water main. WATER UTILITIES 00 00 00 - 5 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO B. Make pipe joints carefully and neatly C. Connect piping in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations D. Push -on joints 1. Lay pipe with bell ends facing the direction of laying except when Engineer authorizes reverse laying. 2. Lubricate joint surfaces immediately before completing the joint 3. Bevel spigot ends of field cut piping a. Groove spigot ends of field cut restrained joint piping if required by joint system 4. For PVC pipe, contractor to ensure that pipe is not inserted into the bell ends beyond the push line. a. Utilize EBAA Mega -Stop bell protection, or approved substitution, if necessary to ensure previously laid pipe joints are not impacted by ongoing installation. E. Mechanical Joints 1. Thoroughly lubricate gaskets and install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 2. If an effective seal is not obtained, disassemble joint, clean thoroughly, and reassemble 3. Do not over tighten bolts to compensate for poor installation 4. Carefully align holes in mechanical joints with restraint device to permit installation of the harness bolts 5. Install flange and mechanical joint pieces so the mechanical joint holes, as well as the flange holes, straddle the top centerline for horizontal piping, or the side centerline for vertical piping 3.08 THRUST BLOCKS A. Installation: 1. Thrust blocks shall be constructed at bends and fittings that require support due to unbalanced line thrust. Care shall be taken to ensure that outlets, cover bolts, nuts, clamps, and other fittings are accessible. A bond breaker shall be placed between the pipe and the thrust block to aid in future removal. If a large thrust block is to be placed, it shall be separated into sections by a suitable material. Bearing surface areas are minimum areas to bear against the undisturbed trench wall. If the soil bearing capacity is insufficient to provide adequate support based on minimum bearing areas established by City of Fort Collins then the minimum bearing area shall be increased to a size that shall ensure support restraint. In every instance, the thrust block shall bear against undisturbed earth. 2. Before placing concrete, equipment used in the mixing and transport shall be cleaned. Debris, water, or ice shall be removed from the area to be occupied by concrete. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen subgrade. Concrete shall be placed only in the presence of the City of Fort Collins Inspector unless inspection is waived prior to the placement. B. Formwork for Thrust blocks: 1. Forming for concrete thrust blocks and anchors shall be done by bulkheading around the shape of the thrust block or anchor with wood, burlap sacks, or reinforced paper sacks that are filled with sand or earth. Sacks shall be constructed of a size easily handled when full and left in place in the trench. Wood forms shall be removed before backfilling. 2. Horizontal struts or braces required for trench shoring shall not remain in concrete thrust blocks. Prior to placing concrete, the forms and ditch bank will be inspected and approved by City of Fort Collins. 3. When concrete is deposited against the ground without the use of forms, the ground shall be thoroughly moistened or other provisions made to prevent the ground from drawing water in from the concrete. C. Thrust block Curing Time: 1. Newly placed concrete shall be allowed to set undisturbed for a minimum of 24 hours. WATER UTILITIES 00 00 00 - 7 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with City of Fort Collins standards and specifications. Test each line at the Contractor's expense in the presence and to the satisfaction of City of Fort Collins inspectors. B. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions set forth by the referenced standards. C. Water Line Disinfection: 1. Comply with AWWA C651 and provide Engineer and Owner with results. 2. Flush water lines prior to disinfection, except when tablet method is used. Acceptable chlorine disinfectants are calcium hypochlorite granules, sodium hypochlorite solutions, and calcium hypochlorite solutions, and calcium hypochlorite tablets. 3. After the pipe is filled with water and chlorine, the chlorinated water shall be held in contact with the pipe for 24 hours. At the end of the 24 hour period, the water in the pipeline shall be tested by the local health authority having jurisdiction, or their designated representative, to ensure a residual chlorine content in compliance with City of Fort Collins requirements. The pipeline shall then be thoroughly flushed to remove the heavily chlorinated water. This activity requires a permit from the CDPHE WQCD prior to flushing. Comply with all provisions of the permit. Care shall be taken in flushing the pipeline to prevent property damage and danger to the public. Discharges of water from blowoff assemblies or other appurtenances shall be contained or discharged in a manner approved by City of Fort Collins and the CDPHE. 4. For fire lines, flush piping complying with NFPA 24. 5. If water in pipe does not meet the governing agency requirements, repeat disinfection procedure until acceptable. Furnish copies of acceptance forms from governing agency to Owner and Engineer. D. Hydrostatic Pressure Testing: 1. Provide all necessary pumping equipment, piping connections, pressure gauges with maximum of 5 psi increments, and other required equipment, facilities, and materials. 2. Test only using potable water in conformance with City of Fort Collins standards. 3. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. 4. Hydrostatic Test Conditions: At lowest point in the line or section under test, pressurize to 150 psi minimum. The pipeline shall be filled at a rate that does not create surges and does not exceed the rate at which air can be released. 5. While the test pressure is maintained, an examination shall be made of the pipeline and any leaks located and repaired. Pipe or fittings found to be faulty shall be removed and replaced. Leakage is not allowed through the bonnet of the line valve. A valve leaking through the bonnet may be repaired in place or removed and replaced. Cutting and replacement of pavement as well as excavation and backfilling may be necessary when locating and repairing leaks discovered during pressure testing. 6. After visible leaks are stopped, the full test pressure shall be maintained for 1 continuous hour. Allowable leakage for each section between line valves shall not exceed City of Fort Collins requirements. 3.14 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Comply with City of Fort Collins standards and specifications for placing water line in service. B. The inside of all pipe, valves, and fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free from blisters, loose mill scale, sand, and dirt when connected. 1. Wire brush, if necessary, wipe clean and keep joint contact surfaces clean until connection is complete WATER UTILITIES 00 00 00 - 9 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) non -pressure pipe for sanitary sewer with all jointing materials, fittings, and other appurtenances required for a complete installation 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 00 00 Earthwork 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D1784 Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Compounds B. ASTM D3034 PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe, Type PSM C. ASTM D2321 Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe D. ASTM D3212 Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals E. ASTM F477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe F. ASTM C150 Portland Cement G. ASTM C478 Precast Concrete Structures H. ASTM C497 Testing Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile I. ASTM A48 Gray Iron Castings J. ASTM A185 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement K. ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement L. ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates M. ASTM C478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One Specifications B. Shop Drawings: Provide piping layout and assembly drawings with fitting dimensions. Provide sufficient information to verify compliance with specifications C. Product Data: Provide data on pipe and gasket materials, pipe fittings, and accessories. Provide manufacturer's catalog information with recommended installation requirements SANITARY SEWERAGE 00 00 00 - ' 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO PART PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE, MANHOLES, AND ACCESSORIES A. Comply with City of Fort Collins standards and specifications. 2.02 PIPE MANUFACTURERS A. Certainteed Corporation B. Johns -Manville C. Or accepted substitution 2.03 PIPE MATERIALS A. Pipe and Fittings 1. 4 thru 12-inch, ASTM D3034, T-1 wall, SDR 35, non -pressure pipe. Use SDR 35 unless otherwise noted on plans a. Cell classification: ASTM D1784 2. Pipe length: 12-20 feet standard manufactured length for construction B. Joints: ASTM D3132 and F477 - Rubber gasket with one compression gasket ring, integral bell and spigot type 1. Designed to hold pipe in alignment, provide flexibility, separate the ends of pipe lengths, resist applied earth pressures, and provide fluid tightness 2. Rubber rings: ASTM F477 2.04 MATERIALS A. Plugs and Caps: Use pipe plugs or caps provided by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for pipe stubouts. B. Cleanouts: Provide as indicated, pipe extension to grade with ferrule and countersink cleanout plug. Provide round cast-iron access frame over cleanout, with heavy duty secured scoriated cover with lifting device cast with the word "SANITARY'. C. Reinforcement 1. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 Grade 60 2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 D. Concrete: Refer to Division Three Specifications if applicable 1. Minimum compressive strength: 4000 psi at 28 days 2. Cement: ASTM C150, Portland Cement, Type II 3. Aggregates: ASTM C33, free of deleterious substances E. Gaskets: ASTM C923 1. Mastic: FS SS-S-210A, 'RAM-NEK" or approved substitution 2. Rubber: Neoprene, 40± 5 hardness when measured by ASTM D2240, Type A durometer F. Frames and Castings: ASTM A48 with asphalt varnish coating hot dip applied at foundry, 6 mils thick Class 30b SANITARY SEWERAGE 00 00 00 - 3 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 2.08 SOIL MATERIALS A. Furnish pipe bedding and cover as specified in Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork. 2.09 IDENTIFICATION A. Underground Type Plastic Line Marker: Manufacturer's standard permanent, continuous -printed plastic tape with metallic core, intended for direct -burial service; not less than 6-inch wide x 4 mils thick. Provide green tape with black printing reading "CAUTION SANITARY SEWAGE LINE BURIED BELOW." Provide identification markers of one of the following: 1. Allen Systems, Inc. 2. Emed Co., Inc. 3. Seton Name Plate Corp. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Identification Marks: Clearly and permanently marked at not greater than 5 foot intervals with pipe diameter, PVC cell classification, manufacturer, plant, shift, ASTM, date designations and service designation B. Testing per ASTM D3034 1. Test products not manufactured in the U.S. at an acceptable laboratory in the U.S. PART 3 EXECUTION 191154 Ikg69ama-1101 I A. Examine pipe and fittings and do not use individual sections containing cracks, dents, abrasions, and other defects 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with City of Fort Collins standards and specifications. B. Install pipe in accordance with ASTM D2321 as modified herein or on the drawings C. Perform all laying and jointing in the presence of a City of Fort Collins inspector and other consultants as specified by quality control specifications. D. Cutting 1. Cut and bevel ends in accordance with manufacturer's standard recommendations 2. Machine cut ends smooth and square to proper dimensions 3. Do not cut with a cold chisel, iron pipe cutter, flame or any other method that may fracture the pipe or leave ragged, uneven edges 4. Remove burrs and wipe off all dust and dirt from jointing surfaces E. Pipe Laying 1. Inspect pipe and accessories for cracks and other defects before lowering into trench 2. Repair or replace any defective, damaged or unsound pipe 3. Remove all dirt and foreign material from the inside of pipe before laying 4. Check bedding for firmness and uniformity of surface immediately before laying each section of pipe SANITARY SEWERAGE 00 00 00 - 5 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO I. Backfill 1. Pipe Cover: a. Use specified bedding material for pipe cover material. Use cover material that is clean, free from organic materials, chucks of soil, frozen material or other unsuitable materials. b. Place and compact cover material starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards. Place in lifts which achieve density of 95%, ASTM D698 at a point 6-inch above top of pipe. 2. Conform to requirements of Section 31 00 00 J. Compaction 1. Compact backfill following requirements of Section 31 00 00 K. Water Line and Sanitary Sewer Crossings 1. Whenever possible lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18-inches between invert of water main and crown of sewer. 2. If above separation cannot be met, provide one continuous length of watertight sewer pipe 20 feet long centered on water main with joints between different pipes encased in 6-inch minimum of concrete and extending 6-inches either side of joint or encase sewer pipe in 6- inches of concrete completely around pipe, for not less than 10 feet either side of water main. 3. Water Mains Passing Under Sewers: If vertical separation less than 18-inches provide structural support for sewer 3.03 PRECAST STRUCTURE PREPARATION A. Comply with City of Fort Collins standards and specifications. B. Verify items provided by other section of Work are properly sized and located C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, ready for roughing into Work D. Verify excavation for manholes is correct E. Excavation and Backfill: Refer to Section 31 00 00 for requirements F. Rock Subbase: Remove water, excavate, and place 1 1/2 inch rock 6 inch minimum depth, vibrate for compaction 3.04 PLACING MANHOLE A. Comply with City of Fort Collins standards and specifications. B. Place base pad, trowel top surface level to accept manhole section with uniform bearing all around C. Place sufficient non -shrink grout on base to ensure watertight fit between first manhole section and base or place first manhole section directly in wet concrete D. Place manhole sections plumb and level, trim to correct elevations E. Clean ends of sections and place double mastic gasket F. Fill inside and outside of joint completely with non -shrink grout and trowel smooth SANITARY SEWERAGE 00 00 00 - 7 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 3.08 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLES A. Comply with City of Fort Collins standards and specifications. B. Maintain flow at all times C. Prior approval of proposed method for maintaining flow must be obtained from Engineer D. Cover area around new pipe with non -shrink grout and or waterstop gasket to ensure a watertight structure E. Make connection during low flow periods 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with City of Fort Collins standards and specifications. B. Exfiltration/Infiltration Test 1. Perform an exfiltration test on each reach of sanitary service and sewer pipe between manholes or discharge a. Test the first reach prior to backfilling and before installing any of the remaining pipe b. Provide all necessary piping between the reach to be tested and the water supply, together with all required materials and equipment c. Methods used, scheduling, and duration of tests shall be acceptable to Engineer d. Air testing may be allowed: Submit complete information to Engineer for review describing the proposed test method including the method of testing manholes before beginning testing 2. Procedure a. Block off all manhole openings except those connecting with the reach under test b. Fill the line i) Average depth: 10 feet above invert except as required by manhole depth ii) Maximum depth at lower end: 25 feet above crown iii) Minimum depth at upper end: 5 feet above crown c. Add and measure water as required to maintain a constant level i) Maximum exfiltration/infiltration: 0.039 gallons per inch of nominal diameter per hour per 100 feet of pipe. ii) Manholes considered section of 48-inch pipe iii) Maintain test for at least 2 hours or as long as necessary, in the inspector's opinion, to locate all leaks 3. Repair and retest any reach which exceeds the allowable exfiltration/infiltration C. Infiltration 1. At any time prior to expiration of the correction period, infiltration exceeds 0.039 gallons per inch of nominal diameter per 100 feet per hour, locate the leaks and make repairs D. Pipe Deflection Test 1. No sooner than 30 days after placement and compaction of backfill, but prior to placement of permanent surface materials, clean and mandrel each line to detect obstructions (deflections, joint offsets, lateral pipe intrusions, etc.) 2. Use a rigid mandrel with diameter of at least 95 percent of the pipes specified average inside diameter and a length of the mandrel circular portion at least equal to the nominal pipe diameter SANITARY SEWERAGE 00 00 00 - 9 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO SECTION 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping and concrete structures for storm sewer system, roof drainage, and culverts 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 00 00 Earthwork 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association B. ASTM C76 Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe C. ASTM C150 Portland Cement D. ASTM C443 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets E. ASTM C478 Precast Concrete Structures F. ASTM C497 Testing Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile G. ASTM A48 Gray Iron Castings H. ASTM A185 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement I. ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement J. ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates K. ASTM C478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections L. Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, Urban Drainage and Flood Control District (UDFCD) M. Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM C76 B. Comply with City of Fort Collins, Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, Urban Drainage and Flood Control District (UDFCD), and CDPHE Stormwater and/or Groundwater Discharge Permit and related storm design criteria. If standards conflict, the more stringent criteria shall govern. STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 00 00 00 - 1 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO C. Fittings: Furnish bends, ells, tees, wyes, couplings and other fittings of the same type and class of material having equal or superior physical and chemical properties as acceptable to the Engineer D. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76, 1. 12-inch RCP Class V, with modified tongue -and -groove compression gasket joints complying with ASTM C443. 2. 15-inch RCP Class IV (Class V when specified on plans), with modified tongue -and -groove compression gasket joints complying with ASTM C443. 3. 18-inch thru 24-inch RCP Class III (Class IV or V when specified on plans), with modified tongue -and -groove compression gasket joints complying with ASTM C443. 4. 24-inch thru 36-inch RCP Class II (Class III, IV or V when specified on plans), with modified tongue -and -groove compression gasket joints complying with ASTM C443. E. PVC Sewer Pipe: ASTM D3034, Type PSM, SDR 35 with PVC, elastomeric joints complying with ASTM D3212 using elastomeric seals complying with ASTM F477. F. HDPE Sewer Pipe: smooth interior, corrugated exterior piping conforming to ASTM D 2412, ASTM D 3212, AASHTO specifications M252 and M 294, joints to conform to ASTM F 477. G. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe: ASTM D3034, Type PSM, SDR 35 with PVC, elastomeric joints complying with ASTM D3212 using elastomeric seals complying with ASTM F477. 02 MATERIALS A. Comply with City of Fort Collins standards and specifications for public storm sewer products. B. Plugs and Caps: Use pipe plugs or caps provided by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for pipe stubouts. C. Cleanouts: Provide as indicated, pipe extension to grade with ferrule and countersink cleanout plug. Provide round cast-iron access frame over cleanout, with heavy duty secured scoriated cover with lifting device cast with the word "STORM". D. Reinforcement 1. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 Grade 60 2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 E. Concrete: Refer to Division Three Specifications 1. Minimum compressive strength: 4000 psi at 28 days 2. Cement: ASTM C150, Portland Cement, Type II 3. Aggregates: ASTM C33, free of deleterious substances F. Gaskets: ASTM C923 1. Mastic: FS SS-S-210A, 'RAM-NEK" or accepted substitution 2. Rubber: Neoprene, 40± 5 hardness when measured by ASTM D2240, Type A durometer G. Inlet Gratings and Manhole Rings and Covers 1. Cast iron, heavy duty traffic type, ASTM A48, Class 35B. Grind bearing surfaces to ensure flat, true surfaces 2. Provide bike/pedestrian-safe grates where such traffic is anticipated 3. Set grate on frame such that openings maximize inlet intake 4. Covers to seat at all points on ring 5. Covers to be cast with "STORM" in 2" tall flush letters 6. Manhole covers to receive asphalt varnish coating hot dip applied at foundry, 6 mils thick STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 00 00 00 - 3 2014 JVA 7. CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING J 5 w� �r 1 - Option A � 99rr I I Option B J. Phase#1 Design/ #1 Site Work C<msn.di. of ad.06.1 T.,bsm.ohi.r,y Systems (ITS) Permitting Ph. Phase #3 Design/ Permitting Constmalon of Engine Systems (ESI znw 2015 M J J A S O N D J F M A M J J A S 0 N D J F M A M J J A S 10 N I❑ LJ Start Ereawn of Finish Comple!e ITS Steel Eredion of ITS overhead MEP Steel Rough -Ins ITS Graphical Scheduling With scheduling being one of the key drivers of the Old Town Square Renovation, Mortenson will strive to capture its significance in a graphical schedule. As opposed to tabular or bar schedules, graphical schedules are powerful tools that can be utilized to clearly relay what activity is happening on a project at any given time. This is not just important for those constructing the project, but also for those affected by it. In Old Town Square all of the surrounding businesses will be able to look at the graphical schedule and become informed on the construction activities happening at their doorstep. These activities include items such as Fire Department access and areas of constraint. Graphical schedules will also help with the phasing of the Old Town Square Renovation with particular attention being paid to making sure that access to businesses is always kept open. Marteam n Example Schedule Mortenson has provided a sample schedule used in a previous project of similar size and scope for your review on the following page. The durations for each phase you have outlined in the RFP are definitely achievable and we look forward to exploring paths to improving the duration with the entire team. Building what's next. JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO 4. Made specifically for use with the specified inline drains and drain basins 5. Painted black 6. ASTM A-48-83 Class 30B or A536 grade 70-50-05 grade iron 7. Size indicated on the drawings 2.05 CONCRETE FABRICATION A. Comply with City of Fort Collins standards and specifications for public storm sewer products. B. Vault/Manhole Sections 1. Precast concrete dimensions as shown on plans 2. Minimum manhole inside diameter: 48 inch 3. Precast lid and Cones: Same or greater reinforcement and wall thickness as vault or manhole section with capability for H2O loading 4. Vault Joints: Shiplap or tongue and groove with double mastic gaskets, each joint to set equally and tightly 5. Manhole Joints: Keylock type with double mastic gaskets, each joint to set equally and tightly 6. Access opening: Minimum 24 clear or as indicated 7. Pipe connection: As indicated on Drawings 8. Pipe knockout: As indicated on Drawings 9. Precast concrete, monolithic base or cast -in -place base 10. Manhole steps: 12 inch on center, vertical alignment above largest bench or open area C. Grating and Metal Frame: As specified on drawings 2.06 SOIL MATERIALS A. Comply with City of Fort Collins standards and specifications for public storm sewer products. B. Furnish pipe bedding and cover as specified in Section 2300 — Earthwork. C. Riprap Materials: 1. Hard, dense, durable stone, angular in shape and resistant to weathering 2. Minimum specific gravity of 2.5 3. Material may be approved by Engineer, if by visual inspection, the rock is determined to be sound and durable 4. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish laboratory test results if the material appears to be marginal or unacceptable 5. Tested material shall meet the following requirements for abrasion resistance or compressive strength: Test Test Method Requirement Abrasion Resistance by Los Angeles ASTM C 535 50% loss, max Machine Unconfined Compressive Strength of AASHTO T 24 2500, min Drilled Core Specimen 6. Contractor shall provide a five ton sample of riprap indicating the compliance to required material soundness and gradation specifications if requested by the Engineer. 7. Gradation: Riprap % Smaller Than Given Intermediate Rock Mean Particle Designation Size By Weight Dimension Inches Size d5o Inches STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 00 00 00 - 5 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 Old Town Square Renovation 90% Construction Documents Fort Collins, CO B. Alignment and Grade 1. Except as indicated on the Drawings, lay all pipe straight and at a uniform grade. 2. Use batter boards to determine and check pipe subgrades. 3. Other methods of maintaining alignment and grade maybe acceptable if approved by the Engineer. 3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Inspect pipe and accessories for defects before lowering into trench. B. Replace any defective, damaged or unsound pipe. C. Carefully lower pipe, fittings, and accessories into the trench with derricks, ropes, and other suitable equipment to prevent damage. Do not dump or drop pipe or accessories into trench. D. Pipe embedment shall be as specified in Section 31 00 00 for pipe. E. Protect from lateral displacement by placing the specified pipe embedment material. F. Do not lay pipe in water, under unsuitable weather conditions or under unsuitable trench conditions G. Joint to form true and smooth line. H. Remove any pipe not making a good fit. I. Begin pipe laying at the lowest point unless reverse laying is accepted by Engineer. Utilize implements, tools and facilities as recommended by the manufacturer and/or catch basins if required to remove debris. K. Keep pipe clean during and after laying. L. During construction, close all open ends with watertight expandable type plugs. 1. At the end of each day's operations. 2. Whenever pipe ends are left unattended. 3. Deposit adequate backfill on pipe to prevent flotation. 4. Do not use wood, burlap or other similar temporary plugs. M. Remove and re -lay any pipe which has floated. 3.04 PRECAST STRUCTURE PREPARATION A. Verify items provided by other section of Work are properly sized and located B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, ready for roughing into Work C. Verify excavation for manholes is correct D. Excavation and Backfill: Refer to Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork for requirements E. Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves required by other sections STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 00 00 00 - 7 2014 JVA JVA, Incorporated February 6, 2015 90% Construction Documents D. Construct in conformance with standard drawings 3.09 MANHOLE RINGS AND COVERS A. Place rings in bed of non -shrink grout on top of manholes B. Ensure no infiltration will enter manhole at this location C. Carry non -shrink grout over flange of ring Old Town Square Renovation Fort Collins, CO D. Set top of ring flush with all surfaces subject to foot and vehicular traffic E. Set top of ring 6 inches above surfaces in open, unraveled, non -pedestrian areas F. Use precast grade rings for height adjustment 3.10 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLES A. Maintain flow at all times B. Prior approval of proposed method for maintaining flow must be obtained from Engineer C. Cover area around new pipe with non -shrink grout and or waterstop gasket to ensure a watertight structure D. Make connection during low flow periods 3.11 GROUT A. PREPARATION 1. Non -Shrink, Non -Metallic Grout, General Use a. Clean concrete surface to receive grout b. Saturate concrete with water for 24 hrs prior to grouting and remove excess water just prior to placing grout c. Cold weather conditions i) Warm concrete, substrate and base plate to 40 deg F, or above; store grout in warm area ii) Follow manufacturer's recommendations for cold weather application d. Hot weather conditions i) Use cold mixing water and cool base plate if possible, store grout in cool area ii) Follow manufacturer's recommendations for hot weather application e. Apply to clean, sound surface f. Apply latex bonding agent to hardened concrete, mix -in -grout, or as directed by Engineer 2. Epoxy Grout: Apply only to clean, dry, sound surface a. Patching cavities in concrete including, but not limited to, tie holes, and structural and equipment support B. APPLICATION 1. Non -Shrink, Non -Metallic Grout a. Mix in a mechanical mixer b. Use no more water than necessary to produce flowable grout c. Provide air vents where necessary to eliminate air pockets d. Place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions e. Where exposed to view finish grout edges smooth STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 00 00 00 - 9 2014 JVA • • MiI N C O R P O R A T R O GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION FORT COLLINS, COLORADO DITESCO 1315 Oakridge Drive, Suite 120 Fort Collins, Colorado 80525 Attention: Jill Burrel Project No. FC06652-125 September 23, 2014 400 North Link Lane I Fort Collins, Colorado 80524 Telephone,970-206-9455 Fax:970-206-9441 SCOPE This report presents the results of our Geotechnical Investigation for the proposed Old Town Square Renovation project in Fort Collins, Colorado. The purpose of the investigation was to evaluate the subsurface conditions and pro- vide foundation recommendations and geotechnical design criteria for the pro- ject. The scope was described in our Service Agreement (FC-14-0301, revised August 1, 2014). During the time of our investigation, plans for the proposed construction were preliminary. Recommendations presented in our report are limited to what structures and type of construction were being considered. Borings were also limited due to access and to avoid public disturbance. Our report should be re- viewed once plans are finalized to determine if additional investigations and/or recommendations should be considered. The report was prepared from data developed during field exploration, la- boratory testing, engineering analysis and experience with similar conditions. The report includes a description of subsurface conditions found in our explorato- ry borings and discussions of site development as influenced by geotechnical considerations. Our opinions and recommendations regarding design criteria and construction details for site development, foundations, floor systems, slabs - on -grade, and drainage are provided. Our conclusions are summarized in the following paragraphs. SUMMARY OF CONCLUSIONS 1. Soils encountered in our borings consisted of 5'/2 to 7 feet of sandy clay and clayey sand over sand and gravel. Sandstone bedrock was encountered at depths of 13 and 14 feet to the depths ex- plored. Groundwater was encountered at depths of 14 and 19 feet during drilling. Existing groundwater levels are not expected to sig- nificantly affect the proposed construction, but may affect drilled pier installation. DITESCO OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION CTL IT PROJECT NO. FC06652.125 INVESTIGATION Subsurface conditions were investigated by drilling two borings at loca- tions selected by Ditesco. The borings were drilled to an approximate depth of 30 feet. The approximate locations of the borings are shown on Figure 1. Our field representative observed drilling, logged the soils and bedrock found in the borings and obtained samples. Sampling was performed by driving a 2.5-inch O.D. modified California sampler, with blows of a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches. Groundwater measurements were taken during drilling. Borings were backfilled upon completion; no secondary groundwater measurements were tak- en. Summary logs of the borings, including results of field penetration resistance tests, are presented on Figure 2. Samples obtained during drilling were returned to our laboratory and visu- ally examined by the geotechnical engineer for this project. Laboratory analyses included moisture content, dry density, swell -consolidation, Hveem Stabilometer and Atterberg limits tests. Results of laboratory tests are presented in Appendix A and summarized in Table A -I. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Soils encountered in our borings consisted of 5'h to 7 feet of sandy clay and clayey sand over sand and gravel. The upper 5'/2 feet of soil in one boring (TH-1) was considered fill. Sandstone bedrock was encountered at depths of 13 and 14 feet to the depths explored. Groundwater was encountered at depths of 14 and 19 feet during drilling. Groundwater levels are expected to fluctuate sea- sonally. Existing groundwater levels are not expected to significantly affect the proposed construction, but may affect drilled pier installation. Further description of the subsurface conditions is presented on our boring logs and in our laboratory testing. DITESCO 3 OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION CTL IT PROJECT NO. FC06652-125 optimum moisture content. Clay soils should be moistened between optimum and 3 percent above optimum moisture content. The fill should be moisture - conditioned, placed in thin, loose lifts (8 inches or less) and compacted as de- scribed above. We should observe placement and compaction of fill during con- struction. Fill placement and compaction should not be conducted when the fill material is frozen. Site grading in areas of landscaping where no future improvements are planned can be placed at a dry density of at least 90 percent of standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 698, AASHTO T 99). Example site grading spec- ifications are presented in Appendix A. Water and sewer lines are often constructed beneath areas where im- provements are planned. Compaction of trench backfill can have a significant effect on the life and serviceability overlying structures. We recommend trench backfill be moisture conditioned and compacted as described in the Fill Place- ment section of this report. Placement and compaction of fill and backfill should be observed and tested by a representative of our firm during construction. Existing Fill The upper 5'/2 feet of soil in one boring (TH-1) was considered fill. Existing fill or what is considered uncontrolled fill or fill of unknown origin will be encoun- tered throughout the proposed construction area due to previous construction and utilities. The fill presents a risk of settlement or heave to improvements con- structed on the fill. Existing fill should not support foundations or floor slabs. We recommend complete removal and recompaction of the existing fill below the proposed structures. If the owner can accept the risk of movement associated with uncontrolled fill, partial removal and recompaction of the fill can be consid- ered. We recommend over -excavating at least 4 feet of the existing fill below DITESCO 5 OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION CTL IT PROJECT NO. FC06652-125 FOUNDATIONS The proposed improvements were preliminary during the time of our in- vestigation. In general, we believe spread footing foundations placed on natural, undisturbed soil and/or properly compacted fill can be used. Where loads ex- ceed those where footing foundations are not practical and/or to minimize poten- tial movements, a drilled pier foundation bottomed into bedrock can be used. Design criteria for spread footing and drilled pier foundations developed from analysis of field and laboratory data and our experience are presented below. Spread Footings Footings should be constructed on undisturbed natural soils or properly compacted fill (see the Fill Placement section of this re- port). All existing man -placed fill should be removed from under footings and within 2 feet around footings as described in the Exist- ing Fill section. Where soil is loosened during excavation, it should be removed and replaced with on -site soils compacted following the criteria in the Fill Placement section of this report. 2. Footings constructed on the natural soils and/or engineered fill can be designed for a net allowable soil pressure of 2,500 pounds per square foot (psf). The soil pressure can be increased 33 percent for transient loads such as wind or seismic loads. 3. Footings should have a minimum width of at least 16 inches. Foundations for isolated columns should have minimum dimen- sions of 18 inches by 18 inches. Larger sizes may be required de- pending on loads and the structural system used. 4. The soils beneath footing pads can be assigned an ultimate coeffi- cient of friction of 0.4 to resist lateral loads. The ability of grade beam or footing backfill to resist lateral loads can be calculated us- ing a passive equivalent fluid pressure of 300 pcf. This assumes the backfill is densely compacted and will not be removed. Backfill should be placed and compacted to the criteria in the Fill Place- ment section of this report. 5. Exterior footings should be protected from frost action. We believe 30 inches of frost cover is appropriate for this site. DITESCO 7 OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC06652-125 9. Formation of "mushrooms" or enlargements at the top of piers should be avoided during pier drilling and subsequent construction operations. 10. We should observe installation of drilled piers to confirm the sub- surface conditions are those we anticipated from our borings. Laterally Loaded Piers Several methods are available to analyze laterally loaded piers. With a pier length to diameter ratio of 7 or greater, we believe the method of analysis developed by Matlock and Reese is most appropriate. The method is an iterative procedure using applied loading and soil profile to develop deflection and mo- ment versus depth curves. The computer programs LPILE and COM624 were developed to perform this procedure. Suggested criteria for LPILE analysis are presented in the following table. TABLE A SOIL INPUT DATA FOR LPILE or COM624 Sandy Clay / Sand and Gravel Bedrock Clayey Sand Soil Type Stiff Clay w/o Free Water Sands Weak Rock Effective Unit Weight 0.075 0.08 0.08 (pci) Cohesive Strength, c 10 - - (psi) Friction Angle - 35 - Degrees Soil Strain, E50 (in/in) 0.007 - - p-y Modulus ks (pci) 500 125 - Er (Ib/in x 10) - - 0.5 RQD (%) - - 90 Krm - - 0.0005 The E50 represents the strain corresponding to 50 percent of the maximum princi- ple stress difference. DITESCO 9 OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION CTL IT PROJECT NO. FC06652-125 BELOW GRADE AREAS We understand no below grade areas are planned for the structures. For this condition, perimeter drains are not usually necessary. We should be con- tacted to provide foundation drain recommendations if plans change to include below -grade areas. FLOOR SYSTEMS In our opinion, it is reasonable to use slab -on -grade floors for the pro- posed construction. Existing fill was encountered in one boring during our inves- tigation and is likely throughout the site. Existing fill should be removed and re- placed as described in the Existing Fill section. Any fill placed for the floor sub - grade should be built with densely compacted, engineered fill as discussed in the Fill Placement section of this report. It is impossible to construct slab -on -grade floors with no risk of movement. We believe movements due to swell will be less than 1 inch at this site. If move- ment cannot be tolerated, structural floors should be used. Structural floors can be considered for specific areas that are particularly sensitive to movement or where equipment on the floor is sensitive to movement. Where structurally supported floors are selected, we recommend a mini- mum void between the ground surface and the underside of the floor system of 4 inches. The minimum void should be constructed below beams and utilities that penetrate the floor. The floor may be cast over void form. Void form should be chosen to break down quickly after the slab is placed. We recommend against the use of wax or plastic -coated void boxes. DITESCO 11 OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION CTL IT PROJECT NO. FC06652-125 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL City of Fort Collins 4. Underslab plumbing should be eliminated where feasible. Where such plumbing is unavoidable it should be thoroughly pressure tested for leaks prior to slab construction and be provided with flex- ible couplings. Pressurized water supply lines should be brought above the floors as quickly as possible. 5. Plumbing and utilities that pass through the slabs should be isolat- ed from the slabs and constructed with flexible couplings. Where water and gas lines are connected to furnaces or heaters, the lines should be constructed with sufficient flexibility to allow for move- ment. 6. HVAC equipment supported on the slab should be provided with a collapsible connection between the furnace and the ductwork, with allowance for at least 2 inches of vertical movement. 7. The American Concrete Institute (ACI) recommends frequent con- trol joints be provided in slabs to reduce problems associated with shrinkage cracking and curling. To reduce curling, the concrete mix should have a high aggregate content and a low slump. If desired, a shrinkage compensating admixture could be added to the con- crete to reduce the risk of shrinkage cracking. We can perform a mix design or assist the design team in selecting a pre-existing mix. PAVEMENTS Pavement areas will be included for this project. We understand brick pavers are likely going to be used over the majority of the pavement area. We conducted a Hveem Stabilometer test on the subgrade soils to evaluate the sub - grade characteristics. Based on our test, an R-Value of 19 was determined. The R-Value can be used in the design of the pavement system. We can assist in the design of the pavements if requested. SURFACE DRAINAGE Performance of foundations, flatwork and pavements are influenced by changes in subgrade moisture conditions. Carefully planned and maintained sur- face grading can reduce the risk of wetting of the foundation soils and pavement subgrade. Positive drainage should be provided away from foundations. Backfill DITESCO 13 OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC06652-125 If we can be of further service in discussing the contents of this report or in the analysis of the proposed construction from the geotechnical point of view, please contact the undersigned. CTL I THOMPSON, INC. by: p,OQ_Llc�� 4w�Q Spencer Sc arf%PRG576 Geotechnic 13�nartment Mara (2 Copies)`�pNA1 DITESCO OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION CTL IT PROJECT NO. FC06652-1 25 Thomas W. Finley, CPG Senior Geologist 15 9 1T :=13.6 =119 1=0.0 10 -� 50/4 15 WC=12.5 DD=114 200=38 50/1 20 r w w LL F- a w O 25 s0/1 30 35 40 45 DITESCO OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION CTL I T PROJECT NO. FCOW2-125 TH-2 LEGEND: 0 FILL; CLAY, SANDY TO SAND, CLAYEY, OCCASIONAL .40 ® GRAVEL, MOIST, STIFF, BROWN, GRAY 11/12 W C=11.8 DD=124 LL=23 PI=8 SAND, CLAYEY, MOIST, LOOSE TO MEDIUM DENSE, -200=42 DARK BROWN (SC) 8/12 SAND AND GRAVEL, SLIGHTLY SILTY TO SILTY, MOIST = D L TO WET, VERY DENSE, BROWN (SM, SP, GP) i}- 50/s 1 SANDSTONE, MOIST, HARD TO VERY HARD, GRAY, oQ ® BROWN (BEDROCK) 5016 DRIVE SAMPLE. THE SYMBOL 12/12 INDICATES 12 WC=21.7 1 BLOWS OF A 140-POUND HAMMER FALLING 30 INCHES DD=102 WERE REQUIRED TO DRIVE A 2.5-INCH O.D. SAMPLER -200=14 12 INCHES. 5012 BULK SAMPLE FROM AUGER CUTTINGS. 2 tu �Z WATER LEVEL MEASURED AT TIME OF DRILLING. F w w 50/2 � NOTES: 1. THE BORINGS WERE DRILLED ON AUGUST 21, 2014, USING 4-INCH DIAMETER CONTINUOUS -FLIGHT AUGERS AND A TRUCK -MOUNTED DRILL RIG. 2. THESE LOGS ARE SUBJECT TO THE EXPLANATIONS, LIMITATIONS AND CONCLUSIONS IN THIS REPORT. 3. WC - INDICATES MOISTURE CONTENT (%). DID - INDICATES DRY DENSITY (PCF). SW - INDICATES SWELL WHEN WETTED UNDER - OVERBURDEN PRESSURE (%). -200 - INDICATES PASSING NO. 200 SIEVE (%). LL - INDICATES LIQUID LIMIT. PI - INDICATES PLASTICITY INDEX. UC - INDICATES UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (PSF). SS INDICATES SOLUBLE SULFATE CONTENT (%). Summary Logs of Exploratory Borings FIGURE 2 IF Mo- ---------- -- -------- - ------- -----_--- __ Mum 1 Wo."1• 11• 1 1 1 •. 1 1 .a Sample of SAND, SILTY, GRAVELLY From TH - 1 AT 9 FEET DITESCO OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION CTLIT PROJECT NO.FC06662-125 GRAVEL 38 % SAND 42 % SILT & CLAY 20 % LIQUID LIMIT % PLASTICITY INDEX % Gradation Test Results FIGURE 4 TABLE SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TESTING ,1111 Hill BORING DEPTH FEE MOISTURE CONTENT % DRY DENSITY PCF ATTERBERG LIMITS SWELL TEST RESULTS* PASSING NO.200 SIEVE (% R- VALUE DESCRIPTION LIQUID LIMIT I PLASTICITY INDEX SWELL % APPLIED PRESSURE (PSF) S-1 0-4 19 SAND, CLAYEY SC TH-1 4 13.6 119 0.0 500 FILL, SAND, CLAYEY TH-1 9 3.0 20 SAND, SILTY, GRAVELLY SM TH-1 14 12.5 114 38 SANDSTONE TH-2 2 11.8 124 23 8 42 SAND, CLAYEY SC TH-2 14 21.7 102 14 SANDSTONE * NEGATIVE VALUE INDICATES COMPRESSION. DITESCO OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION CTLIT PROJECT NO. FC06652-125 Page 1 of 1 SAMPLE SITE GRADING SPECIFICATIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This item shall consist of the excavation, transportation, placement and compac- tion of materials from locations indicated on the plans, or staked by the Engineer, as necessary to achieve building site elevations. 2. GENERAL The Geotechnical Engineer shall be the Owner's representative. The Geotech- nical Engineer shall approve fill materials, method of placement, moisture con- tents and percent compaction, and shall give written approval of the completed fill. 3. CLEARING JOB SITE The Contractor shall remove all trees, brush and rubbish before excavation or fill placement is begun. The Contractor shall dispose of the cleared material to pro- vide the Owner with a clean, neat appearing job site. Cleared material shall not be placed in areas to receive fill or where the material will support structures of any kind. 4. SCARIFYING AREA TO BE FILLED All topsoil and vegetable matter shall be removed from the ground surface upon which fill is to be placed. The surface shall then be plowed or scarified to a depth of 8 inches until the surface is free from ruts, hummocks or other uneven fea- tures, which would prevent uniform compaction by the equipment to be used. 5. COMPACTING AREA TO BE FILLED After the foundation for the fill has been cleared and scarified, it shall be disked or bladed until it is free from large clods, brought to the proper moisture content and compacted to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density as deter- mined in accordance with ASTM D 698 or AASHTO T 99. 6. FILL MATERIALS On -site materials classifying as CL, SC, SM, SW, SP, GP, GC and GM are ac- ceptable. Fill soils shall be free from organic matter, debris, or other deleterious substances, and shall not contain rocks or lumps having a diameter greater than three (3) inches. Fill materials shall be obtained from the existing fill and other approved sources. DITESCO OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION A-t CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC06652-125 IF Fill slopes shall be compacted by means of sheepsfoot rollers or other suitable equipment. Compaction operations shall be continued until slopes are stable, but not too dense for planting, and there is no appreciable amount of loose soil on the slopes. Compaction of slopes may be done progressively in increments of three to five feet (3' to 5') in height or after the fill is brought to its total height. Permanent fill slopes shall not exceed 3:1 (horizontal to vertical). 10. DENSITY TESTS Field density tests shall be made by the Geotechnical Engineer at locations and depths of his choosing. Where sheepsfoot rollers are used, the soil may be dis- turbed to a depth of several inches. Density tests shall be taken in compacted material below the disturbed surface. When density tests indicate that the dry density or moisture content of any layer of fill or portion thereof is below that re- quired, the particular layer or portion shall be reworked until the required dry density or moisture content has been achieved. All areas, both cut and fill, shall be finished to a level surface and shall meet the following limits of construction: A. Overlot cut or fill areas shall be within plus or minus 2/10 of one foot. B. Street grading shall be within plus or minus 1/10 of one foot. The civil engineer, or duly authorized representative, shall check all cut and fill areas to observe that the work is in accordance with the above limits. 12. SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION STAKING Observation by the Geotechnical Engineer shall be continuous during the place- ment of fill and compaction operations so that he can declare that the fill was placed in general conformance with specifications. All site visits necessary to test the placement of fill and observe compaction operations will be at the ex- pense of the Owner. All construction staking will be provided by the Civil Engi- neer or his duly authorized representative. Initial and final grading staking shall be at the expense of the owner. The replacement of grade stakes through con- struction shall be at the expense of the contractor. 13. SEASONAL LIMITS No fill material shall be placed, spread or rolled while it is frozen, thawing, or dur- ing unfavorable weather conditions. When work is interrupted by heavy precipi- DITESCO OLD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATION A-3 CTL IT PROJECT NO. FC06652-125 I N C O R P O R A T R O ASBESTOS MATERIALS SURVEY OLD TOWN SQUARE FORT COLLINS, COLORADO Prepared for: Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority 19 Old Town Square Suite 230 Fort Collins, 80524 Attention: Mr. Todd Dangerfield CTL Project No. FC06842.000-221 February 12, 2015 400 North Link Lane I Fort Collins, Colorado 80524 1 Telephone: 970-206-9455 ACRONYMS Commonly Used Acronyms ACBM Asbestos Containing Building Materials ACM Asbestos Containing Materials AHERA Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act EPA Environmental Protection Agency HA Homogeneous Area HEPA High Efficiency Particulate Air HVAC Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning NESHAP National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants O&M Operations and Maintenance OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCM Phase Contrast Microscopy PLM Polarized Light Microscopy RBM Regulated Building Material TEM Transmission Electron Microscopy TSI Thermal System Insulation FORT COLLINS DOWNTOWN DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY OLD TOWN SQUARE ASBESTOS SURVEY CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC06842.000-221 • Ceiling systems • Thermal systems • Miscellaneous systems • Exterior systems 3.1 Asbestos Survey and Sample Collection Mr. Levi Stockton of CTL (certified Colorado inspector #16687) collected bulk samples of the suspect ACM in a random and representative manner as defined by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) statistical sampling methods. The collected samples were packaged in sealed and labeled containers. 3.2 Asbestos Sample Analysis The bulk samples of suspected asbestos materials were submitted to Scientific Analytical Institute, Inc., (SAI) in Greensboro, North Carolina for analysis. SAI is accredited by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP Lab Code 200664-0). Individual layers of the samples were analyzed by PLM (Polarized Light Microscopy) to determine asbestos type and content. Unused portions of the samples were archived for sixty days, unless the client requested special handling. 4.0 ASBESTOS REGULATORY CRITERIA The asbestos NESHAP (40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M) regulates asbestos fiber emissions and asbestos waste disposal practices. It also requires the identification and classification of existing building materials prior to demolition or renovation activity. Under NESHAP, asbestos -containing building materials are classified as either friable, Category I non - friable or Category II non -friable ACM. Friable ACM are materials containing more than 1 % asbestos and, when dry, may be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressure. Category I non -friable ACM includes packings, gaskets, resilient floor coverings and asphalt roofing products containing more than 1% asbestos. Category II non -friable ACM are any nonfriable materials other than Category I materials that contain more than 1 % asbestos. Friable ACM is considered regulated ACM (RACM). Category I and Category II non -friable ACM which is in poor condition and has become friable, or which will be subjected to drilling, sanding, grinding, cutting or abrading and which could be crushed or pulverized during any time prior to or during renovation or demolition activities (including demolition waste handling), are also considered RACM. Friable materials reported by PLM analysis as containing "trace" asbestos must be treated as ACM unless they have been re- analyzed by the PLM point count method and determined to have asbestos content of one percent or less. FORT COLLINS DOWNTOWN DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY 2 OLD TOWN SQUARE ASBESTOS SURVEY CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC06842.000-221 Mai, Mortenson construction Old Town Square Renovation - Final IMP Construction Fort Collins, CO March 09, 2015 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT ESTIMATE Project QtyO GSF Estimate Report DESCRIPTIONQUANTITY UNIT TOTAL Undefined Items in Sect (S1) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 00 10 - DIRECT COST OF WORK GENERAL CONDITIONS 10010,045 CONTRACTOR GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.0 LS 266,856 266,856 TOTAL 01 0010 - DIRECT COST OF WORK GENERAL CONDITIONS 266,856 TOTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 266,856 TOTAL Undefined items in Sect (S1) 266,856 10 - SITE FOUNDATIONS 03 00 00 - CONCRETE 3000.005 24" DIA CAISSONS TO LIGHT POLES 28.0 LF 122.47 3,429 3000.010 18" DIA CAISSONS TO LIGHT POLES 75.0 LF 119.67 8,976 3000.070 SPREAD FOOTING TO PIERS - 6 X 6 11.1 CY 363.47 4,038 3000.075 PIERS FOR SYSTEMS POLES 8.0 EA 274.41 2,195 3000.080 CONCRETE FOOTER TO SOUTH WALL 45.0 LF 92.51 4,163 3000.300 CONCRETE GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.0 LS 3,665.51 3,666 TOTAL 03 00 00 - CONCRETE 26,467 TOTAL FOUNDATIONS 26,467 PLUMBING 22 00 00 - PLUMBING 22000.100 "SUBCONTRACTOR PLUMBING BUDGET TO 1.0 LS 9,753.00 9,753 SITE"` - MORTENSON COST BREAKOUT 22000.110 PIPE AND CONNECTIONS TO WALL HYDRANTS 1.0 EA 22000.115 SHUT OFF VALVE FOR GAS FIREPLACE 1.0 EA TOTAL 22 00 00 - PLUMBING 9,753 TOTAL PLUMBING 9,753 ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL 26000.000 —SUBCONTRACTOR ELECTRICAL AND 1.0 LS 495,484 495,484 LIGHTING SYSTEMS BUDGET- SITE"' 26000.005 1" CONDUIT 1,995.0 LF 26000,010 1/2" CONDUIT 1,995.0 LF 26000.015 1/2" CONDUIT RISER - ASSUME 15 HIGH 15.0 LF 26000.020 3/4" CONDUIT 32.0 LF 26000.025 ALL CONDUITS - USED AND SPARES AS INCL INDICATED ON DRAWINGS 26000.030 DISCONNECTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INCL PER SCHEDULE 26000.035 DUPLEX RECEPTACLE WITH METAL LOCKABLE 1.0 EA CONVER TO PLANTERS - GFCI 26000.040 DUPLEX RECEPTACLES MOUNTED TO POLES - 60.0 EA GFCI 26000.045 DUPLEX RECEPTACLES MOUNTED TO WALL - 3.0 INCL GFCI 1506E023 Old Town Square Renovation 90 CD.est Page 1 8. QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL Old Town Square Fountain Mockups —The plaza project will have unique paving and other architectural elements. The mockups will be built by the tradesmen that will be performing the work, especially foremen or lead men, so as to verify the tradesmen understand exactly what is required and the materials, means, and methods needed to meet the quality standards required. Quality Leadership Team (QLT)—The QLT is a diverse group of individuals from across Mortenson's Denver Operating Group who meet regularly to discuss the current state as well as the future direction of the Quality Initiative. This group performs monthly audits of all projects to ensure the project teams are complying with the Project Management Best Practices Manual. These monthly audits allow the QLT members to maintain open communication and close contact with the project team members, allowing them to identify areas of need by individual projects as well as the Operating Group as a whole regarding Quality. This information is used to help guide the direction of the Quality Initiative. Construction is a people management business. The proper management of the people involved in the project, irrespective of who they work for, is the key to a successful project. It is Mortenson's desire to develop and maintain a truly integrated, collaborative team atmosphere with the subcontractors, suppliers, Fort Collins and the entire design team. To achieve quality work, our experience has taught us to view quality as a proactive, preventative effort rather than a "policing" post - work control effort. This quality management effort begins during the subcontractor/supplier contract negotiations, continues through submittal procurement and review, and is at its highest level during the construction phase inspection, mock-up and pre -final inspection activities. Three-phase Inspection Process Powerful in its ability to leverage the expertise of the collective project team, Mortenson's three-phase inspection process is an integral part of our formal Quality Control Plan that is a staple on all Mortenson projects, regardless of size. At its core, the preparatory meetings, initial inspections and follow-up inspections are based on early planning and ensuring work is put in place, as intended ... the first time. Preparatory Meeting - Mortenson will lead an in- depth review of the relevant submittals, contract documents, mockups, and integrated work plans ensure all expectations are fully communicated and understood. 2. Initial Inspection - Our inspection process requires that detailed inspections (using Quality Checklists created as a product of the Preparatory Meetings) are carried out immediately after new scopes of work begin. These inspections ensure the design intent is properly realized in the field. 3. follow-up Inspection -As we work on a particular scope our team members will formally inspect the work to ensure that all of the work meets the quality expectations established during the planning phase. Old Town Square Fountain MortennA Building what's next. CTL I Thompson, Inc. performed services in a manner consistent with the level of care and expertise exercised by members of the asbestos inspection and assessment profession. CTL I Thompson, Inc. does not imply or guarantee that every suspect asbestos materials on or in the building has been identified or sampled. No warranty, express or implied, is made. Historically, asbestos has been used extensively in the United States. This inspection is intended to identify those components that are reasonably suspect and hence most likely to be asbestos materials in quantities subject to regulation based on existing industry and regulatory standards. If additional asbestos materials or asbestos - suspect materials are encountered, work should be stopped and an asbestos inspection performed. If we can be of further service discussing the contents of this report, please call us. Very truly yours, CTL I THOMPSON, INC. Levi Stockton, EIT Environmental Engineer Dana L. Harris Environmental Department Manager FORT COLLINS DOWNTOWN DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY OLD TOWN SQUARE 4 ASBESTOS SURVEY CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC06842.000-221 APPENDIX A WEECYCLE LEAD BASED PAINT REPORT FORT COLLINS DOWNTOWN DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY OLD TOWN SQUARE ASBESTOS SURVEY CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC06842.000-221 Lead Based Paint Testing was performed in accordance with HUD Guidelines as revised 11/97 with the following procedural notes: t) Room equivalents are generally listed by number, starting with the 1" room of the main entrance and proceeding clockwise on each floor. Walls are listed in each room by letter with wall "A" facing the street of address, proceeding clockwise to "B, C, D", etc. Multiple components (i.e. windows or doors) are listed moving left to right along each wall. z) Substrates are labeled as Brick, Concrete, Drywall, Plaster, Stucco, Wood or Metal. Concrete block or cinder block or CMU are labeled concrete. Wallpapered surfaces are examined by XRF for concealed lead based paint with postulated substrates. In addition to on -site analysis, leaded dust wipes, bulk paint chip, and/or lead in soil samples may have been collected of suspect surfaces (at the discretion of the risk assessor). The samples were analyzed, for lead content, by Reservoirs Environmental Services, Inc., an AIHA ELLAP (Environmental Lead Laboratory Accreditation Program) approved laboratory. EPA, 40 CFR 745.80 Subpart E, Renovation, Repair and Painting Rule: Under the rule, beginning in April 2010, contractors performing renovation, repair and painting projects that disturb lead -based paint in homes, child care facilities, and schools built before 1978, must be certified and must follow specific work practices to prevent lead contamination. All painted surfaces must be assumed "positive" for lead -based paint unless tested and confirmed to be "negative". Target Housing is noted as a home or residential unit built on or before December 31, 1977, except: • Housing built for the elderly or persons with disabilities )unless a child less than 6 years old lives or is expected to live in the house or unit); or • Zero -bedroom dwellings (studio apartments, hospitals, hotels, dormitories, etc.) The EPA — Renovate, Repair and Painting Rule defines a "child- occupied facility" as a building, constructed before 1978 and meeting all three of the criteria below: • Visited regularly by the same child, under 6 years of age. • The visits are on at least two different days within any week (Sunday through Saturday period), provided that each day's visit lasts at least 3 hours. • Combined weekly visits last at least 6 hours, and the combined annual visits last at least 60 hours. Child -occupied facilities may be located in a public or commercial building or in target housing. These facilities include schools, child care facilities, and daycare centers FEDERAL LEAD -BASED PAINT STANDARDS Paint— Definition of Lead -Based Paint Paint or other surface coatings that contain at least: y 1 milligram per square centimeter (mg/cm2) of lead; 0.5 percent lead; or 5,000 parts per million lead by dry weight. CTL Thompson Environmental Old Town Square Kiosk — LBP Report Old Town Square Ft. Collins, CO. Shop Entrys CTL Thompson Envirnomental WEC# 15-11235 XRF Model: XLp301A Serial# 25097 Sourced: 6/01/2013 Inspector: Chris Schiechl Cert# 17260 Exp. 3/13/2015 Reading No Time Type Sequence COMPONENT SUBSTRATE SIDE CONDITION COLOR ROOM TYPE Results PbC 2 1/28/201512:26 PAINT Final CALIBRATE Positive 1.1 3 1/28/201512:27 PAINT Final CALIBRATE Positive 1 4 1/28/201512:28 PAINT Final CALIBRATE Positive 1.1 55 1/28/2015 13:15 PAINT Final CEILING DRYWALL INTACT GREY ENTRY 1 Negative 0.03 56 1/28/2015 13:16 PAINT Final WALL DRYWALL A INTACT GREY ENTRY 1 Negative 0 57 1/28/201S 13:16 PAINT Final WALL DRYWALL B INTACT GREY ENTRY 1 Negative 0 58 1/28/2015 13:16 PAINT Final WALL DRYWALL C INTACT GREY ENTRY 1 Negative 0 59 1/28/2015 13:17 PAINT Final WALL DRYWALL D INTACT GREY ENTRY 1 Negative 0 60 1/28/2015 13:17 PAINT Final BASEBOARD WOOD A INTACT VARNISH ENTRY 1 Negative 0 61 1/28/201S 13:17 PAINT Final DOOR METAL A INTACT GREY ENTRY 1 Negative 0 62 1/28/2015 13:17 PAINT Final DOOR CASING METAL A INTACT GREY ENTRY 1 Negative 0 63 1/28/2015 13:18 PAINT Final WALL WOOD A INTACT WHITE IENTRY1 Negative 0 64 1/28/2015 13:18 PAINT Final DOOR CASING METAL C INTACT GREY ENTRY 1 Negative 0 65 1/28/2015 13:19 PAINT Final DOOR METAL C INTACT GREY ENTRY 1 Negative 0 66 1/28/2015 13:19 PAINT Final WNDW CASING METAL D INTACT GREY ENTRY 1 Negative 0 67 1/28/2015 13:20 PAINT Final CEILING DRYWALL INTACT GREY ENTRY 2 Negative 0 68 1/28/2015 13:20 PAINT Final WALL DRYWALL A INTACT GREY ENTRY 2 Negative 0 69 1/28/2015 13:20 PAINT Final WALL DRYWALL B INTACT GREY ENTRY 2 Negative 0 70 1/28/2015 13:21 PAINT Final WALL DRYWALL C INTACT GREY ENTRY 2 Negative 0 71 1/28/2015 13:21 PAINT Final WALL DRYWALL D INTACT GREY ENTRY 2 Negative 0 72 1/28/2015 13:21 PAINT Final BASEBOARD WOOD D INTACT VARNISH ENTRY Negative 0 73 1/28/2015 13:22 PAINT Final WNDW CASING METAL B DETERIORATED GREY ENTRY Negative 0 74 1/28/2015 13:22 PAINT Final DOOR METAL B DETERIORATED GREY ENTRY 2 Negative 0 75 1/28/2015 13:22 PAINT Final DOOR METAL C DETERIORATED GREY ENTRY 2 Negative 0 76 1/28/2015 13:22 PAINT Final DR. JAMB METAL C DETERIORATED GREY ENTRY 2 Negative 0 77 1/28/201513:24 PAINT Final DOOR METAL A DETERIORATED GREEN EXTERIOR Negative 0 78 1/28/2015 13:25 PAINT Final DOOR CASING METAL A INTACT GREEN EXTERIOR Negative 0 79 1/28/201513:27 PAINT Final CALIBRATE Positive 1 80 1/28/201513:28 PAINT lFinal CALIBRATE Positive 1 81 1/28/201513:29 PAINT Final ICALIBRATE Positive 1.1 Old Town Square Ft. Collins, CO. Kiosk CTL Thompson Envirnomental WEC# 15-11235 XRF Model: XLp301A Serial# 25097 Sourced: 6/01/2013 Inspector: Chris Schiechl Cert# 17260 Exp. 3/13/2015 Reading No Time Type Sequence 1COMPONENT SUBSTRATE SIDE CONDITION COLOR ROOM TYPE Results PbC 34 1/28/201S 12:57 PAINT Final ICEILING DRYWALL DETERIORATED WHITE MENS BATH Negative 0 35 1/28/201512:58 PAINT Final WALL CERAMICTILE A INTACT WHITE MENS BATH Negative 0.02 36 1/28/2015 12:58 PAINT Final DOOR PANEL METAL C INTACT BLUE MENS BATH Negative 0 37 1/28/2015 13:00 PAINT Final WALL WOOD F INTACT GREEN MENS BATH Negative 0 38 1/28/201513:00 PAINT Final WALL TRIM WOOD F INTACT GREEN MENS BATH Negative 0 39 1/28/2015 13:01 PAINT Final SOFFIT DRYWALL F INTACT GREEN MENS BATH Negative 0 40 1/28/2015 13:02 PAINT Final DOOR METAL G INTACT GREEN MENS BATH Negative 0 41 1/28/201513:06 PAINT Final IWALL DRYWALL A INTACT WHITE INT Negative 0 42 1/28/201513:06 PAINT Final WALLTRIM WOOD A INTACT BROWN INT Negative 0 43 1/28/2015 13:07 PAINT Final DOOR METAL A INTACT BROWN INT Negative 0 44 1/28/2015 13:07 PAINT Final DR. JAMB METAL A INTACT BROWN INT Negative 0 45 1/28/2015 13:07 PAINT Final WNDW CASING METAL A INTACT BROWN INT Negative 0 46 1/28/2015 13:08 PAINT Final WNDW FRAME METAL A INTACT BROWN INT Negative 0 47 1/28/201513:08 PAINT Final WALL DRYWALL C INTACT WHITE INT Negative 0 48 1/28/201513:09 PAINT Final DOOR METAL C INTACT BROWN INT Negative 0 49 1/28/2015 13:09 PAINT Final DOOR CASING WOOD C INTACT BROWN INT Negative 0 50 1/28/2015 13:10 PAINT Final CEILING BEAM METAL C INTACT BROWN INT Negative 0 51 1/28/2015 13:10 PAINT Final WNDW CASING METAL F INTACT BROWN INT Negative 0 52 1/28/201513:11 PAINT Final WALL DRYWALL G INTACT WHITE INT Negative 0 53 1/28/201513:11 PAINT Final WALL DRYWALL G INTACT GREY INT Negative 0 54 1/28/201513:12 PAINT Final FLOOR CERAMIC TILE INTACT BEIGE INT Negative 0.01 79 1/28/201513:27 PAINT Final CALIBRATE Positive 1 80 1/28/201513:28 PAINT Final CALIBRATE Positive 1 81 1/28/201513:29 PAINT Final CALIBRATE Positive 1.1 Table 1 Asbestos Survey Sample Log Old Town Square Project, Fort Collins, Colorado CTL I Thompson Project No. FC06842.000-221 Building HA# Sample No. Date Sampled Description Asbestos Content NESHAPS Classification 1 F-1-FT-1 1/28/2015 Red -brown floor tile, gray -brown grout None Detected Non -ACM 2 F-2-DWJC-2 1/28/2015 Drywall, mud, and tape, orange peel texture None Detected Non -ACM Building 23 3 F-3-TXT-3 1/28/2015 Orange peel texture None Detected Non -ACM F-3-TXT-4 1/28/2015 Orange peel texture None Detected Foyer F-3-TXT-5 1/28/2015 Orange peel texture None Detected 4 F-4-WG-6 1/28/2015 Black window glaze None Detected Non -ACM 5 F-S-BM-7 1/28/2015 Brick mortar None Detected Non -ACM 6 F-6-CLK-8 1/28/2015 Brown -gray caulk None Detected Non -ACM 1 K-1-DWJC-1 1/28/2015 Drywall, mud, and tape, upstairs None Detected Non -ACM 2 K-2-INS-2 1/28/2015 White insulation, paper backing. Inside NW wall None Detected Non -ACM 3 K-3-FT-3 1/28/2015 Red -brown 6" floor tile,gray-brown grout, gray cement None Detected Non -ACM K-4-TXT-4 1/28/2015 Orange peel texture None Detected 4 K-4-TXT-5 1/28/2015 Orange peel texture None Detected Non -ACM K-4-TXT-6 1/28/2015 Orange peel texture None Detected 5 K-5-WG-7 1/28/2015 Black window glaze, window interiors None Detected Non -ACM 6 K-6-INS-8 1/28/2015 Tan insulation, upstairs ceiling - vent pipe None Detected Non -ACM 7 K-7-DS-9 1/28/2015 Gray duct sealant None Detected Non -ACM 8 K-8-OT-10 1/28/2015 4" ceramic tile, white w/ blue specs, grout, adhesive None Detected Non -ACM 9 K-9-CLK-11 1/28/2015 Tan/white caulk on hand dryers in restrooms None Detected Non -ACM Kiosk 10 K-10-CLK-12 1/28/2015 Tan/gray caulk - restroom wall None Detected Non -ACM 11 K-11-CLK-13 1/28/2015 White caulk, yellow foam between metal frame edges None Detected Non -ACM 12 K-12-WG-14 j 1/28/2015 Clear window glaze, window exteriors None Detected Non -ACM 13 K-13-CLK-25 1/28/2015 Tan/white caulk on panel next to restrooms None Detected Non -ACM 14 K-14-OT-16 1/28/2015 Weathered black window foam/glaze - east side None Detected Non -ACM 15 K-15-DWJC-17 1/28/2015 Drywall, mud, tape, texture. Overhang. None Detected Non -ACM K-16-TXT-18 1/28/2015 Drywall texture on overhang None Detected 16 K-16-TXT-19 1/28/2015 Drywall texture on overhang None Detected Non -ACM K-16-TXT-20 1/28/2015 Drywall texture on overhang None Detected 17 K-17-OT-21 1/211/2015 Transite panel None Detected Non -ACM 18 K-18-CBA52 11/28/2015 Covebase and tan adhesive one Detected Non -ACM 19 K-19-OT-23 1/29/2015 cement, green paint. Overhang. None Detected Non -ACM Bulk Asbestos Analysis By Polarized Light Microscopy EPA Method: 600/R-93/116 and 600/M4-82-020 Customer: CTL Thompson Attn: Levi Stockton 400 N Link Lane Fort Collins CO 80524 Project: Old Town Square KVL"L bCadca1066xa Lab Order ID: 1501960 Analysis ID: 1501960_PLM Date Received: 2/2/2015 Date Reported: 2/11/2015 Sample 1D Description Fibrous Non Attributes Asbestos -Fibrous 7nD Samp47D Lab Notes Components Components Treatment Red -brown floor tile, gray- Gray, Brown F-1-FT-1 -A brown grout Non Fibrous None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous M01960PLt1 1 ceramic it Crushed Red -brown floor tile, gray- Brown F-1-FT-1 - B brown grout Non Fibrous None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLM 31 grout Crushed F-2-D WJC-2 Drywall, mud, and tape, Beige, Tan - A orange peel texture None Detected 20% Cellulose 79% Other Fibrous Heterogeneous 1% Fiber Glass dryivall/tape: none detect; 1501960PLM 1 mud: none defect Crushed F-2-DWJC-2 Drywall, mud, and tape, Beige orange peel texture Non Fibrous - B None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous texture Crushed 1501960PLA4 33 Beige F-3-TXT-3 Orange peel texture Non Fibrous None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLtf 3 Crushed Beige F-3-TXT-4 Orange peel texture Non Fibrous None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous Crushed 1501960PLM a Beige F-3-TXT-5 Orange peel texture Non Fibrous None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLM 5 Crushed Gray, Black F-4-WG-6 Black window glaze Non Fibrous None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLM 6 .%aam with paint Ashed Disclaimer: Due to the nature of the EPA 600 method, asbestos may not be detected in samples containing low levels of asbestos. We strongly recommended that analysis of floor files, vermiculite, and/or heterogeneous soil samples be conducted by TEM for confirmation of -None Detected" by PLM. This report relates only to the samples tested and may not be reproduced, except in full, without the written approval of SAL This report may not be used by the client to claim product eadossemmt by NVLAP or any other agency of the U.S. government. Estimated MDL is 0.1%. Charmel Dozier (42) Pfa02tl51113 018 Analyst Approved/Signatory Scientific Analytical Institute, Inc. 4604 Dundas Dr. Greensboro, NC 27407 (336) 292JS88 Page 1 of 6 Customer: CTL Thompson 400 N Link Lane Fort Collins CO 80524 Project: Old Town Square Bulk Asbestos Analysis By Polarized Light Microscopy EPA Method: 600/R-93/116 and 600/M4-82-020 Attn: Levi Stockton Nvt"L*4 efn xma6ao Lab Order ID: 1501960 Analysis ID: 1501960_PLM Date Received: 2/2/2015 Date Reported: 2/11/2015 Sample ID Description Fibrous Non Attributes Asbestos -Fibrous Lab Sample 7D Lab Notes Components Components Treatment Beige K-4-TXT-4 Orange peel texture Non Fibrous None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLh4/2 Crushed White, Tan K-4-TXT-5 Orange peel texture Fibrous None Detected 25% Cellulose 75% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLM 13 drynvall wilh paint only Ashed White, Tan K-4-TXT-6 Orange peel texture Fibrous None Detected 25% Cellulose 75% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLM 1! &p°all Will paint only Ashed Black window glaze, window Black K-5-WG-7 interiors Non Fibrous None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLM IS Dissolved Tan insulation, upstairs ceiling Tan K-6-INS-8 -vent pipe Fibrous None Detected 1% Fiber Glass 99% Other Heterogeneous Ashed 1501960PIAI 16 Gray K-7-DS-9 Gray duct sealant Non Fibrous None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLM 17 Dissolved K-8-OT-10 - 4" ceramic tile, white w/ blue White specs, grout, adhesive Non Fibrous A None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLA4 18 ceramic file Crushed K-8-OT-10 - 4" ceramic tile, white w/ blue White specs, grout, adhesive Non Fibrous B None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLM 37 grout Crushed Disclaimer. Due to the nature of We EPA 600 method, asbestos may not be detected in samples containing law levels or asbestos. We strongly recommended that analysis of floor tiles, vermiculite, and/or heterogeneous sell samples be conducted by TEM for confirmation of `None Detected" by PLM. This report relates only to the samples tested and may not be reproduced, except in full, without the written approval of SAL This report may not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any other agency of We U.S. government. Estimated MDL is 0.1%. Charmel Dozier (42) PS-012r151/154418 Analyst Approved Signatory Scientific Analytical Institute, Inc. 4604 Dundas Dr. Greensboro, NC 27407 (336) 292-3888 Page 3 of 6 Bulk Asbestos Analysis By Polarized Light Microscopy EPA Method: 600/11-93/116 and 600/M4-82-020 Customer: CTL Thompson Attn: Levi Stockton 400 N Link Lane Fort Collins CO 80524 Project: Old Town Square L NVLAPLabeadu200664-0 Lab Order ID: 1501960 Analysis ID: 1501960_PLM Date Received: 2/2/2015 Date Reported: 2/11/2015 Sample ID Description Fibrous Non Attributes Asbestos -Fibrous Lab Sample ID Lab Notes Components Components Treatment Weathered black window Black K-14-OT-16 foam/glaze - east side Non Fibrous None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLM 24 Ashed K-15-DWJC Drywall, mud, tape, texture. White, Tan, Beige A Overhang. None Detected 20% Cellulose 79% Other Fibrous Heterogeneous -17 - 1% Fiber Glass drywall/tape: none detect; mud: none detect Crashed 1501960P1_41 25 K-15-DWJC Drywall, mud, tape, texture. Beige Overhang. Non Fibrous -17 - B None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLM 41 texture Crushed K-16-TXT- Drywall texture on overhang White Non Fibrous 18 None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLM14 26 Crushed K-16-TXT- Drywall texture on overhang White Non Fibrous 19 None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous Crashed 1501960PLM 27 K-16-TXT- Drywall texture on overhang White Non Fibrous 20 None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous Crushed 1501960PLM 28 Gray K-17-OT-21 Transite panel Fibrous None Detected 25% Cellulose 75% Other Heterogeneous 1501960PLM 29 Ashed K-18-CBA- Covebase and tan adhesive Brown Non Fibrous 22 - A None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous covebase Dissolved 1501960PLM 30 Disclaimer: Due to the nature of the EPA 600 method, asbestas may not be detected in samples containing low levels of asbestos. We strongly recommended That analysis of floor tiles, vermiculite, and/or heterogeneous soil samples be conducted by TEM for confirmation of `None Detected" by PLM. This report relates only to the samples rated and may not be reproduced, except in full, without the written approvalof sAl. This report may not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by WLAP or any other agency of the U.S. government. Estimated MDL is 0.1%. Channel Dozier (42) P-F-0 r1511154018 Analyst Approved Signatory Scientific Analytical Institute, Inc. 4604 Dundas Dr. Greensboro, NC 27407 (336) 292-3888 Page 5 of 6 Meet: Levi Stockton dress: 400 North Link Lane, Ft Collins, CO one: 970-206-9455 [: 1970-2136-9441 P.O.S. Date Submitted: Old Town Square Please composite drywall samples IIIQY YV YMII�. Use Column 'B'for your contact into To See an Example Click the bottom Example Tab. Enter samples between "«" and "»" Begin Samples with a "« *above the first sample and and with a "»" below the last sample. Only Enter your data on the first sheet'Sheetl' FC06842.000-221 Nate: Data 1 and Data 2 are optional 1/30/2015 0:00 fields that do not show up on the otfhcial report, however they will be included PLM in the electronic data returned to you 1 week to facilitate your reintegration of the report d Version 1-15-2012 Sdent/rrc • Analytical Institute 46 ' ve Greensboro, NC 27407 Phone: 336.292.3888 Fax: 336.292.3313 Email: tabtlsallab.com s Number Data I Sample Description Onto F-1-FT-1 Red -brown floor tile, gray -brown grout F-2-DWJC-2 Drywall, mud, and tape, orange peel texture F-3-TXT-3 Orange peel texture . F-3-TXT-4 Orange peel texture F-3-TXT-5 Orange peel texture F-4-WG-6 Black window glaze F-5-SM-7 Brick mortar F-6-CLK-8 Brown -gray caulk K-1-DWJC-1 Drywall, mud, and tape, upstairs K-2-INS-2 White insulation, paper backing. Inside NW wall K-3-FT-3 Red -brown 6" floor ble,gray-brown grout, gray cement K-4-TXT-4 Orange peel texture (U K4-TXT-5 Orange peel texture �� K4-TXT-6 Orange peel texture 0 K-5-WG-7 Black window glaze, window interiors K-6-INS-8 Tan insulation, upstairs ceiling - vent pipe K-7-DS-9 Gray dud sealant K-8-OT-10 4" ceramic tile, white wl blue specs, grout, adhesive G1 PARTNERING EXPERIENCE City of F,ortCollins _�� 0 APPENDIX D CTL I THOMPSON CERTIFICATIONS FORT COLLINS DOWNTOWN DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY OLD TOWN SQUARE ASBESTOS SURVEY CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC06842.000-221 Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment ASBESTOS CERTIFICATION* This certifies that Levi Stockton Certification No.: 16687 has met the requirements of 25-7-507, C.R.S. and Air Quality Control Commission Regulation No. 8, Part B, and is hereby certified by the state of Colorado in the following discipline: Building Inspector* Issued: December 24, 2014 Expires: December 24, 2015 * This certificate is valid only with the possession of a current Division -approved training course certification in the discipline specified above. A. thorized HPCD Representative Course Instructor Course Date: 0 • • Windy Ridge Enterpl Safety & Industrial Hygier Education & Services This is to certify th Dana Harris Has successfully completed a Refresher Trainint of the Toxic Substance Act (TSCA) Title II and Fulfills the Requirement of Colorado AQCC Regulation No. 8 In: Audrey -Lyn Stockton 2/18/2014 Certification Expiration Date: 2/18/2015 Certificate #: BIR-02182014 4 Building Inspector ■ ■ ■ =WWINDY RIDGE ENTERPRISES, LLC 10318 Miner's Lake Road Fort Collins, CO 80524 Phone: 97.0-568-3916 9. PARTNERING EXPERIENCE Partnering Following the kick off meeting, Mortenson recommends a partnering event where the collective team will create Project Specific Success Factors. The team will also identify major construction stumbling blocks, team concerns over budget, schedule, quality and safety issues, long lead material procurement concerns, and delivery strategies. Critical issues will be prioritized by probability, potential project impact, cost and assigned to the team member best equipped to attack the issue. In our 20+years experience managing projects through the process, this collaborative management approach has proven to be highly effective in focusing the entire project team on achieving common goals, resulting in faster project delivery, higher quality, reduced costs and greater satisfaction. We have found no better way to create a structure that supports the maintenance of a shared project vision. Examples of Partnering in Action include Mortenson's efforts at Woodward Lincoln Campus Phase 1 and Stapleton Redevelopment. Mortenson team members Tony Perdue and Joe Shinagle participated in formal and informal Partnering Sessions on both projects. These sessions played an important role in developing trust Woodward Lincoln Campus Project Charter Integrated Project Delivery to Provide On Time, On Budget with Great Quality and Zero Injuries Seamless Transition for Woodward and Their Cccemers Transparent Gdleborative Team Committed to Timely Decision Making and Having Fun Apply Lean Principles to Design and Construction Process Highest Possible Woodward Satisfaction with Design and Construction Teams High Performing, Flexible Facility Using LEED Pent pies integrated, Cost Ellective, Bast Vales Solution Driven Process Respectful of Community and Our Environmental Stewardship .V>-WOODWARD Martwi� Woodward Lincoln Campus Phase 1 Jennifer Ray Program Manager Woodward (729) 482-5817 among members of the project team and breaking down barriers to effective team communication. Sessions at Woodward included key team members from Mortenson, our design partners, and key subcontractors. These sessions included specific discussions on how the team was communicating and targeted specific issues for resolution. It provided an open forum to openly communicate and address concerns. The informal sessions were held in conjunction with the formal sessions and provided team members the opportunity to get to know each other outside the context of the project, which further developed relationships that lead to the success of the project. The experiences at Stapleton were similar in who was included, however, the first formal session was facilitated by a third party and subsequent sessions were developed by the Project Core Team Members from Mortenson, the Design Team and the Owner Team. Due to the size and complexity of the project, these sessions were valuable in breaking down communication barriers and developing key relationships to allow team members access to the people they needed to be communicating with in real time. f9lt P` 12300 Customer Specified Suceess factors hWa/N IRN.Inrr�r�rv+'e'urN...r+*��Y .SMvny Q'1 CMf6Yr4AxiM1 NIlII r,-�.At�aeiu fl,Mrrhl..n� nw.r�n rswpvrwl (su.ret� Ravpn ! t — �'` «..-1!91 Stapleton Redevelopment Charlie Nicola Sr. Vice President, Construction Forrest City (303) 382-1800 MortennBuilding what's next. 27 pppp-- 609L� SAFETY RECORD City of Fort Collins TRADE SUBCONTRACTOR FOB Collins ��. \ | 11. TRADE SUBCONTRACTOR Proactive Subcontractor Management Mortenson takes pride in the strength of our relationship with our subcontractors. Furthermore, we celebrate their continued success and work with them to achieve new heights. Mortenson has implemented the Star Awards Program where we reward our subcontracting partners for the many things that they do right. Award categories include Safety, Quality, In addition to the Star Awards, we provide an annual platform where subcontractors evaluate their for large general contractors, we believe this unique evaluation process helps us become a better partner and manager to our subcontractors from one project to MortennmMM Building what's next son 12. FINANCIAL STATEMENT Financial Statement Mortenson's financial statement has been mailed for delivery directly to Todd Dangerfield in a confidential envelope. Morten1111sBuilding what's next. 31 13. BONDING COMPANY REFERENCE Bonding Capacity Mortenson has co -surety relationships with Federal Insurance Company and Travelers Casualty & Surety Company of America. Federal, our lead surety, has an A.M. Best rating of A++, Category XV, and has provided bonds for Mortenson since 1977. Travelers has an A.M. Best rating of A+, Category XIV. Our surety broker is Willis of Minnesota, Inc. Currently, Mortenson's sureties have established a single - project bonding capacity of $800 million without additional review, and aggregate bonding capacity of $3.0 billion. Mortenson currently has available capacity to undertake additional bonded work totaling $1.7 billion. Reference the attached letter dated November 25, 2014 for further information. Mortenson has never failed to complete a contract. Mortenson's sureties have never been called upon to complete a contract, and have never taken over performance of a contract for Mortenson. Mortenson has never failed to defend and discharge any claim made against a payment bond issued by our sureties Name of Bonding Company: Federal Insurance Company A.M. Best Rating: A++, Category XV State of Incorporation: Indiana State of Incorporation: Connecticut 15 Mountain View Road Warren, New Jersey, 07059 Rick A. Ciullo - Chief Operating Office, Chubb Surety 908-903-2000 908-903-3656 Fax Travelers Casualty and Surety Co. of America A.M. Best Rating: A+, Category XV State of Incorporation: Connecticut One Tower Square, 2SH5 Hartford, Connecticut 06183 Thomas M. Kunkel - Executive Vice President & CEO of Bond FPS 860-954-0149 860-277-6888 Fax Mortemdd Building what's next. I .,- 13. BONDING COMPANY REFERENCE Chubb POWER-- Fetdel'al Insurance Company Attn: Surety Department. OF Vigilant Insurance Company 15 Mountain View Road Surety ATTORNEY pacific Indemnity Company Warren, NJ 070S9 Know All by These Presents, That FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, ar Indiana corporaliDn. VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPA14YI a New York corporation. and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY. a Wisconsin corporation, do each hereby constitute and appoint Brien D_ Carpenter, Heather R. Goedtel, Jessica Hoff, Nicole Langger, Dennis G. Loots, Craig Olmstead, Laurie Pflug, Jill N. Swanson, Michelle Sylvester and Nina E. Wersteln of Mlnneapolts, Minnesota each as hleb the and Iawf al AtY:nxy i. Fad ill aatufe uttW such dellgaaWn In their namn and to airs their corporate seals b end 00m rm and on tr elr behalf as 8uretr Ihrrer ct onerwee, Bonds and undeMWwVs and other wrkirgi obligatory in the nature thereof foster Ufan Ml bonds) given a ex=AM In M ODVM of Wsk- 811, NW any insinlmeshb wmendrlp a aaeiilg the same. and mnaents to the mDddK66on or arcraeon of any F1sl[smenl rekffw In in said bonda or obtgat". In Yrfb,eaa Whereof, sail rECISRAL INSURANC= COMPANY,VICfNY LART INSURANCE COMPA, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY haai each SMOZed and aea Nd u ex r:esenta end atfeca trcf c«poate aeab on this 17"' By a April, 2014, f1 Di of K CCNoroe. Assisbrrt Smictary STATE OF NEW JERSEY Sk Ccuny of SaTerie an tn'a 17'" day a April, 2014 bdoT me, a Naay Pub k of Nca Jersey, personally carve Doran M. Chlaos, to me UVwn Ili W Atcbeirt Sacreary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY. VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, "PACIFIC- INDEMNITY COMPANY. Me oompanias wt,idh ®mcula6 na :aognaag PORar drAmemgy, er d der Baird Diann M Chlorin, WN by me duly swom dd depose and say Clot tone is Assistant Seovetary of FEDERAL eCSURANCE COMPANY, V05ILWT INSURANCE COMPANY, amd PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY and VCVS Ve Wperale seals T W,, t'GI no Boats oflteod W the ro egefng Powmr of Attorney an sudr, -rpaaa seats and were Te�eto armed by autho'ry of vie By, Lnas a sand Compadm and that srw signed said Parer of ADama'J as Assistant Seaebry or said Companies by Lae aulm* and that she is accuafelod W*1 Do Ind a. Noms, Jr., and 10w^ horn to be Vca President of said C4M0QAI ; and bat o-A SWAINIM or DVM B. Nam A. subsuthed fo sob Pw.m of Ahern" is in ft gww% fand.mtn9 W Dard B, Nees. X. and was tnerato Uosatbed try auTodry U sad By- taws and in eepment's per N>larw Sort KATHEItIl J. ADE AAR K�TARr rIOTAkr PUBLIC Of NEW J1SEY(�`-- �.No 2916do5 �p118L1C C.omnim iat b"= Jut' 16, 2014 Naary Futile CERTIFICATION E== R3m the By Laws of FEDERAL I14SUPA.NCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PAC WX INDEMNITY COWA14Y 'AN pea m of attorney for and on berms or pm Company mar and studl be emeu-ed in the mane ane a, fetid of ez Co mxary, otter try 9si Chaiman or the Predrlant a a V6ce Prrsidvra a r Aasisuct View P,rsWmt pirdy Al, the Sectcrary or an AsaLsmd Srvelary, under Ihei respecfna dea4utions, The sgnalVe of sad%o'rc + may be erg,awe, pn'ded ar Flhograplro The signalom ad ewA of the f bAv dtfevs'. ChaimuM1 Pms:tenL any Vice P;vwdeit any Assftntart Vm President, any Secetary, any Assistant Stave .y and Oe seal or the Company may to M.and by besimila W any wow of honer or to art' cLnt3S'db rda5rg I hemto appofrtng AswStAni Secambries or Attarney7• ifn- Fact hr Plrrpoeea omit' oI woaa+a and aticaf^ bona•. and unde%trvs and *%lief w Wmp obligatoryin ere naarm t'emof, and aM sadt power of Woomey a artyr-sta aesAng.=ch lacse�m dgnature or lxdmse seat cNal the vJd and Di:dkg upon the C rnpany and any sucn powtf so ex=Ama Ned Odbtied by cie n taarir:a signature and tacomle seal Mal be valid and bnd39 uPon ne Company wan rs:epobt to any bond or KWolaury to we 4Is adxtwd- 1, Dorm M Chbros, Assstant Seam twy or FEDERAL WSf1NANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INMI ANCE COWANY- and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY (the'Companlrs'h do hereby ooAify M {I} the tonagatng arias of the By- Laws of to Companies Is tlxe and cared, {r the Ccrpaies are oar lim mad and authatud to aansad surety bushms In all 5b d Ina Under Stsi a of An enca and a,e DiWld of Colu hne and am altnorized by eie U.S Treasury Crpwimrt fulhoc, Federal and VVA A me baxsed+n ore U.s. Vagln Isbndl, and Federal Is kznzed h Mrerican Samoa. Deem, Puerto Mm. and each d the Pnwianoas DF Cariada exempt Prize Edwa(d bland: awt no the loregaag Powrr of Atonney h Yue, tuned and in NI force and eftL Gnrcn under my hard ad aaaFa d said Co nsv,ies at Women. NJ pus November 25. 2014 C tee.. Down M. cnbroa, As7istaRl s+petin lit -HE ELENT YOU YAW TO HIM US OF A curd. LOrarY TfK A471,1ENVOTY OF THIS VOW DR NDTIFY US Of ANY Until WThSR R,F,ASE CW+IAC: US AT ADDRESS ILMEDABOAOROT T 003.3rao Fa mx1,39% a r tun Mortensl Building what's next. iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiillillillillillillilliillillillillillillilliillillillillilillillillillillillilliillillillillillillilliillillilillillillilim 14. INSURANCE COMPANY Can coverage be extended for work on this project? Yes Can coverage be increased? Yes Can City be listed as an additional insured? Only on the general liability and auto liability policies. We cannot list the city as an additional insured on the workers compensation policy. Current claims that will affect coverage limits? No. Insurance Certificate Please see the attached certificate on the following pages. Name and address of firm's insurance agent: Willis of Minnesota, Inc. 1600 Tower 1600 Utica Avenue South, Suite 600 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55416 Mr. Brian Carpenter - Senior Vice President 763-302-7162 763-302-7200 Fax MorteNMM Building what's next. 34 Mai. Mortenson construction Old Town Square Renovation - Final GMP Construction Fort Collins, CO March 09, 2015 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT ESTIMATE Project Qty:O GSF Estimate Report DESCRIPTIONQUANTITY UNIT TOTAL 10 - SITE 02 41 00 - DEMOLITION 22000.005 REMOVE EXISTING RAILINGS AND SALVAGE 475.0 LF 5.40 2,565 FOR RE -USE 22000,010 REMOVE EXISTING CANOPY STRUCTURE AND 1.0 LS 6,500.00 6,500 SALVAGE 22000.015 DEMO AND HAUL OFF EXISTING KIOSK 910.0 SF 10.00 9,100 22000.020 DEMO EXISTING PLANTER WALLS 266.0 LF 15.00 3,990 22000.025 DEMO EXISTING PLAY SURFACE AREA 525.0 SF 4.00 2,100 22000.030 REMOVE AND SALVAGE MISC. SITE 1.0 LS 8,000.00 8,000 FURNISHINGS 22000.035 PALLETIZE PAVERS FOR FUTURE USE BY FORT NIC 0.55 COLLINS PA - BY OWNER 22000.040 REMOVE TRASH ENCLOSURE 250.0 SF 10.00 2,500 22000-045 SELECTIVE DEMO COOPERSMITHS EXISTING 42.0 LF 90.10 3,784 STEEL ARCHWAY 22000.050 REMOVE EXISTING BRICK PAVERS 48,896.0 SF 0.90 44,006 22000.055 REMOVE EXISTING SITE CONCRETE 4,973.0 SF 3.15 15,665 22000,060 SAWCUTTING FOR TRANSITIONS AND 1.0 LS 2,250.00 2,250 REMOVALS 22000.065 ROLL -OFF RENTAL 6.0 MO 1,212.75 7,277 22000.080 CAP AND ABANDON IN PLACE EXISTING 1.0 LS 6,000.00 6,000 UTILITIES - ALLOWANCE 22000,100 REMOVE AND PATCH -BACK ASPHALT PAVING 180.0 SF 9.72 1,750 22000.105 REMOVE TREES NOTED AS 12, 14. 15 & 16 ON 4.0 EA 250.00 1,000 TREE MITIGATION PLAN - PER DDA DIRECTION 22000,110 REMOVE EXISTING LANDSCAPE FROM 1.0 LS 4,500.00 4,500 PLANTERS TO BE REMOVED TOTAL 02 4100 - DEMOLITION 120,987 31 00 00 - EARTHWORK 32300.115 MOBILIZATION / DEMOBILIZATION FOR 1.0 LS 2,196.25 2,196 EARTHWORK TOTAL 3100 00 - EARTHWOR K 2,196 31 22 00 - GRADING 32130.015 FINE GRADE SITE TO +/- .1' 55,000.0 SF 0.56 30,800 TOTAL 31 22 00 -GRADING 30,800 31 23 00 - EXCAVATION & FILL 32130.020 MISC. SITE WORK EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 1.0 LS 29,110.68 29,111 32130.025 FLASHFILL BACKFILL STREET TRENCH 27.0 CY 83.58 2,257 TOTAL 3123 00 - EXCAVATION & FILL 31,367 31 25 00 - EROSION & SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 22000.005 VEHICLE TRACKING CONTROL PAD 1.0 EA 875.00 875 22000.010 LOAD OUT ROLL OFFS 10.0 EA 250.00 2,500 22000.015 ROCK SOCK STREET PROTECTION 8.0 EA 150.00 1,200 22000.020 INLET PROTECTION 25.0 EA 85.00 2,125 TOTAL 31125 00 - EROSION & SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 6,700 33 00 00 - SITE UTILITIES 1506E023 Old Town Square Renovation 90 CD.est Page 3 15. CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT Mortenson is prepared to sign the City of Fort Collins'vertical construction contract with no exceptions. Mortenm Building what's next. 34 16. CM/GC FEES Mortenson will prepare its detailed estimate of the project with in-house estimating staff, in support of Joe Shinagle. The estimate will include detailed take -off of the materials and application of production labor, general conditions labor, and field support labor (such as for pedestrian control). When the estimate is con- verted to the GMP, the contingency will be outside of the GMP. All allowances will be described in detail for reconciliation during the construction. We have extensive knowledge of labor costs for the various trades, and can estimate the cost of the work based on self- performed or subcontracted scopes. Our proposed rates for the project: General Contractor Overhead: 8.0% Subcontractor: 15.0% - 25% Permanent Materials: 5.0. Equipment: GC Fees Apply Labor: 40.0% Carpenter $18-$22 Laborer $14-$19 Foreman $26-$30 Equipment Operator $22-$26 Concrete Mason $18-$24 Brick Mason $18-$28 MorteNAM Building what's next. 35 SECTION 00430 SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS List all subcontractors for the work items listed below and all subcontractors performing over 10% of the contract. ITEM Fountain Systems Electrical Plumbing SUBCONTRACTOR _High Country Pools TBD Standard Plumbing SECTION 00500 AGREEMENTFORMS 00510 Notice of Award 00520 Agreement 00530 Notice to Proceed SECTION 00510 NOTICE OF AWARD DATE: March 11, 2015 TO: Mortenson Construction Inc. PROJECT: 8031 Old Town Square Renovation CM/GC OWNER: FORT COLLINS DOWNTOWN DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY (hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER") You are hereby notified that your Bid dated March 9, 2015 for the above project has been considered. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded an Agreement for 8031 Old Town Square Renovation CM/GC. The Price of your Agreement is Two Million Eight Hundred Sixty -Eight Thousand One Hundred Eighty -Seven Dollars ($2,868 187.00). Three (3) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany this Notice of Award. Three (3) sets of the Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise made available to you immediately. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen (15) days of the date of this Notice of Award, that is by March 27, 2015. 1. You must deliver to the OWNER three (3) fully executed counterparts of the Agreement including all the Contract Documents. Each of the Contract Documents must bear your signature on the cover of the page. 2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as specified in the Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions (Article 5.1) and Supplementary Conditions. Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider your Bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited. Within ten (10) days after you comply with those conditions, OWNER will return to you one (1) fully -signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached. Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority OWNER By: SECTION 00520 AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the 11th day of March in the year of 2015 and shall be effective on the date this AGREEMENT is signed by the City. Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority (hereinafter called OWNER) and Mortenson Construction Inc. (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR) OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is defined as the construction of the 8031 Old Town Square Renovation CM/GC and is generally described in Section 01010. The Old Town Square Renovation project encompasses approximately 55,000 SF of infrastructure repair and replacement across DDA and City owned property. The project includes paver replacement, new utility installation, drainage improvements, a new stage, fountain systems, irrigation replacement, lighting enhancements, demolition, business owner access and coordination and landscaping. ARTICLE 2. ENGINEER/ARCHITECT The Project has been designed by studiolNSITE, Inc., 3457 Ringsby Court, Suite 223, Denver, CO 80216, who is hereinafter called ARCHITECT. Ditesco shall assume all duties and responsibilities and will have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Agreement is being administered by Ditesco, 1315 Oakridge Drive, Suite 120, Fort Collins, CO 80528. ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT TIMES 3.1 Milestone 1 shall be achieved within One Hundred Twenty -One (121) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times comment to run as provided in the General Conditions. The Work shall be Substantially Complete within One Hundred Fifty-Two(152) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the General Conditions and completed and ready for Final Payment and Acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions within Thirty (30) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. 3.2. Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1. above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expenses and difficulties involved in proving in a legal preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as Liquidated damages for delay (but not as penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amounts set forth hereafter. 1) Milestone 1: Two Hundred Fifty Dollars ($250) for each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the One Hundred Twenty -One (121) calendar day period for completion of Milestone 1. 2) Substantial Completion: Five Hundred Dollars ($500) for each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the One Hundred Fifty -Two (152) calendar day period for Substantial Completion of the Work until the Work is Substantially Complete. 3) Final Acceptance: After Substantial Completion, Four Hundred Dollars ($400) for each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the Thirty (30) calendar day period for Final Payment and Acceptance until the Work is ready for Final Payment and Acceptance. ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds as follows: Two Million Eight Hundred Sixtv-Eight Thousand One Hundred Eiohty-Seven Dollars ($2,868,187.00), in accordance with Section 00300, attached and incorporated herein by this reference. ARTICLE 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER, once each month during construction as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values established in paragraph 2.6 of the General Conditions and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed, and in accordance with the General Requirements concerning Unit Price Work. 5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, Owner will be entitled to withhold as contract retainage five percent (5%) of each progress payment, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions. If , in the sole discretion of Owner, on recommendation of Engineer, Owner determines that the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage on account of Work completed in which case the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be in an amount equal to 100% of the Work completed. 95% of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to OWNER as provided in paragraph 14.2 of the General Conditions) may be included in the application Section 00520 Page 3 for payment. 5.1.2. Upon Substantial Completion payment will be made in an amount sufficient, if necessary, to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 95% of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine or OWNER may withhold in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions or as provided by law. 5.2. FINAL PAYMENT. Upon Final Completion and Acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 14.13. ARTICLE 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 6.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and with all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. 6.2. CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions. 6.3. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraph 6.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 6.4. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provision of paragraph 4.3. of the General Conditions. 6.5. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, tests, reports and data with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 6.6. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.1 The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, those items included in the definition of "Contract Documents" in Article 1.10 of the General Conditions, and such other items as are referenced in this Article 7, all of which are incorporated herein by this reference. 7.2 Forms for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work and related actions in carrying out the terms of this Agreement are deemed Contract Documents and incorporated herein by this reference, and include, but are not limited to, the following: 7.2.1 Certificate of Substantial Completion 7.2.2 Certificate of Final Acceptance 7.2.3 Lien Waiver Releases 7.2.4 Consent of Surety 7.2.5 Application for Exemption Certificate 7.2.6 Application for Payment 7.3 Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered as follows: 1-0.00-1-1.06; 1-2.00-1-2.10; 1-3.00-1-3.07; L4.00-L4.03, 1-5.00-1-5.02, C0.1- 00.3, CE1.0-CE1.6, C1.0-C1.5, CD1.0-CD1.4, C2.0-C2.2, CD2.0-CD2.4, LE1.00-LE2.03, WF1.00-WF4.02, AR1.00-AR2.00, AS1.01-AS2.01, S1.00-S2.02, P0.00-P0.02, P1.01-P1.02, P6.01, MR1.01, MS1.01, E0.00- E0.02, E1.01-E1.04, ER1.01, ES1.01, E6.01-E6.02, XT6.01 The Contract Drawings shall be stamped "Final for Construction" and dated. Any revisions made shall be clearly identified and dated. 7.4. Addenda Numbers N/A to N/A, inclusive. 7.5. The Contract Documents also include all written amendments and other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. 7.6. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed or incorporated by reference in this Article 7. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 8. MISCELLANEOUS 8.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 8.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but not without limitations, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge that assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Document. 8.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, Agreement and obligations contained in the Contract Document. IriaE. Mortenson construction Old Town Square Renovation - Final GMP Construction Fort Collins, CO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT ESTIMATE March 09, 2015 Project Oty:O GSF Estimate Report DESCRIPTIONQUANTITY UNIT TOTAL 10 - SITE TOTAL 05 52 00 - METAL RAILINGS 2,873 10 32 00 - FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES 10320.000 `*FIREPLACE CONCRETE, BRICK AND STONE TOPS INCLUDED IN OTHER SECTIONS" 10320,005 7FT LINEAR GAS FIREPLACE INSERT 1.0 EA 9,500.00 9.500 TOTAL 103200- FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES 9,500 32 11 00 - BASE COURSES 32130.010 IMPORT AND PLACE 1" OF C33 SANDBENEATH 314.0 TN 34.09 10,704 BRICK PAVING TOTAL 32 1100 - BASE COURSES 10,704 32 13 00 - RIGID PAVING 32130.055 CONCRETE BANDS TO VERNAL POOL AND 524.0 LF 20.33 10,650 AROUND SITE 32130.065 CONCRETE HC RAMPS AT SOUTH OF PLAZA 172.0 SF 14.06 2,419 32130.100 SLABS OVER SOUTH EXISTING BASEMENTS W/ 446.0 SF 12.06 5,378 SANDSCAPE FINISH 32130.105 CONCRETE STEPS BY BEN AND JERRY'S - TO NIC REMAIN (NIC) 32130,110 6" CONCRETE STEP TO SOUTH SEATING AREA NIC - LIGHT BROOM FINISH 32130.115 CONCRETE SUB -SLAB OUTSIDE VERNAL POOL NIC - NIC 32130.300 CONCRETE GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.0 LS 2,965.62 2,966 TOTAL 321300- RIGID PAVING 21,413 32 14 00 - UNIT PAVING 32130.005 PLACE 6CM ZURICH STONE PAVERS ON 43,427.0 SF 4.45 193,250 PREPARED SUB -GRADE 32130.010 PLACE 6CM 4X8 HOLLAND STONE PAVERS ON 4,151.0 SF 4,15 17,227 PREPARED SUB -GRADE 32130.015 PLACE 6CM 6X6 CHARCOAL PLAZA PAVERS ON 727.0 SF 5.55 4,035 PREPARED SUB -GRADE 32300.115 MOBILIZATION / DEMOBILIZATION FOR PAVERS 1.0 LS 2,196.25 2,196 TOTAL 3214 00 - UNIT PAVING 216,708 32 16 00 - CURBS & GUTTERS 32160.005 REPAIR BROKEN CURB AND GUTTER DUE TO 1.0 LS 5,000.00 5,000 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES - ALLOWANCE TOTAL 3216 00 - CURBS & GUTTERS 5,000 32 18 00 - ATHLETIC & RECREATIONAL SURFACING 32180.005 RUBBERIZED PLAY SURFACE - SUB SLAB AND 736.0 SF 14.95 11,003 DRAINAGE NOT INCLUDED 32180.115 CONCRETE SUB -SLAB RUBBERIZED PLAY 736.0 SF 4.76 3,503 AREA TOTAL 3218 00 - ATHLETIC & RECREATIONAL SURFACING 14,507 32 30 00 - SITE IMPROVEMENTS 32300,005 5.1 - MULTI -PURPOSE POLE - INCLUDED IN 8.0 INCL ELECTRICAL CONTRACT 32300.010 5.4 - BENCH (MOVABLE) - OFOI NIC 1506EO23 Old Town Square Renovation 90 CD.est Page 5 OWNER: FORT COLLINS DOWNTOWN DE"M nMACA1T Al I-rUn71TV By: M Att( Date: Address for giving notices: 19 Old Town Square, Suite 230 Fort Collins, CO 80524 CONTRACTOR: MORTENSON /lq.A•MvRsE'iiQ� CONSTRUCTION INC. By: -" PRINTED Title: V1 SJO Date: f-�' (CORPORATE SEAL) Address for giving notices: �t'o Sj.1 71:1yo0 License No.: SECTION 00530 NOTICE TO PROCEED Description of Work: 8031 Old Town Square Renovation CM/GC To: Mortenson Construction Inc. This notice is to advise you: That the contract covering the above described Work has been fully executed by the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER. That the required CONTRACTOR's Performance Bond and Payment Bond have been received by the OWNER. That the OWNER has approved the said Contract Documents. Therefore, as the CONTRACTOR for the above described Work, you are hereby authorized and directed to proceed within ( ) calendar days from receipt of this notice as required by the Agreement. Dated this day of 20_. The dates for Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance shall be 20_and _ 20_, respectively. Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority OWNER 0 Title: ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged this day of 20_ CONTRACTOR: Mortenson Construction Inc. By: Title: SECTION 00600 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00610 Performance Bond 00615 Payment Bond 00630 Certificate of Insurance 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR) 00660 Consent of Surety 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate SECTION 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that Mortenson Construction Inc. (address) (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal' and (Firm) (Address) hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority, 19 Old Town Square, Suite 230, Fort Collins, Colorado 80524 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as the ".OWNER", in the penal sum of Two Million Eight Hundred Sixty -Eight Thousand One Hundred Eighty -Seven Dollars ($2,868.187) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the 11th day of March, 2015, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The Downtown Development Authority Project, 8031 Old Town Square Renovation CM/GC. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Agreement during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the OWNER, with or without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty period, and if the Principal shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Agreement, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from all cost and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER may incur in making good any default then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this day of , 20_ IN PRESENCE OF: (Title) (Corporate Seal) IN PRESENCE OF: IN PRESENCE OF: (Surety Seal) Principal (Title) (Address) Other Partners By: By: Surety By: (Address) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. SECTION 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No.82390737/106227223 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that M. A. Mortenson Company 700 Meadow Lane N. Minneapolis, MN 55422 (xtxkdxxWa), (m)P*Am9rV ip0, (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and Federal Insurance Company AND Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America 15 Mountain View Road One Tower Square - 2SHS Warren, NJ 07059 Hartford, CT 06183 hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority, 19 Old Town Square, Suite 230, Fort Collins, Colorado 80524 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER", in the penal sum of Two Million Eight Hundred Sixtv-Eioht Thousand One Hundred Eiohty-Seven Dollars ($2.868.187) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the 11th day of March, 2015, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The Downtown Development Authority Project, 8031 Old Town Square Renovation CM/GC. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Agreement during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the OWNER, with or without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty period, and if the Principal shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Agreement, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from all cost and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER may incur in making good any default then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this 18th day of March , 2015. IN PRESENC OF. Principal . A. Mortenson Company to Usgaard. nsurance S cialist Thomas F. c7kmkel, C910 (Title) (Title) (Corporate Seal) 700 Meadow Lane N., Minneapolis, MN 55422 (Address) IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners By: By: IN PRESENCE OF: c� L ✓=�/ (Surety Seal) Fed ralInsuranc mpany & Surety T elers uaj�y and Surety Company of America r Y 14A6rre Pflug, A omey-in-Fac 15 Mountain View Road, Warren, NJ 07059 & (Address) One Tower Square - 2SHS, Hartford, CT 06183 NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. SECTION 00615 PAYMENT BOND Bond No. 82390737/106227223 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that M. A. Mortenson Company 700 Meadow Lane N. Minneapolis, MN 55422 psA[]nd0doml), (�R�t t9t p�, (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and Federal Insurance Company AND Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America 15 Mountain View Road One Tower Square - 2SHS Warren, NJ 07059 Hartford, CT 06183 hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the Fort Collins Downtown DevelOpment Authority, 19 Old Town Square, Suite 230, Fort Collins, Colorado. 805.22 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER", in the penal sum of Two Million Eiaht Hundred Sixtv-Eight Thousand One Hundred Eighty -Seven Dollars (J2 868 127) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the 11th day of March, 2015, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The Fort C.,,. ,, Downtown Development Authority Project, 8031 Old Town Square Renovation CM/GC. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in such Agreement and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such Work, and all insurance premiums on said Work, and for all labor, performed in such Work whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this 18th day of March , 2015 . IN PRESENCE OF: Principal . A. Mortenson Company (Title) (Title) (Corporate Seal) 700 Meadow Lane N., Minneapolis, MN 55422 (Address) IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners By: By: IN PRESENCE OF: Surety Federal Insurance Company & e3lty Surety Company of America By:7X!, e Pflug,Attm�io-Fact 15 Mountain View Road, Warren, NJ 07059 & (Address) One Tower Square - 2SHS, Hartford, CT 06183 (Surety Seal) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. Corporation Acknowledgement State of Minnesota } } ss. County of Hennepin } On this 18th day of March 2015 before me personally came Thomas F. Gunkel to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that he is the Chief Executive Officer of M. A. Mortenson Company , the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that he signed his name thereto by like order. N 'oy4 Public WY ARILYN J. VICTOR Notary Public -Minnesota Commission EVAs Jon 31, 2016 Mortenson construction Old Town Square Renovation - Final IMP Construction Fort Collins, Co March 09, 2015 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT ESTIMATE Project OtyO GSF Estimate Report DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT TOTAL 10 - SITE 33100.030 CONNECT TO EXISTING STUB 1.0 EA 648.17 648 TOTAL 331000-WATER UTILITIES 21,765 33 30 00 - SANITARY SEWERS UTILITIES 33300.005 6" SDR 35 SEWER MAIN 45.0 LF 67.57 3,041 33300.010 6" SDR 3545 DEGREE BEND 5.0 EA 539.40 2,697 33300.020 CONNECT TO EXISTING SEWER 2.0 EA 1,071.34 2,143 TOTAL 33 30 00 - SANITARY SEWERS UTILITIES 7,880 33 40 00 - STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33400.005 12" HDPE STORM SEWER 21.0 LF 144.14 3,027 33400,010 18" HDPE STORM SEWER 115.0 LF 112.12 12,894 33400.015 18" ADS AREA INLET WITH TRAFFIC LOADED 7.0 EA 3,271.34 22,899 GRATE 33400.020 CONNECT TO EXISTING STORM SEWER RCP 4.0 EA 2,237.00 8,948 33400.025 CONNECT TO EXISTING STORM SEWER 2.0 EA 1,947.00 3,894 MANHOLE VIA CORE 33400,030 TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR WATER TIE-IN 3.0 DAY 1,250.00 3,750 TOTAL 3340 00 - STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 55,412 TOTAL SITE CIVIL / MECHANICAL UTILITIES 85,058 TOTAL 10-SITE 1,793,523 20-RESTROOMS EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE 04 71 00 - BRICK MASONRY 4170.005 BRICK INFILL TO RESTROOMS - MORTENSON 128.0 SF 24.89 3.186 MASONRY TOTAL 04 7100 - BRICK MASONRY 3,186 05 00 00 - METALS 0.005 LOOSE LINTEL ANGLE SUPPORTING VENEER 3.0 EA 75.00 225 OVER OPENINGS TOTAL 05 00 00 -METALS 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 6100.010 BLOCKING TO NEW DOORS AT RESTROOMS AND LOBBY ENTIES (REF. 1/SR100) TOTAL 061000-ROUGH CARPENTRY 08 11 00 - METAL DOORS & FRAMES 8110.015 3070 HM DOORS TO RESTROOMS 8110.020 3670 FULL LITE HM DOOR TO EXISTING LOBBY EXCLUDING GLAZING 8110.115 3484 HM FRAME WITH TRANSOM TO RESTROOMS 8110.120 4086 HM FRAME WITH TRANSOM TO EXISTING LOBBY 8110.205 FROSTED GLAZING TO TRANSOMS - ALLOWANCE 1506EO23 Old Town Square Renovation 90 CD.est Page 7 225 65.0 LF 5.00 325 325 2.0 EA 515.68 1,031 1.0 EA 564.27 564 2.0 EA 340.76 682 1.0 EA 340.76 341 9.0 SF 20.00 180 Surety Acknowledgment State of MINNESOTA SS. County of Hennepin } On this 18`h day of March 20 5 before me personally came Laurie Pflug, to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that she is the Attorney -in -Fact of Federal Insurance Company & Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America described in and which executed the above instrument; that she/he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instruments is such corporate seal, that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that she/he signed her/she/his name to it by like order. Notary Public g SWANSONBUC-MINNESOTAmission Expiresary 3l. 2020 Chubb POWER Federal Insurance Company Attn: Surety Department 1COF Vigilant Insurance Company 15 Mountain View Road Surety ATTORNEY Pacific Indemnity Company Warren, NJ 07059 Know All by These Presents, That FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, an Indiana corporation, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, a New York corporation, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY, a Wisconsin corporation, do each hereby Constitute and appoint Brian D. Carpenter, Heather R. Goedtel, Jessica Hoff, Nicole Langer, Dennis G. Loots, Craig Olmstead, Laurie Pflug, Jill N. Swanson, Michelle Sylvester and Nina E. Werstein of (Minneapolis, Minnesota -- each as their true and lawful Attorney- in- Fact to execute under such designation in their names and to affix their corporate seals to and deliver for and on their behalf as surety thereon or otherwise, bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof (other than bail bonds) given or executed in the course of business, and any instruments amending or altering the same, and consents to the modification or alteration of any instrument referred to in said bonds or obligations. In witness Whereof, said FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPW, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY have each executed and attested these presents and affixed their corporate seals on this 17 day of April, 2014. Dawn M. Chklros, Assistant Secretary onis, Jr., Vroe P - t *(Do STATE OF NEW JERSEY ss. County of Somerset On this 17tb day of April, 2014 before me, a Notary Public of New Jersey, personally came Dawn M. Chloms, to me known to be Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INOEMNITY COMPANY, the companies which executed the foregoing Power of Attorney, and the said Dawn M. Chloros, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that she is Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY. VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY and knows the corporate seals thereof, that the seals affixed to the foregoing Power of Attorney are such corporate seals and were thereto affixed by authority of the By- taws of said Companies: and that she signed said Power of Attorney as Assistant Secretary of said Companies by like atdhodty; and that she is acquainted with David B. Moms, Jr., and knows him to be Vice President of said Companies; and that the signature of David S. Moms, Jr., subscribed to said Power of Attorney is in the genuine handwriting of David B. Norris, Jr., and was thereto subscribed by authority of said By- taws and in deponem's presence. Notarial Seal KATHERINE 1 ADELAAR NOTARY PUSUIC NEW JERSEY No Z31t516 tSB5 Commission Ei pl w July 16, 2014 Notary Public CERTIFICATION Extract from the By- Laws of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY. VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNrTY COMPANY' 'All powers of attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shatl be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company, either by the Chairman or the President or a Vice President or an Assistant Vice President jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the following officers: Chairman, President any Vice President any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys- in- Fad for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached.' 1, Dawn M. Chdros, Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY (the"Companies') do hereby certify that n the foregoing extract of the By- Laws of the Companies is true and correct, (ii) the Companies are duty licensed and authorized to transact surety business in all 50 of the United States of America and the District of Columbia and are authorized by the U-S. Treasury Department further, Federal and Vigilant are licensed in the U.S. Virgin Islands, and Federal is licensed in American Samoa, Guam, Puerto Rico, and each of the Provinoes of Canada except Prince Edward Island, and (ii) the foregoing Power of Attorney is true, correct and in full force and effect Given under my hand and seals of said Companies at Warren, NJ this March 18, 2015 LWjft,,-W). Dawn M. Chloros, Assistant Secretary IN THE EVENT YOU WISH TO NOTIFY US OF A CLAIM, VERIFY THE AUTHENTICITY OF THIS BOND OR NOTIFY US OF ANY OTHER MATTER, PLEASE CONTACT US AT ADDRESS LISTED ABOVE, OR BY Talapiwne (901B) 903-3493 Fax (908) 90136M a 11: aretyttDCwbb.mm Foam 15.10- 0T15B- U GEN CONSENT (rev. 02-14) AIM POWER OF ATTORNEY TRAVELERSJ Farmington Casualty Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Attorney -In Fact No. 227671 Certificate No. 006028391 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Farmington Casualty Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Dennis G. Loots, Jill N. Swanson, Laurie Pflug, Nina E. Werstein, Brian D. Carpenter, Nicole Langer, Jessica Hoff, Heather R. Goedtel, Michelle Sylvester, and Craig Olmstead of the City of _ _ Minneapolis , State of Minnesota , their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this day of August , 2014 19th Farmington Casualty Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company /.SV FIRF N IM IHS lrq � 0SE, i��s�c�`' I,, 9r-62FY6 a °rt0+ �L "WiI97�7� Ple1d9lPp5pp1 � ',As�Rn_vcF 00 i m�'Iil°i••uS,isREr:-oAA'rtNqLfi>fLyi::o�.m s 2i'��v::'�'1tSM..8—POEa_.nr LTfra'%':;�s n! l' p••� ReIIRcMaFmOFDE. s't^g.< O .nxp••. r .N State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. By: Robert L. Raney, enior Vice President On this the 19th day of August 2014 , before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. O.Tl1 In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. Tai 4y Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2016. Mane C. Tetreault, Notary Public 58440-8-12 Printed in U.S.A. SECTION 00615 PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that Mortenson Construction Inc. (address) (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and (Firm) (Address) hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority, 19 Old Town Square, Suite 230, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER", in the penal sum of Two Million Eight Hundred Sixty -Eight Thousand One Hundred Eighty -Seven Dollars ($2,868,127) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the 11th day of March, 2015, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority Project, 8031 Old Town Square Renovation CM/GC. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in such Agreement and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such Work, and all insurance premiums on said Work, and for all labor, performed in such Work whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this day of 20_ IN PRESENCE OF: (Title) (Corporate Seal) IN PRESENCE OF: IN PRESENCE OF: (Surety Seal) Principal (Title) (Address) Other Partners By: By: Surety By: (Address) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. SECTION 00630 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACTOR shall insert his own standard form for Certificate of Insurance in accordance with the following requirements: 1. The Contractor will provide, from insurance companies acceptable to the City, the insurance coverage designated hereinafter and pay all costs. Before commencing work under this bid, the Contractor shall furnish the City with certificates of insurance showing the type, amount, class of operations covered, effective dates and date of expiration of policies, and containing substantially the following statement: "The insurance evidenced by this Certificate will not reduce coverage or limits and will not be cancelled, except after thirty (30) days written notice has been received by the Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority." In case of the breach of any provision of the Insurance Requirements, the City, at its option, may take out and maintain, at the expense of the Contractor, such insurance as the City may deem proper and may deduct the cost of such insurance from any monies which may be due or become due the Contractor under this Agreement. The City, its officers, agents and employees shall be named as additional insureds on the Contractor's general liability and automobile liability insurance policies for any claims arising out of work performed under this Agreement. 2. Insurance coverages shall be as follows: A. Workers' Compensation & Employer's Liability. The Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Agreement for all of the Contractor's employees engaged in work performed under this agreement: 1. Workers' Compensation insurance with statutory limits as required by Colorado law. 2. Employer's Liability insurance with limits of $100,000 per accident, $500,000 disease aggregate, and $100,000 disease each employee. B. Commercial General & Vehicle Liability. The Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Agreement such commercial general liability and automobile liability insurance as will provide coverage for damage claims of personal injury, including accidental death, as well as for claims for property damage, which may arise directly or indirectly from the performance of work under this Agreement. Coverage for property damage shall be on a "broad form" basis. The amount of insurance for each coverage, Commercial General and Vehicle, shall not be less than $1,000,000 combined single limits for bodily injury and property damage. In the event any work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for any liability directly or indirectly arising out of the work performed under this Agreement by a subcontractor, which liability is not covered by the subcontractor's insurance A� �® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE page 1 of 2 3/2 /a015 031251 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies)must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME Willis of Minnesota, Inc. c/o 26 Century Blvd. P. O. Box 305191 PHONE FAX 7-945-7378 888-4 7-2378 E-MAIL certificates@willio.com Nashville, TN 37230-5191 INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAX:A INSURERA: Arch Insurance Company 11150-001 INSURED M. A. Mortenson Company INSURER B: Arch Insurance Company 11150-000 700 Meadow Lane N INSURERC: P.O. Box 710 Minneapolis, MN 55440 INSURER D: INSURER E: INSURER F: rnVFDAGFC rFRTIDIrATF NIIMIRFR• 99oSnna6 RFVISION NUMBER, THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR ITRA TYPE OF INSURANCE DL n SUB WVnPOLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICYEXP LIMITS % COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS -MADE % OCCUR Y 51PKG8901202 /1/2014 5/1/2015 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 pppr�,,,I &pp�E7 e�rence PREMISES $ 300,000 MEDEXP An one $ 5,000 PERSONAL BADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 11000,000 POLICY a] EC LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ 1,000,000 $ OTHER: A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY y 51PKG8901202 5/1/2014 5/1/2015 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ B % ANY AUTO Y 51CAB8919600 5/1/2014 5/1/2015 ALLOWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS AUTOS HIREDAUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY(Peraccidenl) E PROPERTY DAMAGE (Peraccident) $ UMBRELLA LIAB OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ EXCESS LIAR CLAIMS -MADE DIED RETENTION$ $ p B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETORlPARTNERIEXECUTIVEYa OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? fMandatory in NH) f yes. describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below NIA 51WC18901002 51➢PCI8919500 5/1/2014 5/1/2014 5/1/2015 5/1/2015 % E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 11000,000 E.L. DISEASE -EA EMPLOYEE $ 11000,000 E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Addltonal Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) Project #: 14060029 Project Name: Old Town Square As respects to M. A. Mortenson Company operations on the referenced project, Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority, The City, its officers, agents and employees are included as Additional Insureds on a Primary and Non -Contributory basis under the General Liability and Automobile Liability policies as required by written contract. IShould any of the above described Policies be cancelled before the expiration date thereof. the f`C0TIC11%ATC unl ncD rANrcl I ATInN SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority 19 Old Town Square, Suite 230 Fort Collins, CO 80524 Coll:4652898 Tp1:1804183 Cert:22950066®1988-2014ACORDCORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2014101) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD SECTION 00635 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION TO: FORT COLLINS DOWNTOWN DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY (OWNER) DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROJECT OR SPECIFIED PART SHALL INCLUDE: PROJECT TITLE: 8031 Old Town Square Renovation CM/GC LOCATION: Fort Collins, Colorado OWNER: Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority CONTRACTOR: Mortenson Construction Inc. CONTRACT DATE: March 11, 2015 The Work performed under this contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER and the project or specified part of the project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date. A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may not be exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE The CONTRACTOR accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated. CONTRACTOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE M Al The OWNER accepts the project or specified area of the project as substantially complete and will assume full possession of the project or specified area of the project at 12:01 a.m., on . The responsibility for heat, utilities, security, and insurance under the Contract Documents shall be as set forth under "Remarks" below. FORT COLLINS DOWNTOWN DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY By: OWNER DATE REMARKS: AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SECTION 00640 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE ,20 TO: Mortenson Construction Inc. Gentlemen: You are hereby notified that on the day of 20 , the Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority has accepted the Work completed by Mortenson Construction Inc. for the Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority project, 8031 Old Town Square Renovation CM/GC. A check is attached hereto in the amount of $ as Final Payment for all Work done, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents which are dated March 11, 2015. In conformance with the Contract Documents for this project, your obligations and guarantees will continue for the specified time from the following date: , 20 Sincerely, OWNER: Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority By: Title: ATTEST: Title: SECTION 00650 LIEN WAIVER RELEASE (CONTRACTOR) TO: Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority (OWNER) FROM: Mortenson Construction Inc. (CONTRACTOR) PROJECT: 8031 Old Town Square Renovation CM/GC The CONTRACTOR acknowledges having received payment, except retainage from the OWNER for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by the CONTRACTOR for the OWNER or for anyone in the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project. 2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the CONTRACTOR voluntarily waives all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims (40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices, equitable liens and labor and material bond rights which the CONTRACTOR may now or may afterward have, claim or assert for all and any work, labor, skill or materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against any fund of or in the possession or control of the OWNER, against the project or against all land and the buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project. 3. The CONTRACTOR affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or performed to or for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the CONTRACTOR or its agents, employees, and servants, or by and through the CONTRACTOR by various Subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or any funds in the OWNER'S possession or control concerning the project or against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project. 4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the lender, if any, and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the CONTRACTOR'S Subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants, agents or assigns against the project or against the OWNER or its officers, employees, agents or assigns arising out of the project for all loss, damage and costs, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred as a result of such claims. 5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above constitutes and adequate description of the property and improvements to which this Lien Waiver Release pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver Release is for the benefit of and may be relied upon by the OWNER, the lender, if any, and Surety on any labor and material bonds for the project. March 09, 2015 20-RESTROOMS tttt -K Mortenson construction Old Town Square Renovation - Final GMP Construction Fort Collins, CO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT ESTIMATE Project QtyO GSF Estimate Report 9290.025 9290.030 9290.035 9290.040 9290.105 PARTITION TYPE B2 PARTITION TYPE B3 PARTITION TYPE B4 PARTITION TYPE B5 GYP CEILINGS AND BULKHEADS- PAINTED 41.0 170.0 9.0 270.0 210.0 SF SF SF SF SF 22.38 11.75 18.70 3.30 12.22 918 1,998 168 890 2,566 TOTAL 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD 14,239 10 28 00 - TOILET & LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10280.005 STAINLESS STEEL DUAL ROLL TOILET PAPER 3.0 EA 144.26 433 DISPENSERS 10280.010 STAINLESS STEEL COMBINATION PAPER 2.0 EA 284.98 570 TOWEL DISPENSER / RECEPTACLE 10280.015 STAINLESS STEEL WALL MOUNTED SOAP 2.0 EA 115.86 232 DISPENSERS 10280.020 STAINLESS STEEL SANITARY NAPKIN 2.0 EA 174.11 348 DISPOSAL 10280.025 STAINLESS STEEL ROBE HOOKS 3.0 EA 51.26 154 10280.030 STAINLESS STEEL HAND DRYERS 2.0 EA 811.88 1,624 10280.035 STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITION DOORS 3.0 EA 622.79 1,868 W/ CONTINUOUS HINGE - WALL HUNG 10280.040 STAINLESS STEEL GRAB BARS - 18" VERTICAL 4.0 EA 99.38 398 10280.043 STAINLESS STEEL GRAB BARS - 30" 1.0 EA 101.23 101 10280,045 STAINLESS STEEL GRAB BARS - 36" 2.0 EA 102.66 205 10280.050 STAINLESS STEEL GRAB BARS - 42" 4.0 EA 103.88 416 10280.055 STAINLESS STEEL SHEET "MIRROR" - 15.0 SF 44.24 664 NON -GLAZING (ALT, SS SQUARE FRAMED MIRROR) 10280.060 STAINLESS STEEL VANITY W/ 1" STANDOFF, 8.0 LF 272.52 2,180 APRON & INTEGRAL SINK - 5 SF/FT 10280.065 STAINLESS STEEL BABY CHANGING STATION - 2.0 EA 1,439.36 2,879 RECESSED IN WALL 10280.070 STAINLESS STEEL MOP HOLDER STRIP - 24", 3 1.0 EA 86.83 87 HOOK 10280.200 RELOCATE EXISTING MAILBOX UNIT TO LOBBY 1.0 EA 34.22 34 10280.205 RELOCATE EXISTING KNOX BOX TO LOBBY 1.0 EA 34.22 34 10280.210 RELOCATE EXISTING FIRE EXTINGUISHER 1.0 EA 34.22 34 CABINET 10280.215 RELOCATE EXISTING MEP FIXTURES AND NIC DEVICES IN MEP SCOPES - NIC TOTAL 10 28 00 - TOILET & LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 12,260 TOTAL INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION 28,818 INTERIOR FINISHES 09 30 00 - TILE 9300,005 12 x 24 FULL HEIGHT PORCELAIN WALL TILE - 1,000.0 SF 10.97 10,966 CROSSVILLE BASALT (GRAFFITI RESIST) 9300,005 12 x 24 PORCELAIN TILE FLOOR TO LOBBY - 143.0 SF 14.05 2,009 CROSSVILLE BASALT 9300.005 PORCELAIN TILE BASE TO LOBBY - 60.0 LF 17.85 1,071 CROSSVILLE BASALT 1506EO23 Old Town Square Renovation 90 CD.est Page 9 Signed this day of 20 CONTRACTOR: MORTENSON CONSTRUCTION INC. LOM Title: ATTEST: Secretary STATE OF COLORADO ) )ss. COUNTY OF LARIMER ) Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20 by Witness my hand and official seal. Notary Public My Commission Expires: SECTION 00660 CONSENT OF SURETY TO: Fort Collins Downtown Development Authority (hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER") CONTRACTOR: Mortenson Construction Inc. PROJECT: 8031 Old Town Square Renovation CM/GC CONTRACT DATE: March 11, 2015 In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as indicated above, for (Surety) on bond of hereby approves of the Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR, and agrees that Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations to the OWNER, as set forth in the said Surety Company's Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this day of 20 (Surety Company) 0 ATTACH: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in-Fact. SECTION 00670 APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE v CONTRACTOR APPLICATION DR 0172 (12/98) FOR COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE DENVER CO 80261 EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE (303)232-2416 Pursuant to Statute Section 39-26.114(1)(a)(XIX) DO NOT WRITE IN THIS SPACE The exemption certificate for which you are applying must be used only for the purpose of purchasing construction and building materials for the exempt project described below. This exemption does not include or apply to the purchase or rental of equipment, supplies, and materials which are purchased, rented, or consumed by the contractor and which do not become part of the structure, highway, road, street, or other public works owned and used by the exempt organization. Any unauthorized use of the exemption certificate will result in revocation of your exemption certificate and other penalties provided by law. A separate certificate is required for each contract. Subcontractors will not be issued Certificates of Exemption by the Department of Revenue. It is the responsibility of the prime contractor to issue certificates to each of the subcontractors. (See reverse side). FAILURE TO ACCURATELY COMPLETE ALL BOXES WILL CAUSE THE APPLICATION TO BE DENIED. Registration/Account No. (to be assigned by DOR) Period 89 - 0170-750 (999) $0.00 CONTRACTOR INFORMATION ' Trade name/DBA: Owner, partner, or corporate name: Mailing address (City, State, Zip): Contact Person E-Mail address: Federal Employer's Identification Number. Bid amount for your contract: Fax Number Business telephone number: Colorado withholding tax account number: Copies of contract or agreement pages (1) identifying the contracting parties EXEMPTION INFORMATION and (2) containing signatures of contracting parties must be attached. Name of exempt organization (as shown on contract). Exempt organization's number. 98 - Address of exempt organization (City, State, Zip): Principal contact at exempt organization: Principal contact's telephone number: Physical location of project site (give actual address when applicable and Cities and/or County (ies) where project is located) Scheduled Month Day Year Eatl sated Month Day Year construction alert data: cam letion date I declare under penalty of perjury in the second degree that the statements made in this application are true and complete to the best of my knowledge. Signature of owner, partner or corporate officer: Title of corporate officer: Date: DO NOT WRITE BELOW THIS LINE Special Notice Contractors who have completed this application in the past, please note the following changes in procedure: The Department will no longer issue individual Certificates of exemption to subcontractors. Only prime contractors will receive a Contractor's Exemption Certificate on exempt projects. Upon receipt of the Certificate, the prime contractor should make a copy for each subcontractor involved in the project and complete it by filling in the subcontractor's name and address and signing it. The original Certificate should always be retained by the prime contractor. Copies of all Certificates that the prime contractor issued to subcontractors should be kept at the prime contractor's place of business for a minimum of three years and be available for inspection in the event of an audit. Once an 89# has been assigned to you, please use the next five numbers following it for any applications submitted for future projects. This should be your permanent number. For instance, if you were assigned 89-12345-0001, every application submitted thereafter should contain 89-12345 on the application. The succeeding numbers will be issued by the Department of Revenue. DO NOT enter what you believe to be the next in sequence as this may delay processing of your application. GENERAL CONDITIONS •1y CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT These GENERAL CONDITIONS have been developed by using the STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee, EJCDC No. 1910-8 (1990 Edition), as a base. Changes to that document arc shown by underlining text that has been added and striking through text that has been deleted. EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) WITH CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) Article or Paragraph Page Article or Paragraph Page Number & Title Number Number & Title Number 4.5 Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material_..................7-8 BONDS AND INSURANCE ................................. 8 5.1-5.2 Performance, Payment and Other Bonds..............................................8 5.3 Licensed Sureties and Insurers; Certificates of Insurance .................... 8 5.4 CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance..........................................9 5.5 OWNER's Liability Insurance .•,,,,,,....., 9 5.6 Property Insurance ......... ................. 9-10 5.7 Boiler and Machinery or Addi- tional Property Insurance.................10 5.8 Notice of Cancellation Proasion10 5.9 CONTRACTORs Responsibility for Deductible Amounts .................... 10 5.10 Other Special Insurance ......................10 5.11 Waiver of Rights................................1 l 5.12-5.13 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds,,,,,,,,,,,,,•,,,,,,•JO-11 5.14 Acceptance of Bonds and Insa- ance; Option to Replace, ,,,,,,,,,,,,,•••„I I 5.15 Partial Utilization --Property Insurance........................................ I 1 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSiBQ.1TIE3 ,••„••,••••,•,11 6.1-6.2 Supervision and Superintendeacq....... 11 6.3-6.5 Labor, Materials and Equipment•„ 11-12 6.6 Progress Schedule..............................12 6.7 Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Items; CONTRACTOR s Expense; Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures, ENGINEER's Evaluation ............. 12-13 6.8-6.11 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others; Waiver of Rights ........... ....... ...... 13-14 6.12 Patent Fees and Royalties •................... 14 6.13 Permits.............................................14 6.14 Laws and Regulations ........................34 6.15 Taxos...........................................14-15 6.16 Use of Premises ................•,,.,,..,,...•„ 15 6.17 Site Cleanlines%................................ 15 6.18 Safe Structural Loading ..................... 15 6.19 Record Documents .............................15 6.20 Safety and Protection ....................15-16 6.21 Safety Representative ......................... j6 6.22 Hazard Communication Programq••„•.16 6.23 Emergencies.....................................16 6.24 Shop Drawings and Sample;..............16 6.25 Submittal Proceedures; CON- TRACTOR's Review Prior to Shop Drawing or Sample Submittal .................................... 16 6.26 Shop Drawing & Sample Submit- tals Review by ENGINEER, ..... 16-17 6.27 Responsibility for Variations From Contract Documents .......... .17 6.28 Related Work Performed Prior to ENGINFF,R's Review and Approval of Required Submittals ...................................17 6.29 Continuing the Work .....................17 6.30 CONTRACTORS General Warranty and Guarantee.............J7 6.31-6.33 Indemnification 17-18 6.34 Survival of Obligations ...................J8 OTHER WORK.................................................18 7.1-7.3 Related Work at Site ;.......... ............18 7.4 Coordination ......................... ........ 18 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES ........... _,_••,••••....j 8 8.1 Comm unications to CON- TRACTOR ................................. IS 8.2 Replacement of ENGINEER ............ 18 8.3 Furnish Data andPay Promptly When Due..................................18 8.4 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests 18-19 8.5 Insurance ............................. .........19 8.6 Change Orders ...............................19 8.7 Inspections, Tests and Approvals ...................................19 8.8 Stop or Suspend Work; Terminate CONTRACTOR's Services......................................19 8.9 Limitations on OWNER'S Responsibilities ............................19 8.10 Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material,,,•„•,,,•„•,••,,,19 8.11 Evidence of Financed Arrangements ................ __........ J9 ENGINEERS STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION ............................. _..............19 9.1 OWNERs Representative ................ 19 9.2 Visits to Site,,,.,,•...........................19 9.3 Project Representative ...............19-21 9.4 Clarifications and Interpre- tations ........................................ 21 9.5 Authorized Variations in Wrk._.....:21 E1CDC GENERAL C014DI71ONS 1910.8 (1990 ED11701,0 wl CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS MV 9199) INDEX TO GENERAL CONDITIONS City of Fort Collins modifications to the General Conditions of the Construction Contract are not shown in this index Article or Paragraph Number Acceptance of — Bonds and Insurance........................................5.14 defective Work ............................10.4.1. 13.5, 13.15 final pa)Tnent ........................................9.12, 14.15 insurance......................................................... 5,14 other Work by CONTRACTOR......._ .................7.3 Substitutes and 'Or -Equal" Items ...................... 6.7.1 Work by OWNER .............................. 2.5,6.30. 6.34 Access to the -- Lands, OWNER andCONTRACTOR responsibilities .............................. ............... 4.1 site. related Work .......... ......................... .... 7.2 Work . ..... .................................... 13.2.13.14.14.9 Acts or Omissions--. Acts and Omissions -- CONTRACTOR 6.9.1, 9,13.3 ENGINEER ................. . ...... ...... _9i.20,9.13.3 OWNER 8.9 Addenda --definition of (also see definition of Specifications) .......(1.6.1.10.6.19),I.l Additional Property Insurance* ................................. 5.7 Adjustrin ents— Contract Price or Contract Times ...........................1.5, 3.5, 43, 4.3.2, 4.5.1 ................... .......... 4_53,9.4,95, 10.2-10.4. .........................................11. IZ 14.8,15.1 progress schedule ........................................... Agreement -- definition of ...................................................... J.2 "All -Risk" Insurance, policy fom ...........................j.6.2 Allowances. Cash ....................................................11.8 Amending Contract Document4 ................................ 3.5 Amendment. Written— in general.................1.10, 1.45, 3.5, 5,10, 5.12, 6,6.2 ..........................0.8.2, 6.19, 10.1. 10.4, 11.2 ........................ I ........... 12.1,13.12.2,14.7.2 Appeal, OWNER or CONTRACTOR intent to .......................... 9.10, 9.11. 10.4, 16.2. 16.5 Application for Payment -- definition of ....................................................... 3.3 ENGMERs, Responsibility ............................ 9.9 final payrnent .................9.13.4, 9.13.5,14.12-14.15 in general ...................... _.S, 2.9, 5.6.4, 9.10, 15.5 progress payment ...................................... 14.1-14.7 review of ....... ...... ....... ...... ......... 14.4-14.7 Arbitration 16.1-16.6 Asbestos— claims pursuant thereto ........ .............. _43.2,4.5.3 CONTRACTOR authorized to stop Work .......... 4.5.2 definition of .......................................................1.4 Article or Paragraph Number OWNER responsibility for ...................... 8.10 possible price and times change ........................ 4A2 Authorized Variations in Work ... ...... 3.6.6.25, 6.27, 9.5 Availability of Lands......_ .................................. 4.1.8.4 Award. Notice of --defined .......................................1.25 Beforc Starting Construction ................... ....... 25-2.8 Bid --definition of, _ ........ .... 1-5 (1.1, 1.10, 2.3, 3.3, ......................... 4,16.4, 6.13, 11.4.3, 11.9.1) Bidding Documents —definition Of...................................................1.6(6.8.2) Bidding Requirements --definition of .................................. I ...... J.7 (1.1, 4,16.2) Bonds — acceptance of .............. .................................... 5.14 additional bonds 10.5,11.4.5.9 Cost of the Work ............................ . .............. 11.5.4 definition of .......................................................1.8 delivery of ................................................... 7.1.5.1 final Application for Payment ................. 14A 2-14.14 general......................................1.10, S. 1 -5.3. 5,13, ___ ...... .................. - I ...... 9.13,10.5,14.7.6 Performance, Payment and Other ....... .......... 5.1-5.2 Bonds and Insurance --in general .................................5 Builder's risk 'all-risk" policy formi, ........................5.6.2 Cancellation Provisions, Insurance........ 5.4.11, 5.8,3.15 Cash Allowances....................................................)1.8 Certificate of Substantial Completicq ........ 1.38, 6.30.2.3, ...... ................ ............. 14.8.14.10 Certificates of Inspection ................... 9.13.4, 13.5, 14.12 Certificates of Insurance .............2.7. 5.3. 5.4.11. 5.4.13. ................. 5,6.5. 5.8. 5.14, 9.13.4, 14.12 Change in Contract Price — Cash Allowances 11.8 claim for price adjustment ............. 4.1. 4.2.6. 4.5. 5.15, 6.8.2. 9A ...................9.5. 9.11, 10.2. 10.5. 11.2. 13.9. _ ...................... 13.13,1114,14.7.15.1,15.5 CONTRACTORs fee .........................................11.6 Cost of the Work general ........... .......... 11.4-11.7 Exclusions t0..............................................11.5 Cost Records, ........ .............. ....................... JI.7 in general ............. J. 19,1.44, 9.11, 10.4.2, 10.4-3. It Lump Sum Pricing..........................................11.3.2 Notification of surety ........................................10.5 Scope ........................ _ .................. JO.3-10.4 Testing and Inspection. Uncovering the Work ..................................13.9 EJCW GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910 -8 (1990 EDITION wf CITY OF FORT C OLLIM MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) Cash Allowances.---___.._ ..... ___ ... ........... ... JI.8 Article or Paragraph Number Change of Contract Price ................................... I I Change of Contract Times...................................12 Changes in the Work ................................ 10.4-10.5 check and yet................................. ...... .......2.5 Clarifications and Interpretations .........................3.2. 3.6. 9.4, 9.11 definition of ... ........ ­ ­ I ...... -...I....................1.10 ENGINEER as initial interpreter of ...................9.11 ENGINEER as OWNERs representative,,,,,,,,,,,,, 9.1 genera13 Insurance ...........................................................5.3 Intent........................................................ 3.1-3.4 minor variations in the Work ..............................3.6 OWNERs responsibility to furnish data ............ _83 OWNER's responsibility to make prompt payment ......................... 9.3,14.4,14.13 precalence ..................... I ... ...... _ ... ...... J.1. 3.3.3 Record Documents ........................... __ .... ....... OA9 Reference to Standards and Specifications of Technical Societies...................................3.3 Related Work ....................................................7.2 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies,,,,,,,, :2-% 3-3 Reuseor .............................. _ ............................. 3.7 Supplementing ..................................................3.6 Termination of ENGINEER!s Employment .......... 8.2 Unit Price Work ...............................................11.9 variatioruk ......................................... 3.6, 6.23, 6.27 visits to Site, ENGINERWil ............................... 9.2 Contract Price — adjustment o(...............3.5, 4.1, 9.4. 10.3. 11.2-11.3 Changeof, ..........................................................11 Decision on Disputes ........................................9.11 definition of ......... . ......... . ...............................1.11 Contract Times — adjustment of..........................3.5.4.1, 9.4,10.3,12 Change of ............................ ............... ... 12.1-12.4 Commencement of ............................................. 13 definition of .....................................................1.12 CONTRACTOR — Acceptance of InsuranceL._., ........ .......... ........ 5.14 Communications ....................................... §.Z 6.9.2 Continue Work ........ ...... _...6.29,10.4 coordination and scheduling ............................4.9.2 definition of ........................................ I ......... A.13 Limited Reliance on Technical Data Authorized._ .... I --- ­­ .............. ...... 4.2.2 May Stop Work or Terminate............................15.5 provide site access to others ........................ ?.2,13 2 Safety and Protection ...................4.3.1.2. 6.16. 6.18, ­ .... . ....... *­**­­ 6.21-6.23.7.Z 13.2 Shop Drawing and Sample Review Prior to Submittal ........................................15.25 Stop Work requirmentil ....................... 4.5.2 OONTRACTOR's-- Article or Paragraph Number Compensation ........................................ I ... 11,1-11.2 Continuing Obligationt .................................... 14.15 Defective Work ................ ............... 9.6.13.10-13.14 Duty to correct defective Work ..........................13.11 Duty to Report -- Changes in the Work caused by Emergency., ....................................... ...6.23 Defects in Work of Others ..............................7.3 Differing conditior4 ...................................4.2.3 Discrepancy in Documents .... .... 2.5, 3.3.2. 6.14.2 Underground Facilities not indicated,,,,,,,,,, 4.3.2 Emergencies., ................................................... 0.23 Equipment and Machinery Rental, Cost of the Work ...........................................11.4.5.3 Fee --Cost Plus J 1.4.5.6,11.5.1, 11.6 General Warranty and GusnmW .......................0.30 Hazard Communication Programs ..................... fx22 Indemnification ............ ------------ 6. IZ 6.16.631.6.33 Inspection of the Work .... .......................... 73.113.4 Labor, Materials and Equipment .................... 0.3-6.5 Laws and Regulations, Compliance by,,,,,,,,,,,,, fi.14.1 Liability Insurance ..............................................5.4 Notice of Intent to Appeal ......................... 9.M 10.4 obligation to perform and complete theWork ....................................................030 Patent Fees and Royalties, paid for by ................. 6.12 Performance and Other Bonds 5.1 Perm its, obtained and paid for by .......................0.13 Progress Schedtil4...........................2.6, 2.9.19,6.6, Request for formal decisionon disputes ..............9.I I Responsibilities— Changes in the Work, ..................................10.1 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others 6,".I1 Continuing the Work ............... .... __6_29,10.4 CONTRACTOR's expense ...........................0.7.1 CONTRACTOR's General Warranty and Guarantee., ..................... .......... .... 6.30 CONTRACTOR's review prior to Shop Drawing or Sample submittal ................ 6.25 Coordination of Work ............................. _ 6.9.2 Emergencies, ............................ .................. 6.23 ENGINEERs evaluation, Substitutes or 'Or -Equal" Items....... _....................4.7.3 For Acts and Omissions of Others 0.9.1-6.9-2,9.13 ror deductible amounts.insurance...................5.9 general ......................................... 6, TZ 7.3, 8.9 Hazardous Communication Programs_.._....._ 6.22 Indemnification 6.31-6.33 Vil ESCDC GENERAL CONDMONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9199) CorrectionorRemoval ofJOAA, 13.11 Correction Period ,.......I3.12 .................................... in general.........................................13, 14.7. 14.11 Article or Paragraph Number Observation byENGINEER................................ 9.2 OWNER May Stop Work.................................13.10 Prompt Notice of Defects...................................13.1 Rejecting...........................................................9.6 Uncovering the Work-, ................. ................ J3.8 Definitions................................................................I Delays ..................................... 4.1, 6.29, 12.3-12.4 Delivery of Bonds.....................................................2.1 Delivery of certificates of insurance ..........................7.7 Determinations for Unit Prices. . .............................. 9.10 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions — Noticeof .................................. ... ...,....... __.4.2.3 ENGINEER'S Review.....................................4.2.4 Possible Contract Documents Change,,,,,,,__,,,, 4.2.5 Possible Price and Times Adjustments .............. .2-6 Discrepancies -Reporting and Resolving................................2.5, 3.3.2, 6.14.2 Dispute Resolution— Agreement................................................ J 61-16.6 Arbitration 16.1-16.5 general16 Mediation .........................................................16.6 Dispute Resolution Agreement ........ ................. 16.1-16.6 Disputes, Decisions by ENGINEER ...................9.11-9.12 Documents_ Copiesof .. ...................................................... 2.2 Record 6.19 Reuseof.............................................................3.7 Drawings —definition of .......................................... J.15 Easements..............................................................4.1 Effective date of Agreement -- definition Qj'..............).16 Emergencies, ........................ __................... ........ 0 23 ENGINEER — as initial interpreter on disputes .................9.11412 definition of.....................................................JA7 Limitations on authority and responsibiliti....... 9.13 Replacement of ........ ........... __.... _.--.................8.2 Resident Project Representative ........... ......_...9.3 ENGR4EER's Consultant -- defuriticn of,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 1.18 ENGINEER's-- authority and responsibility, limitations on ........ 9.13 Authorized Variations in the Wor$9,5 Change Orders, responsibility for...... 9.7. 10, 11, 12 Clarifications and Interpretations ...............3.6.3, 9.4 Decisions on Disputes ....... ......................... 9.11-9.12 defective Work, notice of.............I....................113.1 Evaluation of Substitute Items ..........................0.7.3 Liability...................................................4.32, 9.12 Notice Work is Acceptable ........ _ _................14.13 Observations0.30.2, 9.2 OWNF.R's Representative „...._.......................... 9.1 Payments to the CONTRACTOR Responsibility for.....................................9.9. 14 Recommendation of Payment,- ........14.4. 14.13 Article or Paragraph Number Responsibilities --Limitations on ............. _, 9.11-9.13 Review of Reports on Differing Subsurface and Physical Conditions ............................. 4.2.4 Shop Drawings and Samples, review responsibility ......................... .. ............... .... 6.26 Status During Construction -- authorized variations in the Wor$..... .............9.5 Clarifications and Interpretations ..................9.4 Decisions on Disputes .......................... 9.11-9.12 Determinations on Unit Price.....................9.10 ENGINEER as Initial Interpreter„-„-,-. 9.11-9.12 ENGINEER's Responsibilities ................9.1-9.12 Limitations on ENGiNEER's Authority and Responsibilities..............................9.13 OWNER's Representative..... _.......................9.1 Project Representative ................ ............. _,,,9.3 Rejecting Defective Work ................... _.,,,,,,..9.6 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments ............. _.............. »....9.7-9.9 Visits to Site,_,..,,.,,,.. , ..... 9.2 Unit Price determinations..................................9.10 Visits to Site ............................. --.---..--.............9.2 Written consent requue¢ 7.2, 9.1 Equipment, Labor, Materials and ........................0.3-6.5 Equipment rental, Cost of the Work .............„-„ 11.4.5.3 Equivalent Materials andEquipmenl .........................(x7 error or anissims..................................................0.33 Evidence of Financial Arrangement&......................I1.11 Explorations of physical conditions ........................4-2.1 Fee, CONTRACTOR's--Costs Plus ..........................11 A Field Order — definition of ......... _................. ......................... )-19 issued by ENGINEER ................................ 3.6.1, 9.5 Final Application for Payment ... ................. ___ .... 4.12 Final Inspectioq................................................... J4.11 Final Payment — and Acceptancq,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,14.13-14.14 Prior to, for cash allo ces...............................11.8 General Provisions....................................:17.3-17.4 General Requirements — definition of ................ _.......................... ......... J.20 principal references t9..............2.6, 6.4, 6.6.6.7, 6.24 Giving Notice ......... _,------ , .................................17.1 Guarantee of Work —by CONTRACTOR... _ ,, 6.30, 14.12 Hazard Communication Programs .......................... 6.22 Hazardous Waste— definition of ..................................................... J.21 general............................................................. 4.5 OWNER's responsibility for..............................8.10 EJCD . GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910.8 (1"0 EDITION) wl CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 91M Notification to Surety ------- ........... ....... * .... * .. ...... .... 10.3 Observations, by ENGINEER...... I ................... �0.30,9.2 Occupancy of the Work ..................5.15, 6.30.2.4. 14.10 Omissions or ads by CONTRACTOR . ......... ..... 0-9.9.13 Open Peril policy form. Insurance ..........................5.6.2 Optionto Replace .................................................... 5.14 Article or Paragraph Number "Or Equal* Items ...................................................... JS.7 Other work 7 Overtime Work —prohibition of ................................. 6.3 OWNER -- Acceptance of defective Work ...........................13.13 appoint an ENGINEER ......................................8.2 as fiduciary ........................................... ...5. 12-5.13 Availability of Lands. responsibility ....................4.1 definition of ......................................................1.27 data, furnish...._................................................8.3 May Correct Defective Work ............................ 13.14 May refine to make payment .............................14.7 May Stop the Work .........................................13.10 May Suspend Work. Terminate ................... .... 8.8.13.10.15.1-15.4 Payment, make prompt .................... P.3,14,4.14.13 performance of other work ................................. 7.1 permits and licenses, requirement; .....................0.13 purchased insurance requirement4 ............... 5.6-5.10 OWNEWs-- Acceptance of the Work ..............................430.2.5 Change Orders, obligation to execut; ......... AA 10.4 Communications................................................ 8.1 Coordination of the Week ...................................7.4 Disputes, request for decision ............................9.11 Inspections, tests and approvalq .................. $3,13.4 Liability Insurance .................................. ......... 5.5 Notice of Defects ..............................................13.1 Representative --During Construction, ENGINFFRsStatin,_ .. .. ..... 91 Responsibilities -- Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material ................ ?. 10 Change Orders, ............................................. 8.6 Changes in the Work ........... ......... ....... ... 10.1 communications ............................................8.1 CONTRACTORs responsibilities.......... _ ....... 8.9 evidence of financial arrangements.... ........... $11 inspections, tests and approval$ .....................83 insurance.....................................................83 lands and easements .....................................8.4 prompt payment by .................... ................. -8.3 replacement of ENGINEER ........................... $.2 reports and tests .............................................9.4 stop or suspend Work .................8.8, 13.10,i5.1 terminate CONTRACrOks services ........................................... 8.8.15.2 separate representative at site ............................. P.3 testing, independent, ........ use or occupancy of the Woik Written consent or approval required ....................... 13A ... J.15. 6.30.2.4, 14.10 ..9.1, 6.3, 11.4 EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-80990 EDITION) w/ CRY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV W99) Old Town Square Renovation - Final GMP Construction Fort Collins, CO March 09, 2015 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT ESTIMATE Estimate Report DESCRIPTION QUANTITY 20-RESTROOMS 22000.020 ECH1 - ELECTRICAL CEILING HEATER 2.0 EA 22000.025 EF1 - EXHAUST FAN 2.0 EA TOTAL 230000- HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) TOTAL HVAC ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL 26000,000 -SUBCONTRACTOR ELECTRICAL AND 1.0 LS LIGHTING SYSTEMS BUDGET - RESTROOMS"' 26000.005 DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 1.0 EA 26000.010 FIRE ALARM STROBE 2.0 EA 26000.015 GFCI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 2.0 EA 26000,020 JUNCTION BOXESTO FIXTURES 6.0 EA 26000.025 LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS NCL 26000,030 PROVIDE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TO MEP 5.0 EA FIXTURES AND DEVICES 26000.035 RELOCATE FA PANEL AND INSTALL HORN INCL STROBES AS INDICATED TOTAL 260000-ELECTRICAL 26 50 00 - LIGHTING 26500.005 EXTERIOR WALL WASH LIGHT FIXTURES 2.0 EA 26500.010 FIXTURE R1 7.0 EA 26500.015 FIXTURE S2 1.0 EA 26500.020 REINSTALL DOWN LIGHTS TO EXISTING LOBBY 3.0 EA 26500.025 SINGLE POLE SWITCH 1.0 EA 26500.030 TIME CLOCK TO EXTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURES 1.0 EA 26500.035 WALL OCCUPANCY SENSOR 3.0 EA TOTAL 26 50 00 - LIGHTING TOTAL ELECTRICAL SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION 02 41 00 - DEMOLITION 2410.005 REMOVE EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL FOR NEW LOBBY DOOR 2410.015 REMOVE INT GYP FROM STUDS TO REMAIN 2410,015 REMOVE INT GYP WALLS 2410,020 REMOVE EXISTING FLOORING TO RESTROOM & LOBBY AREAS 2410.025 REMOVE EXISTING CEILINGS TO RESTROOM & LOBBY AREAS 2410.030 REMOVE PAIR OF DOORS AND FRAME 2410.035 REMOVE SINGLE DOOR AND FRAME 2410.040 REMOVE WALL HEATER UNIT 2410.340 REMOVE MAILBOX UNIT - STORE FOR REUSE 2410.345 REMOVE BIKE RACK - STORE FOR REUSE 2410.350 REMOVE ALL SIGNS - STORE FOR REUSE 2410.355 REMOVE KNOX BOX - STORE FOR REUSE nai. Mortenson constructiwi Project Oty:O GSF 18,580.00 9,053 9,053 18,580 18,580 18,580 63.0 SF 7.31 460 397.0 SF 0.44 174 205.0 SF 2.19 449 352.0 SF 1.46 514 352.0 SF 0.44 154 2.0 EA 21.92 44 1.0 EA 21.92 22 1.0 EA 43.84 44 1.0 EA 21.92 22 1.0 EA 66.42 66 1.0 EA 21.92 22 1.0 EA 21.92 22 1506EO23 Old Town Square Renovation 90 CD.est Page 11 Article or Paragraph Number Resident Superintendent. CONTRACTOW$ ......... ...... 6.2 Responsibilities -- CONTRACTOR s-in general .................................. 6 ENGINHEW3-in general ........................................ 9 Limitations on ............................................9.13 OWNEW&-in general .............................................8 Retainage _ _ ........ ............. --- _ .......... ..... _ 14.2 Rem of Docum ents ................................................. 3.7 Review by CONTRACTOR; Shop Drawings and Samples Prior to Submittal------------------ ....... fi.25 Review of Applications for Progress Paymentil ................................ ... J4.4-14.7 Right to an adymmenk ...........................................10.2 Rights Of Way__ __ ...................... ...... .......... ..... -A-1 Rcyaltia, Patent Fees and ....................................... 6.12 Safe Structural Loading ..........................................6.18 Safety — and Protectionk ..................... ...... 4.3.2,6.16,6.18, ............ ...........I......_.... 6.20-6.21. 7.2. 13.2 general.................................................... . O.Xt.&B Representative, CONTRACTOIrs .......................0.21 Samples -- definition of ......................... ............................ 1.34 general ..................................................... 0.24-6.28 Review by CONTRACTOR ................................6.25 Review by ENGINEER ..............................6.26.6.27 relatedWork .....................................................0.28 submittal of ....................................................0.24.2 submittal procedures.........................................0.25 Schedule of progress ............. ......... 2.61 2-8-19, 6.6, ............ I .... ..... - ..... ­­ ....... 6.29,10.4.15.2.1 Schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample Submittals 2.6.2.8-2.9, 6.24-6.28 Schedule of Values ZO-2.9,14,11 Schedules -- Adherence tq .................................. .............. 15.2.1 Adjusting...........................................................0.6 Change of Contract Times.................................10.4 Initially Acceptable ......... ............................ 2.8,2.9 Preliminary ...................... .............. .............. Scope of Changes .................... .................. 10.3-10A Subsurface Conditions ........................................4.2.1.1 Shop Drawings — and Samples, general ............ .... . .............. 6.24-6.28 Change Orders & Applications for Payments, and,---_..-_........--- __ --------- 9.7-9,9 definition of ......................................................1.35 ENGINEER's approval of ................................16.2 ENGINEER s responsibility for review . 9.7,6.24-6.28 related Work .....................................................0.28 review procedurck ..............................28, 6.24-6.28 Article or Paragraph Number submittal required ...............................................6.24.1 6.24.1 Submittal Procedures ......................................... 6.25 use to approve substitutions .............................. 6.7.3 Shown or Indicated ............... ............................... A.3.1 Site Access ......................................................7.2, 13.2 Site Cleanliness ................................. .................... §. 17 Site, Visits to -- by ENGINEER, . ... ..................................... 9.2, 13.2 byothers ..........................................................13.2 .special causes of lose policy form, insurance 5.6.2 definition Specifications— defination of . ..................... ..... . ...................... 1.36 of Technical Societies, reference to ..................3.3.1 precedence ......................................................3.3.3 Standards and Specifications of Technical Societies ......................................... 3.3 Starting Construction, Beforiq .............................. 2.5-2.8 Starting the Work .....................................................2.4 Stop or Suspend Work -- by CONTRACTOR ..........................................15.5 by OWNER .....................................8.9, 13.10,15.1 Storage of materials and equipment... .... ............. 4.1.7.2 Structural Loading, Safety ....................................... 6.18 Subcontractor— Concernin& ................................................ 6.8-6. 11 definition of ....................................................137 delays..................................... ................... ... 12.3 waiver of rights ............................................... 0.11 Subcontractors --in general ................................. 6."Al Subcontracts --required provision$ ........ 5_111. 6.11, 11.4.3 Submittals — Applications for Payment .................................14.2 Maintenance and Operation Manuals ..............14.12 Procedures.......................................................6.25 Progress Schedules ...................................... 16,2.9 Samples ........................... ................. __().24-6.28 Schedule of Valuck .................... ............... 2.6,14.1 Schedule of Shop Drawings and Samples Submissions... ......... ................ ........ 2.6, 2.8-2.9 Shop Drawingr ......................................... 6.24-6.28 Substantial Completion -- certification or --- ......................... 6.30.23. 14.8-14.9 definition of .............................. . .................... 138 Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures....,.. 6.7.2 Substitutes and "or Equal" Items ...............................6.7 CONTRACTOR's Expens4 ............................63.1.3 ENGINEER& Evaluation ................................6.7.3 "Or-Equal"................................................... 0.7.1.1 Substitute Construction Methods xiii EJCW GFNERAL CONDITIONS 1910 -8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT CO UMS MODIFICATIONS (RFV 9/99) Variations in Work —Minor Authorized ........................... .... .. __.6.25, 6.27, 9.5 Article or paragraph Number Visits to Site --by ENGINEER . ...................................9.2 Waiver of Claims --on Final Payment ................ ..... 14.15 Waiver of Rights by insured partiev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,11,6,11 Warranty and Guarantee, Gcncral—by CONTRACTOR ,..... .0.30 Warranty of Title, C...................... 6is. .. Work — Accessto ..........................................................13.2 byothers ............................................................... 7 Changes in the .....................................................10 Continuing the ..................................................0.29 CONTRACTOR May Slap Wcrk or Terminate ...............................................15.5 Coordination of ................................ ........... ....... 7.4 Cost of thc. ................................................ 11.4-11.5 definition of ......................................................1.43 neglected by CONTRACTOR . ...................... .... 13-14 other Work 7 OWNER May Stop Work ................................. 1310 OWNER May Suspend Work ................... 33.10,15.1 Related, Work at Site,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, _ 7.1-73 Starting the ........................................................2.4 Stopping by CONTRACTOR . . ............... ...... ... 15.5 Stopping by OWNER ..... ........................... 15.1-15.4 Variation and deviation authorized. niinct ........... 3,6 Work Change Directive — claims pursuant to.............................................10.2 definition of .... .................................................... .44 principal references tq ...................... 3.5.3.10.1-10.2 Written Amendment — definition of ......................................................1.45 principal references tq .............. 1.10,3.5.5.10,15.12, ......................... 0.6.2,61.2.6,19, 10.1, 10A, .... I ...... .. I ....... .... 11.2,12.1, 13.112, 14.7.2 Written Clarifications and Interpretations..................................3.6.3, 9.4. 9.11 Written Notice Required — by CONTRACTOR .............................7.1, 9.10-9.11, 11 ... --- ............................ 10,4,11.2. 12.1 by OWNER .................... 10.4, 11.2, 13.14 xv EJCDC CENTRAL CONDITIONS 1910 -8 (1990 EDITIOM w/ CITY OF FORT COLUNS MODIRCA170NIS (MV 9/99) GENERAL COMMONS ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other Contract Documents the following terms have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. I.I. Addenda —Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify. correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the Contract Documents 1.2. Agreement —The written contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be performed: other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. 1 A Ayplication for Payment —The form accepted by EsNGINMR which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 1.4. Asbestos --Any material that contains more than one Percent asbestos and is fiiable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 1.5. Bid -The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be perforated. 1.6. Bidahng Documents —The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 1.7, Bidding Requirements —The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, and the Bid form. 1.8. Bonds —Performance and Payment bonds and other instruments of security. L9. Change Order --A document recommended by 24GIN[MR, which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Cordract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 1.10. Conbact Documents —The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), CONTRACTOR's Bid (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Notice to Proceed, the Bonds these General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings as the VCDC 6ENETAt. CONI)M ON51910-S (1990 E(etim) w/ Carr or FORT COLLINS MODIRCATIONS ptE-v in-000) same are more specifically identified in the Agreement, together with all Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders and ENGINEER's written interpretations and clarifications issued pursuant to paragtaphs3.5, 3.6.1 and 3.6.3 on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. Shop Drawing submittals approved pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27 and the reports and dmwings referred to in paragraphs 4 2.1 and 4.2.2 are not Contract Documents. 1.11. Contract Price —The moneys payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11 .9.1 in the case of Unit Price Work). 1.12. Contract Times —The numbers of days or the dates stated in the Agreement (i) to achieve Substantial Completion, and (ii) to complete the Work so that it is ready for final Payment as evidenced by ENGINEER'S written recommendation of final payment m accordance with paragraph 14.13 1.13. COMRACTOR--The person firm or corporation with whom OWNER has enteral into the Agreement 1.14. defective —An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient in that it does not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by OWNER at Substantial Completion in accordant: with paragraph 14.8 or 14.10). 1.15. Drawings --The drawings which show the scope, extent and character of the Work to be furnished and performed by CONTRACTOR and witich have been prepared or approved by ENGINEER and are referred to in the Contract Documents Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined 1.16. Effective Date of the Agreement —The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated it means the date on which the Agreement is sighed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 1.17. ENGINEER —The person, firm or corporation named as such in the Agreement. 1.18. ENGiNEER's Conaultard-A person, firm or corporation having a contract with ENGINEER to furnish services as ENGINEER's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. 1.19. Field Order —A written order issued by ENGINEER which orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with paragraph 9.5 but which does not involve a change in the Conuact Price or the Contract Times. materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other control systems or water. 1.42. Umt Price Work —Work to be paid for on the basis of wit prices. 1.43. Wori--The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable its thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and furnishing and intcorpomting materials and equipment into the construction. and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents 1.44, Wok Change Directive —A written directive to CONTRACTOR issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended by ENGINEER, ordering an addition. deletion or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions ruder which the Work is to be performed as provided in paragraph4.2 ce 4.3 or to emergencies under paragraph 6.23. A Work Charge Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or docwnented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effec{ if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in paragraph 10.2 1.45. Written Ameni6nent--.A written amendment of the Commet Documents, signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally dealing with the noncngincering or nontechnical rather than strictly construction -related aspects of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS Delivery of Ban&-. 2.1_ When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish in accordance with paragraph 5.1. Copies of Documents: 22 OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten copies (unless otherwise specified in the Supplementary Conditions) of the Contract Documents as are reasonably necessary for the execution of the Wok. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. Commencement of Contract Times, Notice toProcee& 2.3. The Contract Times will commertee to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, or, FXW OE14MU . COWMMOM 19104 (1990 Edda) w(UTY OF FORT COLLIM MCURCATIONS OLEV 42000) if a Notice to proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at anytime within thirty days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no H-anl. y.ifl the of -Rid opening or the thirtieth day after the Rffective{late of-llte-Agreemeni whichever date isearlier. Starting the Work: 2.4. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to nil, but no Work shall he done at the site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run Before Starting Construction: 2.5. Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding with any Work affected thereby; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof 2.6. Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review: 2.6.1, a preliminary progress schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents: 262 a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals which will list each required submittal and the times for submitting, reviewing and processing such submittal; 2.62.1. in no case will a schedule be accepiable_which, allows 1� than 21 _calendar days for each review by Eton ter. 2.6.3. A preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work which will include quantities and prices of items aggregating the Contract Price and will subdivide the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during construction- Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.7. Before any Work at the site is started. CONTRACTOR and 04W& F shall eaeh deliver to the ether OWNER with copies to identified in the Supplementmy� FNGrNEiF:R 3.3.3.2, the provisions of any such taws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the Provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, code or instruction shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of OWNER, CONTRACTOR or ENGINEER or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to OWNER. ENGINEER or am, of ENGINEER's Consultants, agents or employees any duty- or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the I rovisions of paragraph 9.13 or any other provision of the (bntract Docrments 3.4. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as ordered", "as directed", "as required", "as allowed" "as approved" or tams of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable", "suitable', "acceptable", "proper" or "satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe a requirement, direction review or judgment of ENGINEER as to the Weak, it is intenaled that such requirement, direction, review or judgment will be solely to evaluate, in general, the completed Work for compliance with the requirements of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign to ENGINEER arty duty or authority to supervise or direct the Cumishrng or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.13 or any other provision of the Contract Documents, AmencEngandSupplementingConf el Documents 3.5. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or mare of the following ways: 3.5.1. a formal Written Amendment, 3.5.2. a Change Order (pursuant to paragraph 10.4), or EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910 8 (1990 Eatltim) w:(C] TY OF FORT C' )LLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4r2000) 3.5.3. a Work Change Directive (pursuant to paragraph 10.1). 3.6. In addition the requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may he authorized, in one or more of the following ways: 3.6.1. A Field Order (pursuant to paragraph 9.5), 3.6.2. ENGINEER's approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6,27), or 3.6.3. ENGINEERS written interpretation or clarification (pursuant to paragraph 9A). Reuse ofDocumentr 3.7. CONTRACTOR and arr Subcontractor or Supplier or other person or organizotion performin$c or furnWiinng any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with OWNER (i) shall not have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or espies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of ENGINEER or ENGiNF.ER's Consultant, and (ii) shall not reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents or copies on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific written verification or adaptation by FNGINFER. ARTICLE 4-AVAILABILTIY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS Arvsitabitity ofLanek. 4.1. OWNER shall furnish as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be performed rights -of -way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR Upon reasonable written request, 03AWFo shrill Lml1. CO TTnArTny with a eefree swiementofrecord legal lit}rand-legal-ddscriptionof the lands-anpon which the Weak-4s_to_be-pevfommed iintl OWNER'S -interest therein -as-necemry- for -giving -notice of--or--{ding-a-medarac's such -lands in OWNER shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which CONTRACTOR will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by OWNER, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. IC CONTRACTOR and OWNER are unable to agree on entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustments in the Contract Price or the Contract Times as a result of any delay in OWNER's furnishing these lands, rights -of - way or easements, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. submission of a bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or 4.2.6.4.2. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a restnh of any examination, investigation, exploration, test or study of the site mid contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for CONTRACTOR prior to CONTRACTOR's making such final commitmem; or 4.2.6.4.3. C,ONTRACI'OR tailed to give the written notice within the time and as required by paragraph 4.2.3. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR arc unable to agree on entitlement to or as to the amount or length of any such equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, a claim may be made therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. However, OWNER, ENGINEER and ENGINEERs Consultants shall not be liable to CONTRACTOR for any claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in connection with any after project or anticipated project 4.3. PhtaiodConddons—UndergroundFacilities: 4.3 1. Shown orhideated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based an information and data furnished to OWNER or ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 4.3.1.1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and 4.3.12. The cast of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price and CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for: (i).reviewing and checking all such information and data, (i) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents,(iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities as provided in pmragmph620 and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. 4.32. Not Shown or Indicated: If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the site which was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall. promppttly immediately after becoming aware thereof and bef rare further disturbing conditions affected thereby or lxrfcrm4 any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.23). identify the owner of such Underground Facility and EXDCOENtR.ALCONV111ONa Ivlos (1990 saliva) w'0 YOF PORTOOLLINSAIODn�ICATIONS(Rol'420W) give written notice to that owner and to OWNER and ENGINEER ENGINEER will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence of the Underground Facility. If ENGINEER concludes that a change in the Contract Doctunents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued as provided in Article 10 to reflect and document such consequences. During such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility as provided in paragraph 620 CONTRACTOR shah may be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and that CONTRACTOR slid not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are tenable to agree on entitlement to or the amount or length of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. However, OWNER, ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants shall not be liable to CONTRACTOR for any claims, costs, losses or damages incurred or sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project Reference Points.• 4.4. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points For construction which in ENGINEER's judgment are necessary, to enable CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall Protect and preserve the established reference points and shell make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of OWNER CONTRACTOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in gm&-s or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel. 4.5. Asbestos, I'm, Petroleum, hazardous Waste or Radoadlve Material. 4.5.1. OWNER shall be responsible for any Asbestos. PCBs• Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material uncmered or revealed at the site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work and which may present a substantial clanger to persons or Mite. exposed thereto in connection with the Work at the site. OWNER shall not be responsible for any such materials brought to the site by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Suppliers or anyone else for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance: 5.4. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Wok being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR's performance and furnishing of the Work and CONTRACTOR's other obligations taller the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or mcbrectl employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work. or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable 5.4.1. claims under worker' compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; 5.4.2. claims for damages because of bod l injury, occupational sickness or disease, o ath of CONTRACTOR's employees; 5.4.3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than CONTRACTOR's employees; 54:4. claims -for damages insured by customary d, "ct�'41ated to the'.of by person par aRY Other-rrasetk 5-4.5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom: and 5A.6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of arty• person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph 5.4 to be purchased and maintained shall: 5A 7 with respect to insurance require) by paragraphs 5.4.3 through 5.4.6 inclusive anxi 5.4.9, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liabihty)� OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds. and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insureds. 5.4.8. include the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater, 5.4.9. include completed operations insurance; FJCIx OENERAL(.ONDInoN$1910.8 (1990Edltim) w/ CITY OF FORT CULL M MODIFICATIONS Qitrl' 41-70DO) 5.4.10. include contractual liability insurance covering CONTRACTOR's indemnity obligations under paragraphs 6.12, 6.16 and 6.31 through 6.33; SA.i 1. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be cancelled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days' prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to wham a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraph 53.2 will so provide); 5.4.11_. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when CONTRACTOR may be correcting. removing or replacing rkfective Work in accordance with paragraph 13.12; and 5.4.13. with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final payment (and CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to OWNER and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter) OWNER's Liability Insurance: 5.5. in addition to insurance required to be provided by CONTRACTOR under pamgmph5.4, OWNER, at OWNER's option, may purchase and maintain at OWNMs expense OWNER's own liability insurance as will protect OWNER againstclaims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. Property Insurance- 5:6. - ..Unlew otherwise provided -in ba-Supplementary Conditions. OWNER shall- purchase- and - nmainain o&-tlta -fuF1-replacItIment-.cost_ thereof --(subject- -to such deduaibla-amourms-us; may be- pxoaded--in-the Supplementary Conditions orrequired-by-Laws-and Regukttioms).--This item tcesVefl: Sb.f--intolade- the, interests of entities identified in the Supplementary -Conditions, each of-whomis-deemed to haveeninsurable-interest and shall -be hated as an or -additional -insured. 5.6.2: be written un_a-Builclds Ride -"elf -risk' --<a ..1. II ,, 1.. ..,d 1. - e* 1.w'��t 1966 .. wffdfe agavrA at lea rocovery-against- any -of-CONTRACTOR. -f ubeontmUors; Receipt andAppli aation oflnsmurrce Procee&. 5.12. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 will be adjusted with OWNER and made payable to OWNER as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of paragraph5.13. OWNER shall deposit in a separate account amen money so received, and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach if no other special agreement is reached the damaged Work shal I be repaired or replaced the moneys so received applied on account thereof and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order or Written Amendm cart. 5.13. OWNER as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any lass with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writ' em gg within fifteen days after the occurrence of loss to OWNER'S exercise of this power. If such objection be made, OWNER as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. if no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, OWNER as fiduc cry shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and , Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance,• Option to Replace: 5.14. If OWNER has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the httandk-or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the ether p", CONTRACTOR in accordance with Article 5 on the lbas� of not -conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting -party she&so no*the-other--party OWNER will nouly CO�l[hgCIO$ in writing within tart men days after receipt deliv of the certificates (or other -evidence requested) to OWNER as required by pamgmph 2.7. other such edditioml-information-in .respect -of insurance proyidod-os 4he-other-may seasonably -request_- If either party doesnotpurchase or -maintain -all -of the $ondv-and insurance- required -o€-such-.party--by---the -tact wTitirt-of-such -lecture to purchase prior to the star of the or remedv. the other oarv-may-elect to obtain the expense of the Partial Utilization -Property Insurance: 5.15. If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Suhstantial EtcDCOENERAL ('OMITtONs lvtos (iv9oE(itim) w/ OTY OF FORT C)LUMS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4r1000) Completion of all the Work, such use or occupancy may be accomplished in accordance with paragraph 14.IQ Cvided that no such use or occupancy shall commence ore the insurers providing the property insurance have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be cancelled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6-corfrpACTOR's Supenicion and Saperintendence: 6.1. CONTRACTOR shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently. devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary• to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of corstniction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to sec that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents 6.2 CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be CONTRACTOR's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to CONTRACTOR. Labor, Materials and F.pipntent: 6.3. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the Work as required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good disia line and order at the site. Except as otherwise requued for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. all Work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and CONTRACTOR will not permit overtime work or the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday or any legal holiday without OWNER's written consent given after prior written notice to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall submit requests to the ENGINEER no less than 48 hours in advance of any Work to be performed an Saturday. Sunday, Holidays or outside the Regular Working Hours. by the resulting change, all of which will be CONTRACTOR shall perform not less than 20 considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the percent of the Wwl�with its own Cgces�that is, proposer] substitute. ENGRJEER may require w9 su ntta he 2 t M ment CONTRACTOR to furnish additional data about shall be understood to refer is Work the value of the proposed substitute. which totals not less than 20 paced of the Contract Price. 6.7.1.3. COMRACTOR' Expense: All data to be provided by CONTRACTOR in support of any 6.8.2. 111-the-Supplementary-Catditions Biddin proposed "or -equal" or substitute item will be at Documents require the identity of certain CONTRAC'TOR's expense. Subcontractors, Suppliars or other persons or organizations (mcluclmg [}use w}IO are to furnish the 6.7.2. Subsutuie Consmrchon Methods or principal items of materials or equipment) to be Procedures: If a ,ssppeeccific means, method technique, sequence is submitted to OWNER in-advance-of-the-speei€ed date Effective Date for or procedure of construction shown or prior to the of the Agreement indicated in and expressly required by the Contract acceptance by OWNER and ENGINHEK-ond—if Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a C-0• 4?66,04:0e M_ _.i.mined it list theFeer :_ substitute meam, method" technique, sequence or procedure of construction acceptable to ENGINEER. OWNERS or ENGINEER'S acceptance (either in CONTRACTOR shall submit sul£cient information to writing or by failing to make written objection thereto allow ENGINEER, in ENGiNEER's sole discretion, to by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to the bidding documents or the Contract Documents) of that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. any such S- entraeter, Supplier or other person The procedure for review by ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in subparagraph 6.7.1.2. in 6.7.3.Enginee6 Evaluation: ENGINEER will be lvhinh ease AR eeeyt°one—�� aka C Wit —Prey --will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate a-'•uyedd by h-e diff each proposal or submittal made pursued to such substitution and an appropriate -Change -Order paragraphs 6.7.1.2 and 6.7.2. ENGINEER will be the will be imed of Wfitten Affiftwiffiefit lwe&ill sole judge of acceptability. No 'or equal" or w¢stitute a condition of the Contract reguuirg the substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized without use of the named subcontractors, suppliers or other hNGINEER's prior written acceptance which will be persons or organization on the Work unless prior evidenced by either a Change Order or an approved written aporoval is obtained front OWNER and Shop Drawing. OWNER may require ENGINEER_ No acceptance by OWNER or CONTRACTOR to furnish at OONTRACTOR's ENGINEER of any such Subcontractor. Supplier or expense a special performance guarantee or other other person or organization shall constitute a waiver surety with respect to any "or -equal" or substitute, of any right of OWNER or ENGINEER to reject EN024E2;R will record time required by defective Work. ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants in evaluating substitutes proposed or submitted by 6:9. CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraphs 6.7.1.2 and 6.7.2 and in making changes in the Contract 6.9.1. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct OWNER and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions contract with OWNER for work on the Project) of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons occasioned thereby. Whether or not ENGINEER and organ rations performing or f rr shing any of the accepts a substitute item so proposed or submitted by Work under a direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR shall reimburse CONTRACTOR just as CONTRACTOR is OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER and respa sible for CONTRACTOR's own acts and INGINEER's Consultants for evaluating each such omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall proposed substitute item. create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor. Supplier or other person or organization any 6_8. Concerning Subcontractors, ,Suppliers and contractual relationship between OWNER or Others: ENGINEER and arty such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization nor shall it create any 6.8.1. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any obligation on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any (including those acceptable to OWNER and such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or ENGINEER as indicated in paragraph 6.8.2), whether organization except as may otherwise be required by initially or as a substitute. against whom OWNER or Laws and Regulations. OWNER or ENGINEER may ENGINEER may have reasonable objection. ban sh to any subcontractor, supplier or other pens m CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any or ortanizatim evidence of amounts paid W Subcontractor. Supplier or other person or orgaruMnon CONTRACTOR in aecnrdancc with to fiunish or perform any of the Work against whom CONTRACTOR'S "Applications for Payment". CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection EJCDC O£NEM CONDITIOM 19104 (1990 Edtion) 13 w/ aTY OF FORT COLUM MODIRCATIONS (REV 4n000) 1375 Sherman Street Deaver, Colorado, 80261 Sales and Use Taxes for the State of Colorado, Regional Tnarnsponation District (RTD) and txatain Colorado counties are collected by the State of Qgjoradt and art mciuded in the,ertifiesti m qC Exenntion. All eppbcable Sales and Use Taxes (including State collected taxes), on any items other than construction and building materials nvsicolty incorporated into the . ei eci are to be id by CONNTRACTOR and are to inc3udzd in anoropriate bid items. Use of Premises: 616 CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the o� abore of workers to the site and land and areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents and other lard and areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, rights -of -way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of arty adjacent land or areas, resulting from the pzrformancz of tine Work. Should any claim be made by arty such owner or occupant because of the perfoIn: of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. CONTRACTOR shall, to the fulled cKtent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and ]told harmless OWNER, ENGINEER ENGINEER's Consultant and anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any d ins or action, legal or equitable, brought by arty• such owner or occupant against OWNER ENGINEER or any outer party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. 6.17. During the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises Gee from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work At the completitm of the Work CONTRACTOR shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. CONTRACTOR shall leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER at Substantial Completion of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall restore to original condition all property no desigosted for alteration by the Contract Docum ents. 6.18. CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger that structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to dresses or pressures that will endanger it. Record Documents: VCDC ODMRAL CONDITIONS 191" (1990 Edtiaa) WOTY OF FORT 001.I1IS MODIFICATIONS MV 4r200e) 6.19. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the site one record copy of all Drawings, Specificatiortx, Addenda Written Amendments, Change Orders. Work Change Directives, Field Orders and written interpretatioru and clarifications (issued pursuant to paragraph 9.4) in good order and annotated to show all changes made during construction These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon completion of the Work, and prior to release of final payment, these record doctanents, Samples and Shop Drawings will be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER. Safety and Pmtevdon: 6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety ol; and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 6.20.1. all persons on the Work site or who may be affected by the Work; 6.20.2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and 6.20.3. other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property referred to to paragraphs 6.20.2 or 6.30.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultant or surf one employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part. to the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization directly or iraiirectly employed by any of them). 0ONTRAC7.OR's dunes and responsibilities for the safety and protection of the Work shah] continue until such time as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued a 15 March 09, 2015 no-. Mortenson construction Old Town Square Renovation - Final GMP Construction Fort Collins, CO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT ESTIMATE Project Oty:o GSF Estimate Report 30 - STAGE SUPERSTRUCTURE 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 5120.000 —BUDGET FOR STEEL FRAMING - INCL 1.0 LS 79,485.00 79,485 INSTALL OF ACOUSTIC ROOF DECK & BOND"' 5120 001 —STAGE STRUCTURAL FRAMING TO HAVE NOTE SEGMENTED SIDES AND BACK WITH A CURVED FRONT BEAM"' 5120.002 —8 INCH DECK OVERHAND ILO 2FT NOTE OVERHANG— 5120.005 HSS 12X4X1/4 TO STAGE ROOF - INCL INCL 5120,010 HSS 12X6X1/4 TO STAGE ROOF - INCL INCL 5120.015 HSS 8X8X1/4 COLUMN TO STAGE - 4EA - INCL INCL 5120.025 L 2.5X2.5X3/16 ANGLE TO SKYLIGHT - INCL INCL 5120.030 L 3X3X3/16 ANGLE TO ROOF PERIMETER - INCL INCL 5120.040 STEEL PIPE FOR LIGHT FIXTURES AT STAGE - INCL INCL 5120.042 VULCRAFT METAL DECK TO STAGE - INCL INSTALLATION ONLY (REF. 05 34 00 FOR SUPPLY) 5120.045 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN INCLUSIONS - 1.0 ALLO 5,700.00 5,700 ALLOWANCE W TOTAL 0512 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 85,185 TOTAL SUPERSTRUCTURE 85,185 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE 04 22 00 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 4220.005 8" CMU WALL TO STAGE (includes rebar) - 116.0 SF 23.17 2,688 MORTENSON MASONRY TOTAL 04 22 00 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 2,688 04 40 00 - STONE 4400.010 4" SAND STONE CAP TO STAGE BACK WALL - 2' 54.0 LF 60.00 3,240 WIDE TOTAL 04 40 00 - STONE 3,240 04 71 00 - BRICK MASONRY 4710.005 BRICK VENEER TO STAGE WALLS 455.0 SF 26.98 12,274 TOTAL 04 7100 - BRICK MASONRY 12,274 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS 5120.020 6x4x1/2 GALVANIZED STEEL BRICK ANGLE 72.0 LF 81.50 5,868 5120.022 HSS 2X1X11GA STRUCTURAL STEEL POSTS TO 25.0 EA 100.00 2,500 DECORATIVE RAILING TOTAL 055000- METAL FABRICATIONS 05 52 00 - METAL RAILINGS 5520.005 42" LOCK METAL GATE TO STAIR OPENING 5520.010 DECORATIVE RAIL TO STAGE BACK WALL - 3/8" ROUND PICKETS WELDED TO FLAT BAR TOP AND BOTTOM 5520.010 RAILING TO BASEMENT STAIRS 1506EO23 Old Town Square Renovation 90 CD.est Page 13 8,368 1.0 EA 850.00 850 59.0 LF 221.00 13,039 15.0 LF 85.00 1,275 construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required by ENGINEER, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by ENGIN=— on previous submittals 627. ENGINEER's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing called ENGINEER'S attention to each such variation at the time of submission as required by paragraph 6.25.3 and ENGINEER has given written approval of each such variation by a specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph b.25.1. 6.28, Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submissions accepted by ENGINEER as required by pamgraph2.9, arty related Work performed prior to ENGINEER'S review and approval of the ppeerrttinent submmtal will be at the sole expense and responsbility of CONTRACTOR. Continuing the Work: 6.29. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by paragraph 15.5 or as OWNER and CONTRACTOR may otherwise agree in wining. 6.30. CONMCTOR's General Warranty and Gaarantet: 6.30. L CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER. ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. CONTRACTOR'S warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 6.30.1.1. abuse, modification or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than CONTRACTOR, Subcatractors or Suppliers; or 6.30.1.2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. 6.30.2. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. Nome of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in FJCDC OENERAt CONDITIONS 191" (1svc Edtim) cad CITY OF FORI COLUNS MODIFICATIONS OLEV 42000) accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR'S obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 6.30.2.1. observations by ENGRQEER; 6.30.2.2. recommendation of any progress or final payment by ENGINEER; 6.30.2.3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completitn or any payinent by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents; 6.30.2.4, use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by OWNER; 6.30.2.5. any acceptance by OWNER or any failure to do so; 6,30.2.6. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 14.13, 6.30.23. any inspection, test or approval by others; or 6.30.2.8. any correction of &fecrhve Wort: by OWNER Indemaifimtion: 631. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNNER. ENGINEER, ENGINEERS Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including, but not limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any Such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting thereGcmt, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of CONTRACTOR any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person or entity. 6.32. In any and all claims against OWNER or ENGINEER or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of CONTRACTOR any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by 17 structures at or contiguous to the site that have been utilized by ENGINM in preparing the Contract Documents SS. ( s-rm5port•;ibililies-it-rzspestt�f �rehesing fcxth inracmgra* S.S through 5-10 8.6. OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in paragraph 10.4. 8.7. OWNER's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests and approvals is set forth in paragraph 13.4. 8.8. In connection with OWNER's right to stop Work or suspend Work, see paragraphs 13.10 and 15.1. paragraph 15.2 deals with OW R's right to terminate services of CONTRACTOR under certain circumstances. 8.9. The OWNER mall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR'S means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautitms and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or perforniance of the Work. OWNER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or famish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.11. if and to the extent Feawrable .. arrangements --have, -been --made-_to--satisfy- OWNEWs responsibility in-resraaoE-thereoFwill-bens-set-forth-in-the Supplementary -CoMitions- ARTICLE 9—ENGINEER'S STATUS DIiRINC CONSTRUCTION OWNFR's Representative: 9.1. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the lnnttatiors of authority of ENGINEER as OWNER's representative during construction we set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER lists to Site: 9.2. ENGINEER will make visits to the site at intervals a ate to the various stages of construction as E-NrR deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qunlified design professional the progress EJCDC GENERAL OONDIT1oNS 1910-8 (199a E6tian) wl (1rY OF FORT COLUNS MODIFICATIONS *LEI' 4/2a0a) that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of CONTRACTOR's executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations. ENGINEER will endeavor for the benefit of OWNER to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documens. ENGINEER will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on - site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. ENGINEER's efforts will be directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and on - site observations, ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard OWNER against defective Work. ENGINEER's visits and on -site observations are subject to all the limitations on ENGINEER's authority and responsibility set forth in ragraph 9.13, and particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of ENGINEEWs on -site visits or observations of CONTRACTOR' Work ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Taws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or perfnmancc of the Work. Project Representam e: 9.3. if OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will furnish a Resident ]'reject Representative to assist ENGINEER in providing more continuous observation of the Work. The responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in paragraphs 9.3 and 9.13 and :n the cu ffl.,.......M... Eonditions of —these General Conditions. If OWNER designates another representative or agent to represent OWNER at the site who is not ENGINEER'S Consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other person will be as orovided it the Swelemeittafy Genditie come-mph-9.3 93.1 The Rermsentative's dealirnas in matters 1 ti ttairning to the on� Tz work will, in general, be with the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR But. the Re niative will keep the OWNER_ pr_gperlry advised about _such matters. Thg. Rg v�esentativ_e's dealings with subcontractors will only be thnrcuA or with the full knlowand approval of the CONTRACTOR 9.3.2. Duties and Responsibilities. Representative will: 9.3.2.1.Schedules - Review the progress 19 ENGINEER noting txuticularIv the relationship of the paymatt regttestedl_lo the xhzdule o[yalurs, worm: completed and materials and eauifanent delivered at the site but not inco p rated m the Work. 9,3 2 J O--Q.anPij 4gL, 9.3.2.10.1. Before ENGINEER issues a Certificate of Substantial Completion submi to CONTRACTOR a list of observed items requiring correction or completion 9.3.2,10.2. Conduct final inspection in the company of the ENGINEER OWNFR and CONTRAC"IOR and exire a final list of items to be corrected or completed. 9.3 210.3 Observe that all items on the final list have been corrected or completed and make recommendations to ENGINEER concerning acceptance. 9.3.3_ Limitation of Authority The Representative shall 9.3.3.1. Authorize any deviations from the Contract Documents or accept any sun ittne gt8te[ials or eaujPAl£�614114�5_tiBJ)LDdIZSS� 12y_.1►AG ENGINEER 9.3.32. Exceed limitations of ENGINMRS authority as set forth in the Contract Documci is 9.3.3.3. Undertake any of theTtisihilities of the CONTRACTOR Subcontractors. or CONTRACT4)3'� au�trintendknt 2�i.4..-6dv��Qdt..sd_.Lsstte d�r>s e�iXS to, or assume control over pnX ag&# oof thz mem methods, ie hmciues, sequences cr Rrocedttres for catstructiat unless ouch is specifically called for in the contract Documents. 9.3.3.5. Advise on or issue &rectlom icggiln a assume I over m ty an and or grams in connections with the Wait. 93.3.6. Accept_ Slwp Drawings or sample submittals fran anvone other than the CONTRACTOR. 93.3.7. Authorize OWNER to occupy the Work in whole or in pail. 93.3.8. Participate_. in specialized- Gelc3__cu Moral= tests or inspections conducted by others etcept_..as specifically authorized. by. .the ENGINEER Ckvifneations and Interpretations: 9.4. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written elatificstion% or interpretations of the D=OENEIM COMMOM 191" (IM Man) w/ CITY OF FORT COWM MODIFICATIONS (REV 4200a) requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as ENGINEER may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR If OWNUZ or CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and the parties are ratable to agree to the amount or orient thereoS if any, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a written claim therefor as provided in Article 11 or Article 12. Authorized Variations in Work: 9.5. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an aJustmem in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Locum ents. These maybe accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on OWNER and also on CONTRACTOR who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If OWNER or CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and the patties are unable to agree as to the amount or carom thereof, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a written claim therefor as provided in Article I I or 12. Rejechnrg Defective Work 9.6. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective, or that ENGINEER believes will not produce a completed project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents- ENGINEER will also have authority to require special inspection or testinng of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.9. whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments 9.7. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see paragrAphs 6.24 through 6.28 inclusive. 9.8. In connection with ENGINEERS authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10,11, and 12. 9.9. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. Determinations for Unit Prices 9.10. ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with 00NTRACIOR the ENGINEER's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application 21 responsibility set forth in this paragraph 9,13 shall also apply to GNGINEER's Consultants. Resident Project Representative and assistants. ARTICLE 10--CHANGES IN THE WORK 10.1. Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authori7od by a Written Amendment a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). 10.2. if OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to the eater, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of a Wort: Change Directive, a claim may be made therefor as provided in Article 1 I or Article 12. 10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.3 and 3.6, except in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.23 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.9. 10.4. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by ENGINEER (or Written Amendments) covering: 10.4.1. changes in the Work which are (i) ordered by OWNER pursuant to paragraph 10.1, (i) required because of acceptance of defective Work under paragraph 13.13 or correcting defective Work under paragraph 13.14. or (iii) agreed to by the parries; 10.4.2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties; and 10.4.3, changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 9.11. provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accortktnce with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work aril adhere to the progress schedule as provided in paragraph 6.29. 10.5. If notice of any change aQecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the givintj of any such notice will be CONTRACTOR's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. ARTICLE 11--CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE 11.1. The Contract Nice constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by CONTRACTOR shall be at CONTRACTOR s expense without change in the Contract Price. 11.1 The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to ENGINEER promptly (tut in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event (unless ENGINEER allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event All claims for adjustment in the Contract Price shall be determined by ENGINEER in accordance with paragaph 9.11 if OWNER and CON'TRACI OR cannot otherwise agree on the amount involved. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph 11.2. 113. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 11.3.1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prigs oomained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of EJCDCoet4FatAL(NDITIONs1910-a(199oBdlim) 23 w/ 411Y OF FORT COLW M MODIFICATIONS MEV 412000) performance and furnishing of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established by OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.91 provided they have resulted from causes other than the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of OWNER No such losses, damages and evgaenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining CONTRACTOR's fee. It however, any such loss or damage requires reconstruction and CONTRACTOR is placed in charge thereof CONTRACTOR shall be paid for services a fee proportionate to that stated in paragraph 11.6.2. 11.4.5.7. The cost of utilities, fuel and sanitary facilities at the site. 11.4.5.8. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the site, expressage and similar petty cash items in connect on with the Work. 11.4.5.9. Cost of premiums for additional Bonds and insurance required because of changes in the Work. 11.5. The tern Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following: 115.1. Payroll costs and other compensation of CONTRACTOR's officers, executives, principals (of partnership and sole proprietorships), general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents. expediters, timekeepers, clerks and other personnel employed by CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in CONTRACTOR's principal or a branch office for general administration of than Work and not specitical1 included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in paragraph 11.4.1 or specifically covered by paragraph 11AA--all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the CONTRACPOR's fee. 11.52. Expenses of CONTRACTORS principal and branch offices other than CONTRACTOR's office at the site. 1153. Any part of CONTRACTOR's capital expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR'S capital employed for the Work and charges against CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments. 11.5.4. Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all insurance whether or not CONTRACTOR is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and mainwin the same (except for the oast of premiums covered by subparagraph 11.4.5.9 above). FJCDCOD UALCOIIUMOM5191"(1990E6tiun) WtUTY OF FORT COLEYS MODIFICATIONS QtEV 42000) 11.5.5. Costs due to the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied and making good any damage to property. 11 5.6. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in paragraph 11.4. 11.6. The OONTRACTOR's fee allowed to CONTRACTOR for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows! 11.6.1, a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 11.62 if a fixed fee is not agreed open, then a fee based on than follow' percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work -- for cep incurred under paragraphs 11.4.1 and 11 A.2, the CONTRACTOR's fee shall be fifteen percent; 11.6.22. for casts incurred under paragraph 11.4.3, the CONTRACTOR's fee shalt be five percent, 11.623 where one or more tiers of subcontracts arc on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of paragraphs 11.4.1, 11.4.2, 11,4.3 and 11.6.2 is that the Subcontractor who actually performs or furnishes the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of fifteen percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under paragraphs 11.4.1 and 11.42 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and CONTRACTOR will each be paid a fee-o€-f"Percent o€ tM emourt paid -to tine ne.-Ioweriier Subecunrathw to be rteaotiated iJtg9.451_(aidn with the OWaj, but not to exceed _five tiercent of the amount paid to the next lower tier p-bW n 4gq, 11.6.2.4. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under paragraphs 11.4.4, 11A.5 and 11.5; 11.6.15. the amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of than actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in CONTRACTOR's fee by an amount. equal to five percent of such net decrease; and 11.6.2.6. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. the adjustment in CONTRACTOR's fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with paragraphs 11.6.2.1 through 11.6.2-5, inclusive. 11.7. Whenever the cast of any Wort: is to be 25 within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier Mall be deemed to be delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. 124. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completinng any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be CONTRACTOWs. sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall OWNER be liable to CONTRACTOR any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization, or to arty surety for or employee or agent of an of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (1) delays caused by or within the control of the CONTRACTOR, or (it) delays beyond the control of both panics including, but not limited to, fees, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts or neglect by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7. ARTICLE 13—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13A. Noriee of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which OWNER or ENGINEER have actual knowledge will he given to CONTRACTOR AD defective Work may be rejected, corrected or accepted as prov idcd in this Article B. Access to Worlc.- 13.2. OWNER ENGINEER ENGINEER's Consultants, other representatives and personnel of OWNER indepxttdent testing laboratories and govermetaal agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Work at reasonabl"mes for their observation), inspecting and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of CONTRACTOR's site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. Tests and Inspections 13.3. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. 13A. OWNER shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, legs. or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 13A.1. for inspections, tests or approvals covered by paragraph 13.5 below: 13.4.2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to paragraph 13.9 E)MCOENUM col-UTIOM 19108 (1990 E(itim) W1 CITY OF FORT COLLIM M013MCATION5 (REV 42000) below shall be paid as provided in said paragraph 13.9; and 13.4.3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents, 135. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility fir armrging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish ENGINEER the required certificates of inspection, or approval. CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvalsrequired for OWNERts and FNGINEER's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. 13A If any Work (or the work of others) that is to he inspected, tested or approved is covered by CONTRACTOR without written concurrence of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by FTIGINEER, be uncovered for observation. 13.7. Uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.6 shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense unless CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of CONTRACTOR's intention to cover the same and FNGINFER has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. Uncovering Work: 13.8. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for ENGINEER's observation and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense. 13.9. If F.NGINEF.R considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by ENGINEER or inspected or tested b others, CONTRACTOR, at ENGINEER's request. shall uncover. expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work in question. furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment If it is found that sudm Work is defective. CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, ides and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting born such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction, (including but not limited to all casts of repair or replacement of work of others); and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and. if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof; may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. If, however, such Work is not found to be aefective, CONTRACTOR shall be al lowod an increase in the Contract Rice or an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such 27 damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction removal or replacement of CONTRACTOR'S defeetivv Work. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an estersion of the Contract Times (or lvlilestones) because of any delay in performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER of OWNER's rights and remedies hereunder. ARTICLE 14—PAI'MENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Schedule of Values: 14,1- The schedule of values established as provided in paragraph 2.9 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to ENGINEER. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed Application for ProgrewPaymtrrrt• 14.2. At least twenty days before the date established for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month). CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review an Application fix Payment filled out and signed IN CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the ani date of the Application and accomped by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice or other documentation warranting that OWNER has received the materials and equipment free and clew of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to protect OWNER's interest therein all of which will be satisfactory to OWNER. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. AnLftinLs that are wid>lieltl ¢}_the OWNER shall not be subject to substitution by the CONTRACTOR with severities or aarran_gCr�ents involving an escrow custodian_shiD. BY� orr executing the implication far vayment form the CONTRACTOR expressly waives his right to the benefitsof Colorado Revised Statutes. Section 24-91-]01. et sea. CONTRACTOR's Warrtrnly of Title: 14.3. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees thattitle to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. Review of.4pplicabioas for Progress Payment: 14.4. ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a EXI)C OENBLA.L COMADONS 1910-8 (1990 E&5m) w/CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 42000) recommendation of payment and present the Application to OWNER or return the Application to CONTRACTOR indicating in writing ENGINEER'S reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to OWNER with ENGINEER's recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of the last sentence of paragraph 14.7) become due and when due «rill be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR 14.5. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by ENGINEER to OWNER, based on ENGINEER's on -site observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional and on ENGINEER's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of ENGINEER's knowledge, information and belief 143.1. the Work has progressed to the point indicated, 14.5.2. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under paragraph 9.10, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation), and 14.53, the conditions precedent to CONTRACTOR's being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled insofar as it is ENGINEER's responsibility to observe the Wofk. However, by recommending any such payment ENGINEER will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: (i) exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections have been made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents or (ii) that there may not be other matters or Issues between the parties that might entitle CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally by OWNER or entitle OWNER to withhold payment to COI TRACTOR 14.6. ENGINEER'S recommendation of any payment, including fuel payment, shall not mean that ENGINEER is responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of Work, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to perform or furnish Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 14.7. ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if. in ENGINEER'S opinion it would be incorrect to make the representations to 29 CONTRACTOR at any time may notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that CONTRACTOR considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certifkate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of %bat part of the Work to determine its status of completion If ENGINEER does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor If ENGINEER considers that partof the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of paragraphs 14.8 end 14.9 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.10.2. No occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work will be accomplished prior to compliance with the requirements of paragraph 5.15 in respect of property insurance. final Inspection: 14.11. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, ENGINEER will make a final inspection with OWNER and CONTRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such work or rent edy such dcficicncies Find Application for Payment: 14.12. After CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of ENGINEER and delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by paragraph5.4, certificates of inspection, marked -up record documents (as provided in pamgmph6.19) and other documents, CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by subparagraph 5.4.13, (ii) consent of the surely, if any, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or releases in full and affidavit of CONTRACTOR that (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services• material and equipment for which a Lien could be feted, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bill:, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which OWNER or OWNFR's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied if arty Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or revelpt in full, CONTRACTOR may fianish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER appinst any Lien Releases or waivers of liens and the consent of the surety to finalize pmymem are to be submitted on forms conforming to the format of the O WNFR'S standard forms bound in the RMO manual. Rini Paymem andAcceptaace: 14.13. If, on the basis of ENGINEER's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been f ilfitkd, ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing ENGINEER.'s recommendation of payrnent and present the Application to OWNER for payment. At the same time ENGINEER will also give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 1415. Otherwise, ENGINEER will return the Application to CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Thirty days after presentation to OWNER of the Application and accompanying documentation, in appropriate form and substance and with ENGINEF.R's recommendation and notice of acceptability, the amount recommended by ENGINEER will become duo and willbe paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR subject to paragraph 17.6.2 of these Steltssal04nditt4lts. 14.14. It through no fault of CONTRACTOR final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of CONTRACTOR's final Application for Payment and recommendation of ENGINEER, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph 5,1. the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work billy completed and accepted shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims - Waiver of claims: 14.15. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 14.15.1 a waiver of all claims by OWNER against CONTRACTOR except claims arising Eon unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after EJCDC OEt4FRAt, CONDITION'S 1910-9 (1990 Edtim) 31 w/(ITY OF FORT COLL M MODIFICATIONS MEV 42000) stun finally determined to be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days' written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, and provided OWNER or ENGINEER do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from OWNER payment on the same terms as provided in paragraph 15.4. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if ENGINEER has failed to act on an Application for payment within thirty days after it is submitted or OWNER has failed for thirty days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due. CONTRACTOR may upon seven days written notice to OWTTER and ENGINEER stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due CONTRACTOR- including interest thereon The provisions of this paragaph 15.5 are not intended to preclude CONTRACTOR from making claim under Articles 11 and 12 for an increase in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to CONTRACTOR's stopping Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 16—DISPUTE RMLUTION If and to the oacrit that OWNER and CONTRACTOR have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolutieri method and procedure, if any, shall be as set forth in EdhibitGC-A, "Dispute Resolution Agreement", to he attached hereto and made a part hereof. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, and subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.l0, 9.11 and 9.12. OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. ARTICLE17—NUSCELLANFOUS Gloving Notice. 17.1. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the rum, or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.2. Computation of Time: 17.2.1. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. nation. EJCDC (JFNERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (19W Mum) W1CITY OF FORT COLLAS MODIFICATIONS (REV 42000) 172.1 A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the =Kt midnight will constitute a day. Notice of Chian: 17.3. Should OWNER or CONTRACTOR suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or act of the other party or of any of the other party's employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury cr damage. The provisions of this paragraph 17.3 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of am- applicable statute of limitations or repose.Cumulad a Remedies 17.4. The duties and obligations imposed by these General (bnditicns and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto, alai, in particular but without limitation, the warranties, guarantees and obligations imposed upon CONTRACTOR by pamgraphs 6.12, 6.16, 6.30, 6.31, 6.32,13.1, 13.12,13.14, 14.3 and 15.2 and all of the rights and remedies available to OWNER and ENGINEER thereunder, are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations by spx vial warranty or guarantee or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. Professional Fees and Court Costs Included: 17.5. Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages°, it shall include in each case, but not be lim ited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs. 17�:—Th4_1�vs_4�.1114�344Lriht�Ldo @pPh' to the Ap MenL Reference to two pertinent Colorado statutes are as follows: 17.6.2, If a claim is filed OWNER is required by law (CRS 38-26-107) to withhold from all Dayments to CONTRACTOR sufficient furls to insure the payment of all claims for labor, materials, team hire. sustenance. Provisions. Provender, or other SLLDDIICS used or consumed by CONTRACTOR or his 33 (This page left blank intentionally.) E)CDC OENEM COruxnONS 191" (1990E(Itim) 35 w/ CITY OF FORT COW M MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000)